Home

MAPublisher 8.0 User Guide

1. 90 Chapter 6 Plotting Points Plot Centroids Drawing Tools MAPublisher benefits from Adobe Illustrator drawing tools Any artwork created on a specified MAP layer is incorporated into the map data and can therefore be rescaled and reprojected If the new artwork is of the same feature type as the MAP Layer it will be automatically added to the attribute table Similarly objects can be deleted and moved between layers with basic Adobe Illustrator tools Therefore it is very easy to quickly add and delete features to MAP Layers In addition to this MAPublisher also provides its own tools for creating and managing artwork MAP Area Tools are designed to draw rectangular and elliptical areas of specified dimensions in MAP Units The MAP Vector Crop Tool will trim all the vector data on all active layers falling outside of a crop area N WS FF Brew We oes saps AO NS lt a ns The topics covered in this section are as follows te Soh 7 MAP Area Tool 7 A RNY MAP Vector Crop Tool A Tigges DEN Ea wa f Chapter 7 Drawing Tools 91 MAP Area Tools Tools gt MAP Area Tool Box i MAP Area Tool Ellipse Width Height Enter the width and height for the area to be drawn Center area on click Check this option if you want the area to be drawn centered on the click point O Center area on dick Eas Units z Select a map or page unit to be used for width and height values FUN
2. N or W Coordinate Format This drop down list allows the format of the data to be set on import e g Decimal Degrees Packed DMS see chapter 6 Use first line as a header If the first line of the text file you are importing contains column headings check this box AutoCAD DXF DWG Settings Settings Group Entities By layer Group Entities By Group entities by layer name or geometry Hatches Check this box if you want MAPublisher to read your hatch pattern on import Hatches Read hatches White Lines and Fills Import as is White Lines and Fills Choosing the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Choose the Change white lines and fills to black option to import black lines instead of the files native white lines Choose the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the AutoCAD environment Create black background By geometry Change white lines and fills to black Pen and Brush Patterns Enable this box to view the pen and brush pattern values in the imported attribute table MapInfo TAB and MIF MID Settings Settings Pen and Brush Patterns K C Import as Visible Attributes Enable Specify if you require the registration control points If you enable the _tic_point layer won t ESRI Interchange File Settings
3. Plot by Time Plots points at a specified in metres above mean sea level time interval which are reflected in the Lat Long Point Plot Settings dialog box Position Displays the current position Map Units Meter of the GPS device in either Lat Plot by Distance Plots points at a specified Long or UTM coordinate systems distance interval which are reflected in depending on the option selected Lat Long or Map Units Meter Indicates Dilution of Precision Displays the the Point Plot Settings dialog box if Lat Long or projected coordinates Positional PDOP Horizontal HDOP are used for the display of the and Vertical VDOP values received Start End Route Creates a path using the Position data from the GPS device selected Graphic Style using all valid GPS information received FUNCTIONALITY MAP GPS will collect interpret and apply styles to points and lines from information received from a supported GPS device within an Adobe Illustrator document based on user settings Several plotting options are available for use in MAP GPS For plotting points users can decide whether to plot single points using the Manual Plot option to plot points based on a specific time interval or to plot points based on a set distance interval For plotting lines the Start Route feature may be used to create a line feature containing all valid information received from the GPS device Additionally auxiliary settings may be used to plo
4. the label option for all the data and the layers within them 4 SanFrancisco Downtown E E f l layers that belong to it that may be specified for background labelling purposes I Highways line F 7 HIGHWAY_INTERSTATE_labels L Interstates_line W Land_area F W LAND _Jabels Obstacle Check this option MAP_TITLE l should you want the contents Parks_area W of the layer to be used as PARK labels obstacles for label conflict resolution ADVANCED In the Advanced options dialog box set the Label Placement Area option to the extents based on the current artboard or the extents of labelled source layers To set Label Margins enable the option and enter the extents of the label container in increments of the current document units Data that is outside of the label margins is disregarded in the labelling process Extents of the current artboard Advanced Default Label all designated data Label Placement Area that falls within the extents of the l Coax current artboard i Extents of labeled source layers Extents of labeled source layers Label data only to the extents of the C Label Margins selected MAP Layers Top 0 00 in Left 0 00 in Label Margins Enable the check box Right 0 00 in to add margins to the Bottom 0 00 in selected extents te Obstacles Enable the check box to E Jera enan are not considered specify that paths without stroke are not considered ob
5. 0 cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeees 18 The MAPublisher Tools 5 anton acwcanw nego nenaast cana atneennnneeeenaeaes 21 WMAPUDISHEr 1OOIDEl ccrxy4duevenceadensseoness Keine sede eres weneekeeeare wes 23 MAPublisher Preferences cox wide ature oxtayaweandece teetieaakandarcaae eaves 25 Preparing the Workspace cc ccviGac nates ecacee se eanernnaddivetaeesevesecamases 31 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 33 Import and Export Supported Data Formats 424 0ssnscaess sinevriaweneweseeees 34 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 39 S SLED INP S a ccvswawenneecid norwccddesecrs eames E E E aries 40 Advanced IMPONE 4 05 24000s stn eiridinn ENEE EE EENEN 45 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 49 Georelerendihg esses ciero reser Enina ESSEE ENEE ROETE E 50 MAP Views Panel gamete nace ae et nnr irrin EN ERRE eA EEEE ERENER 52 MAP View EdiItOr Gccnnesdsaeageescadannes tacsgagasenssGaecdursaeuansieecsssans 58 OOE NAP VICW a ae EEES ERE E EET E EE EEA 62 aa a E EEE E E EE ETE S E E EE E was 63 MAP Location 100M oserei it rE ETE EEEE sane eeueeannw enna pares 66 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 67 Attributes FOLOWOIO eessnststis ude as ences SEERE SETEN NEEE TESTA 68 MAP AGI FG ae cr ate eE EEEE E EDERA 71 PCI EA eer EAEE EE AEE EEEE Genesee aA 73 Edit Expression sunvesnnenrveweteduenstbiteeinaneseehtanshlesessbesedaneineane 75 Find amp Replace Attributes lt i lt lt cwssascss eews ee os deeded acne ena eescew eed sun s 79 APDIY EESSI rieres i rere rA EN E EA A E ewan Rees 8
6. Can I run two different versions of MAPublisher at the same time You can run different full version releases i e 8 x and 7 x if you have two versions of Adobe Illustrator For example MAPublisher 8 using Adobe Illustrator CS3 and MAPublisher 7 6 using Adobe Illustrator CS2 You cannot run two point releases of MAPublisher 8 x on the same machine even if you have two different versions of Adobe Illustrator Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 15 Frequently Asked Questions How can I move my MAPublisher license to a new computer Unless you have purchased a floating license MAPublisher is licensed for use on one machine only and includes a protection mechanism that prevents activation on more than one computer If you wish to move your license permanently to a new computer please perform the following steps 1 Completely remove MAPublisher from the existing computer 2 Install MAPublisher on the new computer 3 Launch Adobe Illustrator on the new computer and start the menu Help gt MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management 4 Note the machine ID that will be displayed and email that 12 digit string along with your MAPublisher 8 serialnumber to activation avenza com and indicate that you wish to move the license to a new computer Why does the activation wizard repeatedly open when I have a valid license installed If the activation wizard repeatedly prompts you to activate MAPublisher but you have already have a valid l
7. Clear Click this button to clear the existing parameters of the source coordinate system Specify Source Coordinate System If your MAP View does not currently contain a coordinate system click here to assign one by opening the Specify Source Coordinate System tool Info Click this button to view the parameters of a selected coordinate system The MAP View Editor can be accessed as part of the Advanced Import process chapter 3 or from the MAP Views panel To access via the Advanced Import process click the Create new option in the Destination MAP View section and then click the Editor button to open the dialog box From the MAP Views panel select the MAP View you wish to edit and then select Edit under the Options arrow in the upper right corner of the panel Conversely you can double click the MAP View to open the MAP View Editor The MAP View Editor has a variety of purposes It will allow you to transform coordinate systems change scale edit data positioning in the document change rotation values and rename MAP Views Any or all of these functions can be achieved with a single visit to the MAP View Editor There is also a preview pane where you can see how the edits made to data will affect its extents in the document USING THE MAP VIEW EDITOR Preview Pane By default the Preview Pane displays the data extents with a green rectangle and the MAP View orientation with an arrow pointing north The Previews option allows
8. Feature Type Area stylesheet Area Line Point or Text FUNCTIONALITY MAP Stylesheets allow you to quickly create and apply legends or expression rules based on MAP Attributes using symbols graphic styles and character styles that exist in the respective Adobe Illustrator panels Stylesheets are created using specific values contained in the MAP Attributes panel for the related MAP Layer assigned to the MAP Stylesheet and then stylized using Adobe Illustrator symbology graphic styles or character style MAP Stylesheets can be applied to data on both a one to one basis where specific attribute values are assigned with a specific style or symbol i e Style 1 Value A or with attribute value ranges i e Style 2 Greater than Value B and Less than Value C Stylesheet information will be saved in the Adobe Illustrator file so that the MAP Stylesheet can be quickly edited later USING THE MAP STYLESHEETS PANEL To open the MAP Stylesheets panel choose Window gt MAPublisher Panels gt MAP Stylesheets or click the Stylesheets button on the MAPublisher toolbar lt gt The MAP Stylesheets panel contains a list of all MAP Layers Similar to MAP Views the icons used for these layers are Area Layer L Line Layer P Point Layer T Text Layer By default all MAP Layers will be listed as not belonging to a stylesheet No MAP Stylesheet When a new MAP Stylesheet is created drag a MAP Layer into it This will load its
9. In the MAP Views panel navigate to the Options pullout and then click Specify Anchors 0 Set the Map Anchors to the value of the tie in location in map units using the values determined in step 3 e g 79 5 43 5 11 Set the Page Anchors to the value of the tie in location in Page Units using the values determined in step 4 e g 4 2 Then click OK 12 If you have not previously done so ensure that each layer in your Adobe Illustrator file contains only one feature type Point Area Line Text Legend 13 In the MAP Views panel drag each of the layers which contain your data in to your new MAP View ensuring that you set the appropriate Feature Type in the Define Layer dialog box 14 Repeat steps 1 13 for any other coordinate systems which exist in your document such as inset maps for example 15 Your document is now a georeferenced MAPublisher file wherein each feature is also georeferenced and capable of accepting attributes using the MAP Attributes function see chapter 5 You can also use the MAPublisher Export function to create a GIS file from this newly georeferenced Adobe Illustrator map o me TIPS ON EXPORTING TO OTHER GIS SOFTWARE WITH MAPUBLISHER These strategies do not focus on how to do the procedures as these are discussed in the Export section page 63 but more on what you need to know and understand for successful export results First and most importantly you need to understand that the MAPublisher
10. Settings creation of a layer holding the TIC Points Layer Ignore TIC layer be created MicroStation Design Settings Group Elements Choose how you want to group the elements If you group the elements by level it may result in a large number of output files Coordinate Units Specifies how feature coordinates will be interpreted and converted White Lines and Fills Choosing the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Choose the Change white lines and fills to black option to import black lines instead of the files native white lines Choose the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the MicroStation environment MicroStation Design file import is not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta Settings Group Elements By level By geometry Coordinate Units UOR hite Lines and Fills Import as is Change white lines and fills to black Create black background Other C Drop complex chains Complex Strings Check the Drop box if you want each component of a complex chain to be returned as its own feature Otherwise all elements of the complex chain will be merged into a single linear feature KML Settings Allow Random Colour Mode Checking this box allows Adobe Illustrator to generate random colour settings for your data Se
11. Spatial Relationships A map allows you to identify spatial relationships e g a fire tower located inside a park but it relies on you to derive this information from it Topology Topology is a mathematical process for determining spatial relationships It does this by expressing different spatial relationships as lists of features i e an area is defined by the boundary lines The primary advantage of this type of data storage is that it is more efficient and permits faster processing of larger data sets A1 22 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide GIS Backgrounder Graphics Backgrounder WHY IS THE GRAPHICS ENVIRONMENT GOOD FOR MAPPING Avenza supports the fact that performing map related graphics tasks is best done in the right environment a powerful graphics program like Adobe Illustrator This environment offers practicality freedom and easy maneuverability for fast cost efficient and professional graphic output results The MAPublisher environment focuses on the map graphics first with the right GIS data management tools to facilitate the map production process in the easiest and most efficient way This is in direct contrast to traditional GIS software that are designed and written for the analysis of geographic data with the graphic map production coming second almost as an afterthought This means that as powerful as most GIS are for analysis they were never designed for cartographic or publication quality mapping Carto
12. Uses Dougles Peucher line simplification Maintains topology between areas with shared edges FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Simplify Lines filter allows for the simplification or generalization of imported vector data The Simplify Lines function uses the popular Douglas Peucker algorithm for removing nodes and vertices during simplification For more information on the Douglas Peucker algorithm see Appendix A1 Simplify Lines is used to reduce the number of points required to represent a vector encoded line where the lines are approximated by a stream of X Y coordinates The function can be used on L Line or Al Area layers and removes nodes based upon a proximity value in either Page Units or Map Units The list of Map Units depends on the MAP View coordinate system e g angular units page units degrees etc for geodetic coordinate systems linear units such as metre feet for projected coordinate systems The Proximity value or simplification tolerance is based on the vertical difference between the begin end line and points off a line not the distance between anchor points on the line The Douglas Peucker algorithm takes the proximity value and iterates through the line vertices to determine the points that fall within the specified proximity distance off the line and removes those vertices Once all vertices are determined to be greater than the proximity value the line processing ends A smaller proximity value will usually
13. ArcMinute Units Per Degree 60 Angular Units Editor Definition Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems A2 7 The Geodetic Datasource Coordinate Points For Coordinate Points you must specify the coordinate point dimensions in either 2D or 3D For Geodetic and Projected Coordinate Points the Longitude and Latitude style of units must be entered for all 2D Dimensional Points The Longitude Latitude and Ellipsoid Height style of units must be entered for 3D Dimensional Points amp Geodetic Point Style Editor Identification Definition Dimensions D Longitude Label Geodetic longitude Units Degree Latitude Label Geodetic latitude Units Degree Geodetic Point Style Editor Datum Shifts o Projected Point Style Editor Dimensions On East Label Easting Units Meter North Label Northing Units Meter Height Label Height Units Meter Projected Point Style Editor For Datum Shifts you must select an Envelope appropriate geographic area of use If you are unsure of a more specific envelope leave it se to the default World Envelope The Source and Target text boxes are used to specify the two geodetic models the Transformation is valid for The Method specifies the necessary parameters to define a particular datum transformation With the proper method selected enter the appropriate parameters for your datum transformation Be sure to define the appropriate
14. MAPublisher LabelPro can only be used in conjunction with MAPublisher documents MAP LabelPro generates static text meaning the map extent and scale should be established prior to labelling through MAPublisher Once the labels are generated they remain placed on the map unless explicitly deleted and the map is re labeled Before labelling with MAP LabelPro it is necessary to create a destination text layer a layer on which the new labels will be contained Create a new Adobe Illustrator layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel In the MAP Views panel drag the new layer to the MAP View containing the features to be labelled Be sure to set the feature type to Text when prompted To use a suppression layer for labels that could not be placed by MAP LabelPro create another text layer for this purpose For each source layer MAP LabelPro derives the labels from a selected attribute column Use the MAP Attributes panel to analyze and or edit the information prior to labelling It is not possible to label based on an expression e g a road layer with classes such as street highway and toll road can only be labelled with a single style and rule To label multiple classes of a layer use the Split Layer option of the MAP Selection Filter to create new layers for each class see chapter 11 In the MAPublisher Preferences section for MAP LabelPro base rule and style folder paths can be set By default invisible objects are ignored by MAP Label
15. ak Li E w BEN i j 5 i 4 3 a a ya a if A Wei ad g p iiaa pe wi bigs m r I a k i j j k Ki i 4 qi a i a ai ma l 4s 1 i Sa j amp i 7 u IS e j 4 a E i Lt 2 l B e 5 me m PET E i 7 t hr j i F m yee When Map Quality Matters Avenza w User Guide Microsoft MacOS 5 EREN SNC Windows Avenza MAPublisher 8 User Guide Copyright 2000 2009 Avenza Systems Inc All rights reserved MAPublisher 8 for Adobe Illustrator User Guide for Windows and Macintosh Avenza MAPublisher and When Map Quality Matters are registered trademarks of Avenza Systems Inc Adobe Illustrator Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc or its subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions All other software product names and brands including trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners This manual and the software described in it are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Avenza Systems Inc or its related companies or successors Avenza Systems Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors omissions or inaccuracies that may appear in this book Except as permitted by such license no part of thi
16. describes the length of the path in world units This property cannot be set describes the scaling of the line stroke Editing this value will scale the stroke weight describes the x coordinate in the document units of the current point describes the y coordinate in the document units of the current point describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document There will never be two pieces of artwork with the same ID value at the same time This property cannot be set describes the name of the point Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the horizontal scaling of a point object Editing this value will scale the symbol in the X axis describes the vertical scaling of a point object Editing this value will scale the symbol in the Y axis describes the rotation in degrees of the art around its anchor point Editing this value will rotate art describes the Symbol in use Editing this property will apply the selected symbol to the art describes the x coordinate in the world units of the current point describes the y coordinate in the world units of the current point describes the x coordinate in the document units of the current point text For text on a path or text in a path this will be the x coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path describes the y coordinate in the document units of the current point For text on a path or text in a path this will
17. dgn Not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv KML kml S 57 000 TIGER Line rt1 bw1 USGS Digital Line Graph dlg opt USGS Spatial Data Transfer Standard SDTS ddf See chapter 2 for a description of these formats Two import filters will be discussed in detail in this section Simple Import This filter is designed to provide a fast way to import one file or several files of the same data format and coordinate system into Adobe Illustrator d z Advanced Import This filter provides functionality to f E ag Se Ni import a number of files of differing data type and or U e anaa N LC coordinate systems into Adobe Illustrator Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 39 Simple Import File gt Import Map Data gt Simple and MAP Toolbar Format Select the data type you Simple Import wish to import This drop down list shows the names of all MAPublisher supported data types Settings Opens a Settings dialog box if the file format requires the input of extra parameters such as for the import of DGN DXF DWG E00 GML KML MIF MID Tab and Delimited Text Data see facing page Format ERER i Dataset nts Avenza MAPublisher 8 Tutorial Data canada shp Dataset Displays the directory path and filename for the currently selected file s You can also manually type in the dataset location here Encoding System Browse
18. geographic 3D Datum WGS 1984 Geodetic WGS 84 Vertical Reference Envelope Sphere 168 W to 162 W by country Point Style Projected Point in Meters Projection Transverse Mercator LJ LJ Parameter central_meridian false_easting false_northing latitude_of_origin scale_factor Geodetic Coordinate System Editor A2 12 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource Projected Coordinate System Editor CREATE EDIT AND DELETE GEODETIC DATASOURCE OBJECTS Creating A New Object Category 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 When necessary select the Geodetic or Projected category and then click the New Category button to create a new object category Deleting An Existing Object Category 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 When necessary select the Geodetic or Projected category and then click the Delete Category button to delete an object category Creating A New Object Within A Category 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 When necessary select the Geodetic or Projected category and then click the New Object button to create a new object 3 Inthe New Object dialog box Identification tab enter a name for the new object NOTE The name must be unique
19. All items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are selected NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result Only the items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected MAP STYLESHEET NAME Ontario Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are assigned the selected style POPULATION lt 1000000 Result All items with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta Result All items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are assigned the selected style NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result Only items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style Example Complex Expressions SELECTION FILTER or MAP STYLESHEET LIKE NAME New Result all items with the string of letters New in the NAME column are selected e g New Brunswick and Province of Newfoundland STARTSWITH NAME o Results all items that starts with the letter o Ontario are selected EDIT SCHEMA LOWER NAME applied to column name Result All items in column name are assigned the value of the column NAME in lower case e g ontario for Ontario
20. Clear Click this button to clear the existing parameters of the source coordinate system Specify Click this button to open the Specify Source Coordinate System tool see Appendix 2 enabling you to search for coordinate systems by specifying a text string Results are displayed in the Search category 45 Advanced Import ADVANCED IMPORT FUNCTIONALITY Advanced Import provides an alternative method of importing map data into Adobe Illustrator Its focus is for the map maker who has a collection of map data that they wish to import into Adobe Illustrator at the same time This function can deal with import of multiple formats and varying coordinate systems with the dialog box providing a list of files flagged for import PREREQUISITES In order to import data via Advanced Import you must first set up your Adobe Illustrator document Please see the guidelines for setting up your page that are included in the Simple Import Prerequisites section in this chapter Once your page has been set up you can open MAPublisher Advanced Import This is located under the File menu at the Import Map Data pullout or from the MAPublisher Toolbar button or by using the keyboard shortcut Alt Shift Ctrl A USING ADVANCED IMPORT Dialog Box Overview The dialog box itself is comprised of a list box for the display of currently selected files buttons to Add Remove or Edit files for Import and a section for the specification of an output c
21. For more information on GML and the GML simple features profile please visit the Open Geospatial Consortium web site www opengeospatial com Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions gml xml xsd Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Varies Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes xsd Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute xml_type Line Yes Text No Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 11 MAPublisher Import Formats MAPublisher Unicode Support This section contains information regarding Unicode character encoding in MAPublisher MAPublisher supports Unicode character encoding in MAP Views MAP Attributes MAP Stylesheets and MAP Selection Filters MAPublisher can also reference Adobe Illustrator layers graphic styles and character styles using Unicode encoding To use Unicode character encoding you require a Unicode compliant font Mac OS X users will have Unicode compliant fonts installed with OS X Windows users will require Unicode compliant fonts to render Unicode For more information on Unicode visit http www unicode org The following tables display Unicode UTF8 support in MAPublisher for GIS data formats that are Unicode UTF8 compliant Unicode support for importing and exporting data is different so for e
22. Leader Width and Arrow Style adjusts the thickness and style of the leader line respectively NOTE Text as obstacles will not work unless the Allow labels to cross lines option is disabled This is because text obstacles are treated as areas and not text Also text will only be avoided being placed where it intersects the outline of the shape and not within it Using the Placement option Vertical Split may require additional line smoothing straightening or simplifying 184 Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro MAP LabelPro Rules POINT RULES The Point Rules dialog box contains the label configuration options for labelling Point layers and follows the same conventions mentioned for the previous two data types E Point Rules Allow stacking Labels are E a ERUS allowed to stack up to a acement Click the e i placement buttons in V Allow stacking x ahd aa the desired order of ams priority Use the Clear Clear All Allow labels to cross lines Last or Clear All options Labels are allowed to to remove selections E cross line features and Unselected positions Fi Aion blvd to cress e area boundaries will not be considered i Allow font reduction Automatically reduces the Select positions in order of priority label size incrementally Unselected positions will not be tried when necessary Each Centered on point e F Centered on point aes a A ma shrinks the selec
23. MAC OS X e Adobe Illustrator CS3 CS4 PowerPC G5 or above Intel recommended e Mac OS X 10 4 or higher 1 GB of RAM minimum 2 GB of RAM or higher recommended e 300 MB of available hard disk space Adobe Illustrator CS2 has been deprecated and as such we highly recommend using MAPublisher on Adobe Illustrator CS3 or CS4 only NOTE Not all foreign language versions of Adobe Illustrator may be supported Please contact support avenza com for more information 14 Chapter 1 Getting Started System Requirements Installation Instructions Please note that MAPublisher is licensed for use on a single computer and once activated will be node locked to that computer and will only function on that computer Therefore before proceeding with installation and activation please ensure that MAPublisher is being installed on the appropriate computer Different full version releases i e 8 x and 7 x can be installed on the same computer if two versions of Adobe Illustrator are present For example MAPublisher 8 with Adobe Illustrator CS3 and MAPublisher 7 6 3 with Adobe Illustrator CS2 However two point releases of MAPublisher 8 x cannot be on the same machine For example MAPublisher 8 1 with Adobe Illustrator CS4 cannot operate together with MAPublisher 8 0 with Adobe Illustrator CS3 on the same computer In the other cases it is recommended to un install older versions of MAPublisher before installing the newest release In t
24. Spatial Index Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required N A Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute sdts_type Line Yes Text No KEYHOLE MARKUP LANGUAGE KML KML is an XML based language for managing the display of three dimensional geospatial data in the programs Google Earth Google Maps Google Mobile and WorldWind The KML file specifies a set of features for display Each feature always has a longitude and a latitude and can have other data such as tilt heading and altitude KML shares some of the same structural grammar as GML KML files are very often distributed as KMZ files which are zipped KML files with a kmz extension Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions kml kmz Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required No Donut Polygon Yes 3D Support Yes Point Yes Line Yes Text No Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected KML file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Allow Random Colour Mode Enabling this option will allow Adobe Illustrator to generate random colour settings for your data e Expand Network Links Checking this box will enable the use of network linked KML files Appendix 1 Technical Re
25. Value 3 Style D assigned to Column X Value 4 etc Appendix3 MAPublisher8HowTo sForLegacyUsers A3 1 CREATING STYLE RULES BASED ON MULTIBLE ATTRIBUTE COLUMNS Assign Legend Info previously provided options to assign legend criteria to legend elements based on values in multiple attribute columns This functionality can now be achieved using Advanced expressions in the MAP Stylesheet Editor Choose the Advanced option to compose advanced expressions The following are some examples of multi column expressions in a world countries stylesheet using a string type column named CONTINENT and an integer type column named POPULATION CONTINENT Africa AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result only African countries with populations less than one million are assigned the selected style CONTINENT Africa OR POPULATION lt 1000000 Result all African countries and all countries with populations less than one million are assigned the selected style CONTAINS CONTINENT America AND POPULATION gt 1000000 Result only countries in North and South America with populations more than one million are assigned the selected style CONTINENT Europe AND POPULATION gt 1000000 OR CONTINENT Asia AND POPULATION gt 10000000 Result countries in Europe with populations more than one million and countries in Asia with populations more than ten million are assigned the selected style NUMBER OF UNIQUE ATTRIBUTES Unique values are dis
26. When started from a specific MAPublisher panel options menu MAPublisher Preferences open on the current panel property sheet Chapter 1 Getting Started 25 MAPublisher Preferences MAPUBLISHER PREFERENCES SETTINGS Clicking one of the MAPublisher category or sub categories on the left hand list displays the corresponding property sheet displayed on the right General Preferences The General property sheet is used to change the layer ordering rule for all MAPublisher panels By default layers are sorted alphabetically only The other option is to first group layers by data type first Legend Text Point Line and Area and subsequently in alphabetical order for each group MAPublisher Preferences MAP Attributes rr mom acne R MAP LabelPro P MAP Selection Filters Panel 5 amp MAP Stylesheets Sorting Style Set to Name then type EE Editor for an alphabetical sorting Set to Panel Type then name to first sort the layers MAP Views per data type Legend Text Point EE Editor Line or Area Panel MAP Attributes Preferences The MAP Attributes preference category does not contain general settings but has a sub category for the MAP Attributes panel see chapter 5 for a full description of the MAP Attributes panel MAP Attributes gt Panel Preferences MAPublisher Preferences Show icons in column headers Enable e General MAP Attributes gt Panel E S KE A S r b MAP iiaii
27. _ Coordinate System Coordinate system of the Units Units of the coordinate system units Meter m layer if specified if specified Shif olick to copy coordinates Page X Y Page Anchors Copy Notification When the MAP location tool is selected on the tool bar you will see this text enabling you to copy the current X and Y coordinates of the mouse cursor FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Location Tool displays the coordinates of the mouse cursor on the selected map layer in current Map Units and in Degrees Latitude and longitude values are in reference to the geodetic datum set in the coordinate system definition When no georeferencing is present on the selected layer the dialog box will display the coor dinates in Page Units The dialog box will also display the Map and Page Anchors the Scale Angle of rotation and the Coordinate System and Units of the MAP Layer The MAP Location Tool also enables the X and Y position of the cursor in the current map units WX and WY to be copied to the clipboard An example of a use of this function is that it enables you to build point files in an external text editor files which can then be re imported with MAPublisher Coordinates are copied with the X value first and Y value second and are delimited by a comma For example 79 396527 43 631979 USING THE MAP LOCATION TOOL To use the MAP Location Tool click the button in Adobe Illustrator Tools pa
28. amp 4 San Francisco Downtown IO Interstates_line S STREETNAME HIGHWAY_INTERST 1 Default Default 7 Ignored B Parks_area S LAND_ID PARK_labels 1 Default Default A Ignored Public_Schools_point FACILITY_I SCHOOL _labels 1 Default Default A Ignored Setup Layers Obstacle Layers Source Art C Convert to upper case 5 ee nd Label all art on source layers By default only generate text labels for all data contained on the source layers Label only selected art on source layers When enabled generate text labels for currently selected data on the source layers Exactly as found in source attribute By default generates text labels exactly as they are from the attribute table Convert to lower case Enable this option if you wish to have all the text labels converted to lower case when placed Convert to upper case Enable this option to have all the text labels converted to upper case when placed Statistics type Choose an option from the drop down list to display labelling statistics for the completed labelling process To access MAP LabelPro click the MAP LabelPro button in the main MAPublisher toolbar Der rF t 176 MAP LabelPro Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro A I bi 5 Oa S Suppression Layer Repository for labels that could not be placed based on the rules set Save amp Label Save the current settings in the LabelPro configuration dialog box and perfor
29. geographic location is known e g a building or graticule grids on a scanned map this information is usually given by the data provider if not obvious on the map itself The position in page coordinates for the same point is found using the Adobe Illustrator nfo panel Again once the relationship between the real world coordinates and the page coordinates is established MAPublisher will be able to perform coordinate system transformations rescaling plotting points etc For further information please refer to the appendices See appendix A1 General Tips on Georeferencing an Adobe Illustrator file Appendix A2 provides general information on projections and gives details of the MAPublisher coordinate systems as well as customizing options 50 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing Georeferencing Illustration of page and map anchors Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 51 Georeferencing MAP Views Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Views and MAP Toolbar MAP Views List of the distinct configurations for geospatial parameters MAP Layers An alphabetical list of the layers that comprise each MAP View symbolized by feature type Lock button Click this box to lock or unlock the Layer mirrored in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel MAP VIEWS en alaska P A alaska area mE hawaii Zoom To MAP View MAP Layer Zoom to the selected MAP View or MAP Layer data extent Switch MAP
30. gt e Some external file formats have limits on the number of characters allowed for field names Therefore during the export from MAPublisher some field names might get truncated to comply to the chosen external file format For example ESRI shapefiles are limited to 10 characters confirmed up to ArcGIS 9 2 ESRI Interchange File e00 to 16 characters MapInfo to 30 characters 74 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Edit Schema Operator buttons Click to insert an operator into the expression at the current cursor position Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional info is reported Advanced toggle Click to show or hide the Expression Components section Objects List of attribute and property columns constants and functions for use in the expression To expand a folder click to collapse click Double click items to insert them into the expression Layer attributes List of the attribute and property columns which comprise the current layer Constants nsert either True or False into the expression if required Functions List of functions for use in the expression if required Expressions List of expressions from the MAP Selection Filters saved expressions see chapter 11 Click one or more entries to copy to the expression builder multiple selections are concatenated with the AND statement Edit Expression Accessed from Edit Schema A
31. new brunswick for New Brunswick PROPER name applied to column Proper_name Result All items in Proper_name are assigned the value of the column name in proper case or capital case e g Ontario for ontario New Brunswick for new brunswick ROUND POPULATION AREA 3 applied to column density Result All items are calculated as population divided by area rounded to three decimals 78 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Edit Expression Find amp Replace Attributes Find Replace Choose to Find variables or to Find amp Replace variables simultaneously Find what Enter a variable on which to perform a search in the current attribute table Note this list will also contain previous criteria Replace with Enter a variable on which to replace found items Note this list will also contain previous criteria Find Replace All Attributes Just in Column Perform the Find or Find amp Replace on all values in the current layer or just in a specified column FUNCTIONALITY MAP Attributes panel gt Find amp Replace Z Find and Replace Find Replace Find Next Find what Florida Replace with FL Replace In All Attributes S STATE_ABER v Case sensitive C Match whole word only Find Next Move to the next value matching the Find what variable Replace Replace the selected value with the Replace with variable Replace All Replace al
32. 2 Latitude Intervals Specify the interval for each be any meridian within the data extents Longitude line of latitude Pass through longitude Specify a line of a through 0 Interval 2 Longitude Intervals Specify the interval for longitude that must be included this can a ee be any meridian within the data extents Style MAP Grid Style on Style Select a style for the graticules Don t label Checking any of these boxes Vertices 9 e Vertices Use the slider to increase or will not label a specific column or row L Don tlabel _ First row C First column C Last row C Last column Be Greg e AmE E ROAS a al In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Grids and Graticules is found in the Filter gt MAP Legend menu 132 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules be used in the construction of the graticules use a higher number if graticules will be curved Measured Grid Settings Cell Size SPON Width 100000 C Fixed Number of Cells Fixed Number of Cells Check this box to coy widen Megh operit the dimensions jp enforce a set number of columns and of each cell comprising the grid in the Height 100000 PETEM rows in the grid current map units Rows 1 Positioning Preset Origin Choose this option to select e Preset Origin Grid Passes Through Point Grid passes through point Choose this a preset X and Y origin OOO option to select specific coordinates oOo X 0 m for t
33. 5 MAP Stylesheets option Use General preference Set to 1 ES Editor Name then type for an alphabetical Panel sorting Set to Type then name to first MAP Views sort the layers per data type Legend E Editor Text Point Line or Area Panel MAP Views Preferences The MAP Views preference category does not contain general settings but has sub categories for the MAP Views editor and panel see chapter 4 for a full description of the MAP Views editor and panel MAP Views gt Editor Preferences In the MAP Views Editor the Preview Pane allows to display up to 10 MAP Views represented in different Coloured boxes The MAP Views Editor preference property sheet allows to customize the colour of these coloured boxes MAPublisher Preferences 2 General MAP Views gt Editor MAP Attributes ye tne Current MAP View colour L o 5 MAP Selection Filters MAP View 1 colour Panel MAP View 2 colour gt amp MAP Stylesheets MAP Wes 3 alar E Editor Panel MAP View 4 colour MAP Views MAP View 5 colour FF0000 MAP View 6 colour MAP View 7 colour MAP View 8 colour MAP View 9 colour MAP View 10 colour Chapter 1 Getting Started 29 MAPublisher Preferences MAP Views gt Panel Preferences MAPublisher Preferences 2 General MAP Views gt Panel MAP Attributes Panel Qe MAP LabelPro 5 MAP Selection Filters Panel amp MAP Stylesheets
34. An empty relative path indicates the same folder as the document Relative Path Select this option to set a path relative to the current location of the Adobe Illustrator document best used when files have to be moved Newly created documents must be saved Remove Click this button to clear the for this option to be enabled current Source Media Folder settings FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Web Author tool exports a MAPublisher document as an interactive Flash map for Web display Together with the map artwork Web tags callout bubbles are exported Prior to the export process the MAP Web Author panel is used to create edit add or modify these interactive objects The Web tags can either be populated one object at the time or for a selection of objects Multiple The information can be entered manually or extracted from the MAP Attributes fields when available for the object layer In Multiple Web tagging mode the same text format is applied to all Web tags Individual Web tags can be edited later on through the Modify dialog box Text and image formatting is done using simple HTML codes the results can be checked in the Callout Preview window available in the Web Tag Dialog Additional settings are available during the export process such as callout bubble colour selection colour etc 146 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Panel PREREQUISITES In order to use MAP Web Author you must first complete a map using MA
35. EAEE ERRIA RRR EES 178 MAP LabelPro SIVICS a cesauwptctensee cease eee essere eee ens EREE SEEE 180 MAP LabelPro Rules srerriicrrerseisdsrriseokid antt t iii na Er EE REESEN 182 Label Verificati n srsssrscisisccrrecitkersiirereee d SEENT E Era e EEES 186 187 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide ccc cece cece cece ene eenes A1 1 Appendix 2 Coordinate SYStGMNS 29 000eceserseeadeseedensannsed eaeesseensees A2 1 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users eeeeeeeee A3 1 Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files ccc eeeeeeeeees A4 1 Appendix 5 GIOSSAl wart ony ae rer caesar ys ed ERTER LENA TARO A5 1 Contents Vil Introduction MAPublisher 8 is the newest version of a powerful suite of plug ins for Adobe Illustrator CS3 and CS4 that bridges the gap between geographic information systems GIS and high end graphic design software in order to facilitate the map creation process MAPublisher 8 offers additional panels functions tools and filters to the powerful Adobe Illustrator design environment that enable GIS data files to be used as a base for cartographic production destined for print or Web contents Working from a traditional Adobe Illustrator document users create and edit their data organized through layers either new or imported with MAPublisher Users benefit from the Adobe Illustrator graphic tools as well as additional custom MAPublisher functions and panels to create ed
36. EE Editor Panel MAP Views Sort list using natural string comparison Sort list using natural string comparison Enable this option to use the natural sorting for layer and MAP Stylesheet names using numbers e g 1 2 10 instead of 1 10 2 RESET MAPUBLISHER PREFERENCES TO DEFAULT SETTINGS MAPublisher Preferences can be reset directly from the MAPublisher Preferences dialog box A right click ona category will display the choice to reset the preference setting of this category or the entire MAPublisher Preferences Reset MAP Views and sub preferences Reset all preferences MAPublisher Preferences will also be reset if the Adobe Illustrator preferences are reset or deleted Adobe often recommends this to solve some problems with the application Adobe Illustrator preferences are reset by doing one of the following e Press and hold Alt Control Shift Windows or Option Command Shift Mac OS as Adobe Illustrator is starting The current settings are deleted e Remove or rename the AlPrefs file Windows or Adobe Illustrator Prefs file Mac OS New preferences files are created the next time Adobe Illustrator is restarted 30 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Preferences Preparing the Workspace Before you can start using MAPublisher you must first set up your Adobe Illustrator document It is at this point that you define your page size and units set your print orientation and gene
37. MAP Stylesheet or into another stylesheet via drag and drop or with the new Switch MAP Stylesheet button agi Only at this stage will the Delete option be activated Note that moving a stylesheet to No MAP Stylesheet will not restore the data to its default symbology it will simply remove the relationship between attribute value and style symbol Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 105 MAP Stylesheets Panel Duplicate Stylesheet can be used to create copies of existing stylesheets Even though the copy will not contain a MAP Layer at first the style rules which exist between attributes of the original layer and the symbology will be retained This is useful to create different versions of a map for each stylesheet duplicate edit the styles that relate to each value in each stylesheet To apply the different styles MAP Layers only need to be moved from one stylesheet to another via drag and drop or with the new Switch MAP Stylesheet button agra Creating a MAP Stylesheet Legend A legend can be quickly created using any MAP Stylesheet Any area line point or text MAP Stylesheets can be used for a legend The legend is created by drawing an area line point symbol or displaying the word Style using the character style set by the rule followed by the expression associated with that MAP Stylesheet rule A Area MAP Stylesheet Legend Ea Ontario PROV _NAME Ontario P Point MAP Stylesheet Legend 9 Captials CAPITAL Y Line MAP Stylesheet Leg
38. MAPublisher 8 The point style is now selected from a pop up dialog box which contains a larger preview of all the styles present in the document including their full name By default the point s position is plotted using the same coordinate system as the current MAP layer but users can now elect to plot using another coordinate system geodetic or projected Another new feature is the ability to plot centroids A point may now be plotted at the centroid of every area on a selected MAP area layer What s New in MAPublisher 8 ix MAPublisher License Management The new MAPublisher License Management system helps users manage their licensing in a more streamlined and user friendly manner Users can now evaluate the product register retrieve their licenses and checkout a floating license all in a single dialog box Additionally MAPublisher panels are now marked with a lock icon when the software is not licensed Split Layer The MAPublisher Selection Filters panel has a new option that allows users to split a layer into new layers based on an expression The qualifying features can either be copied or moved to a new layer while maintaining all their attribute data KML Export for Google Maps Google Maps does not support the KML Schema tag or any derived tag i e KML files with attributes values As such MAPublisher 8 KML export settings now includes an option to export to KML without the attributes information so that the resultant KML
39. MAPublisher License Management Click the MAPublisher LabelPro branch and then click the Evaluate button as previously explained License Management Feature Version Type Status User Serial Number MAPublisher Permanent Licensed Permanently MP80 12345 MAPublisher None Unlicensed The evaluation version of MAPublisher LabelPro scrambles the text of placed labels but preserves the case spacing and punctuation so that the results give a sense of how actual labels would be placed based on the rule settings See chapter 17 for more details on MAP LabelPro functionality and usage NOTE MAPublisher and MAPublisher LabelPro can only be both floating licenses or both local licenses fixed or evaluation A user on a floating license wishing to evaluate MAPublisher LabelPro will have his main MAPublisher and MAPublisher LabelPro licenses switched to a local evaluation license At the end of the evaluation period the settings for floating license can be reset as described above 20 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher License Management The MAPublisher Tools MAPublisher tools can be found in a number of locations in Adobe Illustrator The MAPublisher Importers can be found MAPublisher Edit MAP Object function under the File menu and by using the keyboard shortcuts and toolbar New Ctrl4N Transform New from Template Shift Ctrl N Arrange d Open Ctr
40. Name FORMAT HAS NO FORMAT HAS NO V V Delimited Text VA ESRI Inter change File FORMAT HAS NO FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES CAD DXF ATTRIBUTES ESRI Inter FORMAT HAS NO ESRI Arcinfo y y FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES Generate ATTRIBUTES GML Simple MapInfo FORMAT HAS NO MicroStation FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES Design ATTRIBUTES FORMAT USES SIMPLE ASCII TEXT FOR ATTRIBUTE NAMES AND MOST VALUES ESRI Arcinfo Generate GML Simple Features MapInfo MID MIF MapInfo TAB Ea MicroStation om k Ea Re Re uel Pis Settir Windows Unicode Support Working with Images When using system encoding Data Format File Directory Filename File Directory Filename f Register Image Register Image Export Image Export Image on Windows XP for example using the default mes pill cL pal 7 n e encoding on Windows XP for example using Japanese encoding on English Windows XP Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 13 MAPublisher Unicode Support Mac OS X Unicode Support Working with Images File Directory Filename File Directory Filename Data Format Register Image Register Image Export Image Export Image Limited su pport not all combinations of Unicode characters are supported a A1 14 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Unicode Support Frequently Asked Questions This section presents a number of frequently asked questi
41. Same as Check this option to transform to a coordinate system that matches that of an existing MAP View FUNCTIONALITY MAP View Editor MAP Views panel gt Edit MAP View New MAP View Advanced Import gt Create New gt Editor Edit Lower 48 C Show Anchors Name Lower 43 i Data Extents LL Corner Scale x 33 763672 t msm OOO Y 10 074219 pt oog Source Coordinate System AvzOrtho1 C Perform Coordinate System Transformation Destination No Coordinate System Specified Same as Alaska Using Datum Shift Specify Destination Coordinate System Click this button to open the Specify Destination Coordinate System right then specify the destination coordinate system for the resulting transformation 20000000 000000 5 L Bi i o Previews Coloured Boxes Specify Specify Specify Datum Shift Click this button to specify a new datum shift Zoom buttons zoom in out or fit to the extents of the map view Previews Select the preview options None Coloured Boxes Thumbnails Thumbnails and Boxes Scale The scale of the MAP View Edit the scale manually or by using the Up and Down arrows to increase or decrease scale by 10 Click the Auto Scale button to rescale the data to fit the page extents Angle The rotation of the MAP View Edit the angle manually or by using the clock hand in the rotation control graphic
42. Style to label the position of the grid or graticule in map units Select actual coordinates or distance from zero with the lower left corner being the origin For end of line labels specify a distance away from the edge of the grid that the labels will be placed and append the current units to each label ADVANCED OPTIONS Click the Advanced button to access additional grid extents and labelling options Modify the extents of the grid by entering new coordinates for the Lower Left and Top Right position of the grid in the current units It is also possible to edit the first value used for cell labels by editing the Start alpha numeric index at values Omit certain alpha characters from cell references with the Do not use characters option For example it may be useful to omit the characters I and O for indexing purposes when entering alpha characters to omit separate characters with a comma The Reference label order option can be edited to change the center labels from alpha numeric A 1 to numeric alpha 1 A or vice versa Advanced Bounding box Lower Left Adjust X and Y values Lower Left for the lower left of the grid extents Kr 47063 6336 1702746 52207 Top Right Adjust X and Y values Top Right for the upper right of the grid extents Xi 1033095 25846 Y 2077770 65357 Labeling options Start alpha numeric index at Edit the first Start al index at value used for cell labels pha in
43. Subset of Current Selection Deselects any art on the current layer that is selected and does not satisfy the chosen selection filter s SPLIT LAYERS A MAP Selection Filter may also be applied to create a new layer containing the selected features Features can either be copied or moved from the source layer to the destination layer with the option to maintain the attribute information from the source layer This function is particularly useful to split a layer that contains a lot of objects For example a road layer with classes such as street highway and toll road could be split in three distinct layers Split Layers can be used as a preliminary to running MAP LabelPro to allow labelling of multiple classes with different styles see chapter 17 or to exporting layers to external GIS formats To use Split Layers an appropriate selection filter must first be created The layer to be split must be selected in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel and the filter must be selected from the list of valid filters in the MAP Selection Filters panel The Split Layers function is started from the MAP Selection Filters panel options menu Split layer name 122 Chapter 11 Making Selections MAP Selection Filters MAP Selection Stats Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Selection Stats or MAP Toolbar 4y AandR All and Reverse You can choose to either select all of the features on the Layer The current MAP Layer and feature type Number Sel
44. T River Name items are listed 3 Il territory PONETID II country Name y ___________ Text layer For each Source Layer select the destination text layer you wish to place the Source Column Select the column that A generated text labels on contains the values you wish to use to ere ee A ey E AE EE EE E 7 label the selected features W Line Labels I I Q Label Settings Click the appropriate button Areatabels See Settings panels below to assign label settings and rules for each cal layer type see below Pointabels Line La bel Setti ngs Follow Don t Follow Line Select whether text K Label Type Q Follow line create text on a path Don t follow line create point text should follow paths or be placed at a point Line Labels Distance from start Auto O Fixed 0 near the selected line Distance from start Controls where the text is Reverse right to eft paths fip upside down text O Enabed ___ located along the line Line Smoothing _ Enabled Offset Smoothed Line 4pt Auto will place text at the midpoint for Label Position Baseine Q O Descender _Q Center 9 Flip upside down labels By default this is always enabled and will automatically orient labels correctly Disabling this straight lines and find the smoothest portion Adjust label if larger than line feature will not flip label closest to the midpoint for curved lines 4 a iii as Fixed will allow f
45. Time or Auto Plot by Distance e Build Route A route will be created from the information in the log file using the selected Graphic style in the Adobe Illustrator panel e Auto Plot by Time Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified times e Auto Plot by Distance Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified distances 174 Chapter 16 MAP GPS Playback Sentence Log MAP LabelPro MAP LabelPro is a comprehensive collision free labelling solution integrated into the MAPublisher framework Using rules and styles for text placement it extracts label information from map layer attributes and performs fast intelligent cartographic text placement Placement rules can be saved to a file and imported into other labelling work sessions Topics covered in this section MAP LabelPro MAP LabelPro Settings MAP LabelPro Styles MAP LabelPro Rules Label Verification MAP LabelPro is available as an optional add on to MAPublisher 8 1 For more information on how to obtain a MAP LabelPro license please contact sales avenza com or visit Www avenza com For information on how to activate a purchased or evaluation license please refer to chapter 1 of this guide NOTE The evaluation version of MAPublisher LabelPro scrambles the text of placed labels but preserves the case spacing and pu
46. Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required No Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute dlg_type Point Yes Line Yes Text No A1 8 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats USGS SDTS CATD DDF SDTS is the USGS robust way of transferring Earth referenced spatial data between dissimilar computer systems with the potential for no information loss It is a transfer standard that embraces the philosophy of self contained transfers i e spatial data attribute georeferencing data quality report data dictionary and other supporting metadata all included in the transfer More info can be found at http mcmcweb er usgs gov sdts Files in the SDTS format will have the extension ddf More information on this format can be found at http mcmcweb er usgs gov sdts A group of ddf files is normally identified by the catalog file or CATD DDF file which relates the files of a single SDTS transfer and binds together all the files with a common prefix Always select the SDTS file which ends in CATD i e HPO1CATD DDF Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions ddf Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No
47. Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes if have prj Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute SHAPE_GEOMETRY Line Yes Text No A1 4 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats MAPINFO INTERCHANGE MIF MID MIF is a published ASCII storage format used by the MapInfo It is used as a file format for map and database exporting importing in MapInfo software products The MapInfo Reference Manual describes the MIF format and all constants it uses for colour style symbol and fill patterns MapInfo Interchange Format Files are often called MIF or MIF MID files A single logical MIF file consists of two physical files having the following file name extensions mif Geometric data mid Attributes for the geometric data These extensions are added to the base name of the MIF file creating separate physical files that must all reside in the same directory You must select the mif file for import Each entity in a mif file has a row of attributes stored in an associated mid file A single mif file contains many different types of geometry however the associated attribute in the mid file must have the same number and type of fields for each entity in the mif file The order of the entries in the two files is sy
48. a map index using this filter you must have created an Index Grid Measured Grid or set of Graticules using the Grids and Graticules filter This grid must exist on a W Legend layer and be selected in order to access the function An index will be created even if grid labels are hidden The T Text layer containing the labels to be indexed must be located in the same MAP View as the grid To access the Make Index tool choose Filter gt MAP Legend gt Make Index or MAPublisher toolbar button A 1 In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Make Index is found in the Filter gt MAP Legend menu Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 137 Make Index USING MAKE INDEX Index Based on Label Position This method will create an index by assigning one index location for each label found on the selected label text layer For example if the label High Street is only found in grid cell A 4 the only entry for High Street in the index file would be as follows High Street A 4 Select the Make index based on label position button to generate an index using this method Then choose the Label layer from the drop down list which contains the text you wish to index Index Based on Label and Matching Feature Position This method will create an index by matching label text on a selected Label Layer to the indicated attribute on the Feature layer creating an index entry for every grid cell in which the feature can be found Note that only features that have la
49. all attributes Clear Click this button to clear the template entries NOTE The template is fully editable It can include attributes regular text with HTML formatting Export to Web The Export to Web button starts the Web Export Dialog described later in this chapter 148 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Panel Callout Title Type here the title of the callout bubble Insert Image Select Manually to browse to the image manually Select By Attribute to type the attribute name containing the path to the image string type Image Width and Height Specify the image width and height in pixel or use original size HTML Text Editor Tools and Graphic Tools Use these tools to edit the text HTML Supported Tags Click here to open a link to Adobe Web site with Flash documentation on HTML supported tags Web Tag Dialog Web Tag Dialog Callout Preview gt Callout Image ii 290px 300px Insert Image Manually By Attribute C Auto Size Entar taut crombhent four tam ralin sh Enter text conte e e callout Edit the callout contents Supported HTML tags may be used to format the text and images in the contents Click here to see which HTML tags are supported in Flash Trigger External URL Advanced Hover URL Target Click URL Target The specified URL s will be loaded when the user hovers or clicks on this art Use the target tag to
50. and beside the layer name e Check that you have colours for the fill and stroke set in the paint panel e Check the setting for the stroke width and increase if necessary Why are my Shapefiles not imported There are a couple of possible causes of this The two items to check for are 1 Make sure that you have all three required files There should be a triplet for each layer coverage with the extensions dbf shp and shx If you are missing any of these files you will not be able to import your files successfully 2 If you have transferred these files from one operating system to another you must always use binary ftp transfer or the files may be corrupted We have found that you cannot rely on the automatic transfer with all ftp utilities Some do not recognize the files as being binary and will transfer them as ASCII EXPORTING ISSUES How do I strip all the attributes from a MAPublisher file Simply drag your MAP Layers into the default MAP View entitled Non MAP layers and all georeferencing and attribute information will be removed Note that this function must only be used as a final step What causes missing features when exporting MAPublisher layers If you are using an pre existing Adobe Illustrator file not created with MAPublisher you must correctly assign MAPublisher status to your layers and data Only one feature type per layer is supported The feature type icon next to your MAP Layer in the MAP Views panel is
51. and graticules to be drawn Such issues may occur if the MAP View is in a polar projection or the extents of the data cross the 180 degree west east meridian If the generation of a grid graticule causes blank or incomplete results the following workflow should be used 1 Reproject the MAP View to a standard Lat Long projection e g NAD27 Lat Long Degrees Generate your grid or graticules on this MAP View Expand the object choose Object gt Expand Create a new Area layer in the MAP View Drag the expanded grid to this new layer Reproject the MAP View back to the original projection EE a Appendix3 MAPublisher8HowTo sForLegacyUsers A3 3 Copy and Paste The MAP Copy Paste function has been removed You can now achieve the same functionality via Adobe Illustrator native Copy Paste tools Use Edit gt Copy or Edit gt Cut to copy art Deselect the art Select the destination layer in the Layers panel Use Edit gt Paste in Front or Edit gt Paste in Back to paste the art into the new layer at its previous location i ea e When pasting to layers which already contain an attribute structure the destination layer must have an attribute schema which matches the source layer e When pasting to layers which contain no attribute structure the destination layer will be assigned the same attribute schema as the source layer e The destination layer can be contained in any MAP View as required e The destination layer mus
52. and tag multiple data layers at the time During the export process the user can customize the outline of Web tags and see a preview of the final product MAP Vector Crop Tool With MAPublisher 8 new Vector Crop Tool users only need to draw a box around an area of interest and all geometry outside the frame is cropped out while preserving attributes and styles MAPublisher LabelPro MAPublisher LabelPro revolutionizes the way users can label map data including using symbols as labels and label conflict resolution with a high degree of customizable rule based labeling options The MAP LabelPro engine uses your map data attributes for labeling with styles rules and controls configured through an intuitive easy to use Graphical User Interface Available as an optional add on to MAPublisher 8 1 MAPublisher Toolbar MAPublisher now has its own customizable toolbar Buttons for importing all MAPublisher filters and toggle buttons for MAPublisher panels can be found on this dockable toolbar MAPublisher Preferences The new MAPublisher Preferences allow users to fully customize their MAPublisher experience Control everything from the way layers are sorted to the font used to display attribute data or style of the MAP Selection Filters panel This includes several previously hidden options that used to be the domain of advanced users MAP Point Plotter Dialog Box The MAP Point Plotter dialog box has been redesigned for the release of
53. are available for use in aligning map objects Grouping and Ungrouping There is grouping and ungrouping functionality When items are grouped you still retain the option of separately accessing querying and otherwise working with the individual components of a map group Store Related Objects Individual but related map objects can be stored together by groups or by layers or both within the graphic file This provides additional control and support in handling and organizing the map components Text Placement The graphics environment offers a truly hands on text placement environment and goes well beyond that of a GIS For example text can be easily placed along any path or outside the map extents and is fully editable A1 2A4 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Graphics Backgrounder Memory Considerations RAM RECOMMENDATIONS Occasional User 1 GB of RAM is recommended A graphics or GIS user who uses MAPublisher with medium sized data sets with up to 20 layers minimal text labels and some low resolution or small coverage raster images Power User 2 GB or more of RAM is recommended A professional cartographer who uses MAPublisher daily and works with large urban data sets including large transportation layers with 20 or more layers raster based air photographs large numbers of text labels complex fill patterns etc RAM USAGE HINTS Users often ask us why is so much RAM needed to operate MAPublisher First of all Ad
54. arrow depicting the new orientation of the data 60 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP View Editor New MAP Views The MAP View Editor is opened by default when creating a New MAP View This will enable you to quickly specify the name coordinate system and page scaling for your new MAP View This functionality will be discussed in detail in Georeferencing an Adobe Illustrator file in appendix A1 General Tips After a new MAP View is created the Specify Anchors option from the MAP Views panel must be used to define the tie in point between Map Anchors and Page Anchors Map Anchor coordinates can be entered in any chosen coordinate system for example latitude and longi tude in degree for projected map IMPORTANT NOTES FOR ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR CS4 USERS Adobe Illustrator CS4 introduced the concept of multiple artboards up to 100 MAPublisher 8 takes this new feature into account in the MAP View Editor When using Adobe Illustrator CS4 the MAP View Editor dialog box has an additional drop down list to select the Active Artboard When this section of the dialog has focus the Preview Pane displays the number of each artboard The current active artboard is shown in white while the others are grayed out The Data Extents LL Corners and Scale calculations are based on the Active Artboard dimensions To move the data extent green box in the Preview Pane from one artboard to another change the Active Artboard number to the artboard wh
55. attributes of geographically referenced features in several files with specific file extensions that are stored in the same folder on disk They are tab main file table structure in ASCII format map the file that stores the feature geometry id the file that stores the index of the feature geometry dat the dBASE file that stores the attribute information of features ind table field indexes if necessary The geometry of each feature is stored as a shape that comprises a set of vector coordinates The attributes for each feature are stored as a record in a dBASE table dat associated with the Shapefile map There is one record in the dBASE table for each feature in the map file Raster TAB files cannot be imported in MAPublisher To ensure successful import select the tab component in the MAPublisher importers MicroStation Design dgn Import and Export MicroStation Design files dgn are the native files created by Bentley Systems Inc and formerly Intergraph MicroStation product Design Files consist of a header followed by a series of elements The header contains global information including the transformation equation from design units to user coordinates as well as the dimension of the elements in the file Each element contains standard display information such as its colour level class and style as well as a number of attributes specific to its element type During the import process MAPublisher will rep
56. attributes only Delimiter Comma default Semicolon Delimiter Set the fields delimiters to either comma or semicolon Settings Opens a Settings dialog box for the input of extra parameters see below Browse Opens a Data Source browser to enable the selection of an export directory Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected layer or MAP View uses a double byte character set General Settings Keep format extension C Export visible attributes only Export visible attributes only Check this option to export only the attributes that are currently visible in the MAP Attributes panel Delimited XY Text Data Settings MicroStation Settings C Keep format extension V Export visible attributes only Indude header C Keep format extension Coordinate Units Master UOR Include header Add the column headers Area Fills at the first line of the exported text file ied cat Area Fills Controls whether or not fill linkages will be written out for ellipses shapes and solids Coordinate Units Specifies how feature coordinates will be interpreted and converted Master Sub or Units of Resolution E00 Settings KML Settings General Export visible attributes only Keep format extension C Keep format extension C Do not export attributes Google Maps compatible Export visible attributes only E
57. box When a new attribute column is created its type will be automatically set to string When the dialog box closes and plotting begins the attribute value will be added to the layer each time a point is plotted NOTE If the Edit User Attribute For Current Layer dialog box is opened while plotting is in progress the plotting will be paused This allows the necessary changes to be made Upon closing the dialog box all the points which would have been plotted will be plotted and will reflect the changes just made 172 Chapter 16 MAP GPS Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Record Sentence Log Accessed from the MAP GPS menu Browse Allows the user to navigate to a location to save the log MAP GPS Log File Settings Log File Allows the user to specify to a location to record the log Append Will add new information at the end of the file if it already Log File Browse contains log information D Append Overwnte Overwrite Will overwrite information in the specified file if it contains any FUNCTIONALITY The Record Sentence Log feature allows for all information gathered from the GPS to be saved to a text file This information can be used for back up or debugging purposes or imported at a later time into a new document In addition to being able to record to the file the user is given the options of adding to an existing file or overwriting any information which may be in the specified file USING THE REC
58. box and will not label any features The dialog box can be reopened later to edit the saved label settings or be used to label the map Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro 185 MAP LabelPro Rules Label Verification The graphic below shows results of a typical labelling result that options such as stack labels repeat labels allow labels to cross lines and many others BROADWAY rem Verify that labels were successfully placed in accordance to the rule base set out in the MAP LabelPro configuration Also verify that labels were placed on the appropriate Destination text layers Text failing to meet the labelling criteria will be placed in a Suppression layer if one is available and has been set If no Suppression layer is available the non compliant text is ignored and is not generated Once placed the labels are considered standard text and may be modified using Adobe Illustrator or MAPublisher operations NOTE Undo and Redo operations are supported when labelling Be aware that undoing a labelling operation will also undo any changes to rules styles or settings made at the same time It may be useful to save without labelling close the MAP LabelPro Editor re open it then proceed to click Save amp Label OPTIONS None Default No statistics panel will display after labelling EE a Just overall totals Totals for all placed and statistics type Just overall totals unplaced labels not separated by layer Just layer
59. button will allow you to quickly fit the data to the page extents Clicking this button will edit the scale and page anchors so that it is located in the centre of document Transforming a Coordinate System To transform to another coordinate system in the MAP View Editor the Perform Coordinate System Transformation box must be checked Clicking the Specify button in the Perform Coordinate System Transformation frame opens the Specify Destination Coordinate System dialog box In the Specify Destination Coordinate System dialog box coordinate system folders are organized into geodetic and projected systems and then generally according to continents and countries to ease the process of choosing a Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 59 MAP View Editor coordinate system When a folder is selected the list on the right shows the coordinate systems belonging to this folder When the All folder is selected the view lists all of the coordinate systems in the database and if you click this folder it may take some time to choose the one relevant to your MAP View The MAP View Editor also offers a check box to enable you to select a coordinate system that already exists in the document The Same as drop down list will allow you to select from a list of existing georeferenced MAP Views This function can be used to set all the MAP Views of a document to a same coordinate system while they keep a different position on the page Again the Preview Pane
60. by the Geodetic Datasource parameters including the Earth model ellipsoid or datum the units used to measure the coordinates the projection type and any parameters specific to the projection type Geodetic coordinate systems use Latitude and Longitude to define the position on the Earth and incorporate angular units of measurement such as degrees Projected coordinate systems consist of a two or three dimensional system in which each point on the plane is defined by an x y coordinate and having an origin where the axes intersect Projected coordinate systems incorporate linear units of measurement for the measurement of area distance and direction Within MAPublisher coordinate systems are organized in coordinate system categories This structure allows grouping into a logical collection for convenience per continent country or local sub divisions The folders listed below represent the default schema for the coordinate systems in the Geodetic Datasource dialog box Each folder option may be expanded by clicking the node adjacent to the folder name Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems A2 11 The Geodetic Datasource ALL Lists all the coordinate systems available in the database RECENT Lists the last 10 coordinate systems used RCE Rees COT IaRE system aptos SEARCH Lists the most recent results of a Search operation GEODETIC Lists the geodetic coordinate systems in the database PROJECTED Lists the pro
61. colour and weight it is useful to create a new character style at this stage Window gt Type gt Character Styles A default grid line style will also be used If you wish to use an alternate style for the grid lines add the desired style to the Graphic Styles panel prior to accessing the Grids and Graticules function The MAP View must have a coordinate system assigned in order to plot a grid Graticules and Index Grids can be generated for any coordinate system Measured Grids cannot be generated for a geodetic coordinate system used in a MAP Views To access the function select the legend layer and navigate to Filter gt MAP Legend gt Grids and Graticules or MAPublisher toolbar button HH Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 133 Grids and Graticules INDEX GRIDS The Index Grid option allows grids to be created by dividing the extents of the current MAP View into a specified number of cells The grid dimension can be either calculated from the specified number of columns and rows or by Cell Size in Page Units Finally a graphic style for the grid lines must be selected NOTE The page units are specified in the Adobe Illustrator document setup main menu File gt Document Setup GRATICULES The Graticules option permits grid lines to be placed at specific degree positions and intervals Specify a line of latitude and or longitude that graticule lines must pass through Then specify the interval for each subsequent line of latit
62. commercial purposes with permission http www ga gov au CAST data The Center for Advanced Spatial Technologies CAST University of Arkansas Planned free access on the ARKNet statewide network Among its high tech offerings CAST maintains a catalog of Arkansas U S national and global data e g GIS data in areas of archaeology agriculture and population are downloadable as GIF files across the Internet Obtain a map of historical land coverage data Obtain data sets including Environment Prehistoric and Historic Climate Reconstruction Historic Census and Tabular databases http libinfo uark edu gis us asp Directions Magazine Data Center Directions magazine is an internet centred publication that provides news analysis commentary product information and free map data http www directionsmag com files EROS Data Center The Eros Data Center will be providing FTP access to a variety of USGS digital data sets http edcwww cr usgs gov Geocommunity and GIS Data Depot The GeoCommunity and GIS Data Depot are an excellent sources of free GIS data geographic software including data viewers translators and compression utilities and industry news This site also has several GlS related discussion forums The data found on this site covers most areas of the world http www geocomm com Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 27 Online Links Geoconnections Geoconnexions This site from Canada Ministry
63. file is compatible with Google Maps S 57 Import IHO S 57 vector format can now be imported with MAPublisher 8 Use the supplied S 57 template to automatically style the map on import Geographic Markup Language Simple Features Import and Export OGC GML Simple Features points lines and polygons version 2 0 and higher can now be imported and exported to version 3 1 1 with MAPublisher 8 Recent Expressions Expressions created in the MAP Selection Filters can now be selected and re used in the Expression Builders of the MAP Attributes panel and MAP Stylesheets panel MAP Views Editor The MAP View Editor now has the ability to display both thumbnails and coloured extents of MAP Views in the document Combined with the new ability to zoom and pan the preview users should find it much easier to precisely position their MAP view on the canvas Specify Anchor The Specify Anchor function has been redesigned so that the anchor point world coordinates maybe entered in any coordinate system specified by the user geodetic or projected hence removing the need for external coordinate conversions xX What s New in MAPublisher 8 Register Image When no matching vector data is available a new MAP View can be created directly from a GeoTIFF reference file or by specifying a coordinate system MAP Attributes Interface The attribute viewer has had several enhancements added for MAPublisher 8 Several buttons have been added to pro
64. found in the Helpful Styles amp Symbols files folder on your MAPublisher 8 CD or with your MAPublisher 8 download Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Avenza MAPublisher 8 Helpful Styles amp Symbols Windows Vista C Users Public Public Documents Avenza MAPublisher 8 Helpful Styles amp Symbols Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 Helpful Styles amp Symbols Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt QuickMap Styles QuickMap styles are graphic styles and symbol libraries meant to allow users to quickly style their maps by the use of MAP Stylesheets To ease the process areas are classified in land and water styles lines are classified in borders contours roads rails and rivers styles QuickMap Styles Area ai Categorized graphic style library for use in Area Stylesheets QuickMap Styles Line ai Categorized graphic style library for use in Line Stylesheets QuickMap Styles Point ai Symbol library with common map symbols for use in Point Stylesheets Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt S 57 Symbolization The S 57 Symbolization folder contains nautical graphic styles and symbols libraries inspired from the International Hydrographic Office M 4 publication Regulations of the IHO for international INT charts and charts specifications of the IHO Graphic styles and symbol names are mostly based on the S 57 naming conventions The folder also contains templates with a series of MAPublisher Stylesheets linking S
65. from GIS systems are stored in this format which can be imported by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter A GeoTIFF is a TIFF file with embedded geographic information identifying its position and scale in world coordinates OTHERS Please refer to the Adobe Illustrator User Guide for other graphics file formats supported by Adobe Illustrator Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 1 Graphic File Formats MAPublisher Import Formats This section contains descriptions of the GIS formats supported for import by MAPublisher Here you will find an overview of the structure of each format as well as information on supported format versions and elements unique to each data type Each file format will carry a checklist covering which core elements are supported by MAPublisher during its import You can also refer to the Frequently Asked Questions section in this guide for information on any issues associated with the various file formats Also see chapter 2 on Map Data File Formats AUTOCAD DRAWING DWG AND DRAWING EXCHANGE DXF There are two formats used by AutoCAD DXF is a CAD data file format developed by Autodesk as their solution for enabling data interoperability between AutoCAD and other programs The Dwg format is used for storing two and three dimensional design data and is the internal format for the AutoCAD Computer Aided Design package DWG is also the common name for AutoCAD proprietary DWG
66. from the copy The map now contains two MAP Views at least Their relative position can be managed from the MAP View Editor as well as the scale of the inset map Edit MAP views e g move inset and change scale 94 Chapter 7 Drawing Tools MAP Area Tools 0A Oi Dye o E Qe m RESULT Copy and Crop Line Functions The Adobe Illustrator environment offers lots of flexibility when working with vector art MAPublisher offers graphics specific line tools which is discussed in detail in this chapter Buffer Lines allows for the creation of a buffer around current lines at designated distances in map units Flip Lines can be used to swap the start and end points of lines if these line strings were not originally digitized in a preferable manner Join Lines can be used to connect line segments into continuous line strings or compound paths based ona specified attribute column Simplify Lines allows for the removal of vertices from selected lines based on mathematical formulae Join Points allows for point symbols to be joined based on attribute values This tool will generate a line string joining common points and is ideal for GPS data Topics covered in this section are Buffer Lines ee Ws ee LF fe EL AY Ll 7 Flip Lines s I t ESN ey AS be i 4 b 4 Join Lines vo K an E Y M 5 lt a 3 AS j Join Points Leet r ae j Lyd jir
67. function To use this function first select the objects you wish to rotate Then go to Object gt Transform gt Transform Each In the Rotate box enter a desired rotation value and click OK Each of the selected objects will be rotated individually about their own centres You may also use the Rotation property column to individually rotate point symbols or text items based on a specified value See chapter 5 for guidelines on how to use this function GEOREFERENCING AN ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR FILE If you are using an existing Adobe Illustrator file that was created without the use of MAPublisher and as such does not contain any geographic parameters or attribute data the following steps will enable you to georeference your Adobe Illustrator file and ultimately create an attribute rich and accurate scale and world grid structure for your map Please note that the steps that follow refer to functions that are outlined in more detail in the body of this user guide Please familiarize yourself with the main MAPublisher functions and in particular those under the MAP Views section see chapter 4 before proceeding Before beginning to georeference an Adobe Illustrator file you must be in possession of the following information 1 The real world scale of your data 2 Details of the coordinate system the data is in i e Projection Datum etc 3 The X Y coordinates of one tie in point in the coordinate system of your data When you have this information
68. images that might be displayed in the Web tags callout bubbles The path to this directory must be specified through the MAP Web Author panel options menu Specify Source Media Folder Either an Absolute Path or a Relative Path may be entered An Absolute Path refers to the full folder directory path e g C folder1 folder2 A Relative Path refers to the folder path from the current location of the Adobe Illustrator document Absolute Path example 5 gt 210 Relative Path example C MAPwebAuthor Tutorial rm MAPWebAuthor_Tutorial mm Flash_Canada ai Fiash_Canada ai L Imagefiles AB png J ImageFiles AB png BCpng BC png Canada png Canada png MB png MB png NB png NB png _ NF png NFpng NS png m NS png NV png NV png i poe k NWT png H PEl png ON png H QC png m PElpng SK png QC png YK png SK png YK png If the Adobe Illustrator file is to be exchanged between computers it is good practice to use a Relative Path to avoid having to reset the link to Source Media Folder when the files are moved Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 147 MAP Web Author Panel Add and Edit Web Tags The Web Tag Dialog is started when clicking the Add or Modify button This option is enabled when one single object is selected or several objects from a same layer are selected See next page for details When several objects are selected the Multiple button is enabled to allow Web tagging on several
69. in a default location and with a default size It still needs to be registered With the image selected go to Object gt Filter gt MAP Images gt Register Image or click the MAPublisher toolbar button E3 to access the function In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Register Image is found in the Filter gt MAP Images menu USING REGISTER IMAGE If the image is placed on a MAP Layer the Register Image automatically registers the image using the coordinate system of the MAP View containing that MAP Layer If the image is placed on non MAP Layer the Undefined Layer dialog box opens Users can either select to create a new MAP View or to use an existing MAP View if it is certain that the coordinate system of this MAP View matches the one of the image In both cases the feature type must be specified indifferent if the layer only contains the image When creating a new MAP View the MAP View s anchor point and scale are derived from the registration information placement and image size In the case of GeoTIFF images the MAP View s coordinate system is automatically read from the image header for other image formats the coordinate system has to be specified manually in the MAP View Editor after the registration process see chapter 4 for more information on Specify coordinate system Registration via Reference File To select a reference file click the Load File button and navigate to the folder containing the reference file The reference fil
70. in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta Result All items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are assigned the selected style NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result Only items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are assigned the selected style ew NOTE String values are case sensitive and must be entered between double quotes 108 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheet Editor Assigning a Scale The Scale default is 100 Editing the scale will alter the symbol size points or stroke weight areas and lines Building the Stylesheet For subsequent style rules proceed in the same manner Click Add and then specify a Name Style Expression and Scale You can click Apply at any time to preview the results at any stage of building a stylesheet and also return to edit settings you have made for individual style rules In order to delete a style rule from the list click anywhere in its row and click the Remove button Click OK to exit the dialog box and to assign the MAP Stylesheet to the associated MAP Layers IMPORTANT NOTES Expression Modes The Expression Mode determines which type of expression panel you get when editing a style rule s expression The expression mode will be remembered from the last session If the Expr
71. indicative of the features on that layer and is the feature type which will be applied if the layer is exported For example if you have Point symbols on a Line layer they will not be recognized as being MAPublisher objects and will be dropped in the export process Why is MAPublisher exporting the Area values as negatives When exporting Area layers to GIS formats polygon outlines must have a positive Area value whereas holes held inside compound paths or complex shapes must have a negative Area value If you have values for polygons in the Area property column of your MAP Attribute table which contradict these guidelines you can use the following tools to convert the MAPublisher area calculation from a negative to a positive value or vice versa e Flip Lines tool see chapter 8 for converting multiple areas e Create a Selection Filter see chapter 11 to select all elements that have an Area of less than zero to select negative values or greater than zero to select positive values Then go to Filter gt Flip Lines e AreaDirection property value see chapter 5 for converting areas at a time Select the area to edit and then choose the alternate value for AreaDirection in the MAP Attributes panel A1 18 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Frequently Asked Questions LABELLING ISSUES I am having trouble with the MAP Tagger tool Where am I going wrong This can happen either when the layer or object to be labelled is
72. load the URL in a specific html frame Previous Next Previous and Next Click Previous or Next button to switch from one object to another buttons are enabled when more than one object is selected Callout Bubble example Callout title Santa Fe Depot x Callout Image as set in the image frame FUNCTIONALITY E E l Callout Contents can contain text images and graphics Set in the contents frame Major Intersection Led Callout Preview Click this button to open or close the preview of the callout bubble Callout Size Set the size width and height in pixels of the Web tag Auto Size Check this option to have the callout bubble size be automatically set from the image size and text contents Trigger External URL Advanced This function allows users to setup properties so that web pages may be opened in a different frame when either clicking or hovering on a web art The user has to create a set of framesets and target the Web page to a specific frame The Web Tag Dialog and Multiple Web Tag Dialog are started from the MAP Web Author panel by clicking the buttons Add Modify or Multiple These dialog boxes are meant to design the callout bubbles also known as Web tag that will pop up when clicking objects in the produced Flash map Not all objects in the map need to be associated with a callout users must design their Flash maps to make them readable not too
73. machine computer running the actual MAPublisher application 1 After installation of MAPublisher 8 click the Floating button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box 2 Enter the name or IP address of the server where the license manager resides 3 Click the Checkout button to retrieve the one of the licenses from the server NOTES e If you wish to use Adobe Illustrator without MAPublisher then click the Checkin button from the MAPublisher License Management dialog box at Help gt MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management This releases the license so other users can now use it e The link to the server is set for once The next time you start the application you just need to the click the Checkout button on the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or License Management dialog box MAPUBLISHER LABELPRO LICENSING MAPublisher LabelPro is an optional add on to MAPublisher Purchased MAPublisher LabelPro licenses are added to the main MAPublisher license During the registration process described above all licenses will be imported When purchasing a new MAPublisher LabelPro license on the top of an existing MAPublisher license a new serial number will be issued and the full license will have to be retrieved see instructions above To evaluate MAPublisher LabelPro license open the MAPublisher License Management dialog box from the Adobe Illustrator menu Help gt MAPublisher Licensing gt
74. not MAP Layers Removing MAPublisher Information At the end of the project cycle it may be useful to permanently remove all georeferencing and attribute information in the current document This can now be accomplished by switching your MAP Layer s to the Non MAP layers category in the MAP Views panel via drag and drop or click the Switch Map View button and the Remove GIS data option NOTE This function should only be used as a final step as all attributes and georeferencing will be removed leaving a standard Adobe Illustrator file devoid of all map information Be sure to save a copy of your file before performing this operation Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 57 MAP Views Panel Preview Pane Displays the data extents of the MAP View White rectangle Artboard extents Green rectangle Data extents of the current MAP View Crosshair Location of the current Map and Page Anchors Show Anchors Click this box to view or hide the Map Anchors and Page Anchors in the Preview Pane Name The editable name of the current MAP View Data Extents LL Corner Editable location of the lower left corner of the data in document units Alignment Control Click the respective anchor point to set the Page Anchors to a graphically designated location Perform Coordinate System Transformation Check this box to transform your data from your source coordinate system to a selected destination coordinate system
75. objects at once Clicking Multiple starts the Multiple Web Tag Dialog which is similar to the Web Tag Dialog the only difference is that additions are applied to all selected objects at once Objects that are tagged with the multiple mode may be modified individually at a later stage using the Modify button Web Selection Select all the objects with Web tags All Web Art button or all objects on the current layer Web Art on Layer The navigation buttons may be use to highlight objects consecutively Create a template The Template button opens a dialog box to create a template that is then accessible from the Web Tag Dialog see next page By default the template is set per layer to show the list of all attributes as e Attribute1 Name Attribute Value e Attribute 2 Name Attribute2 Value e etc Template for Restaurants lt b gt Restaurant_Name lt b gt Restaurant_Name lt br gt Ok OK Click OK to save the template for b gt Address lt jb gt Address lt br gt b gt Zip_ Code lt b gt 7ip_Code lt br gt b gt Phone_Number lt b gt Phone_Number lt br gt Cancel Click cancel to reverse to the b gt WebSite lt b gt WebSite lt br gt last saved template b gt Specdalties lt b gt Specialties lt br gt b gt Image1 lt b gt Image 1 lt br gt b gt Image2 b S olmage2 lt br gt further use Default Default Click this button to reset to the default template list of
76. panned and zoomed in or out FullPopupOnHoverEnabled True or False Display or not both title and content of the callout bubble while the mouse pointer is hovered on a Web art When enabled True When disabled False Callout Title x Callout Title Callout Content Population 10084885 HoverPopupEnabled True or False Display or not the callout bubble title or full depending on option above while a mouse pointer is hovered on a Web art When set to False the Web art must be clicked to display the callout bubble StaticPopupEnabled True or False Display or not the callout bubble contents in a fixed location within the Flash viewer extent see Popup Style advanced settings NOTE To use a static callout bubble both HoverPopupEnabeld and StaticPopupEnabled must be set to True ZoomButtonsEnabled True or False Display or not the Zoom buttons both in and out in the Flash map PanButtonsEnabled True or False Display or not the Pan buttons up right down and left in the Flash map LayerListFlashControlW Width for the Flash control containing the layer list when Enable Layer Visibility Toggle is enabled with the Built in Flash datagrid option selected LayerListFlashControlH Height for the Flash control containing the layer list when Enable Layer Visibility Toggle is enabled with the Built in Flash datagrid option selected Layers v Usa border WV Water body H v USA counties v Area outsi
77. please use the following guidelines in order to georeferencing data with MAPublisher in Adobe Illustrator Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 33 General Tips and Hints 1 Goto View gt Show Rulers Set the 0 0 point to the lower left hand corner of the page by double clicking the cross hairs in the upper right corner 2 If you have a completed Adobe Illustrator vector file go to step 3 Otherwise place and digitize your raster image Identify a registration or tie in point in your document This should be a specific location in your document for which a real world coordinate location is known or can be easily determined Record the location of this point in real world coordinates on a piece of paper 3 Locate the same tie in point on the Adobe Illustrator document page and determine its X Y coordinates in page units Record this number as well using Window gt Info 4 You should now have the location of your tie in point in both map and page units e g 79 5 43 5 in Lat Long is located at 4cm 2cm in the document 5 Open the MAP Views panel navigate to the Options section and select New MAP View Enter a name for the MAP View Set the Scale to the proper scale of the map i e a set distance in document units divided by a set distance in ground units Click the Specify button Choose a projection which matches that of your vector data and click OK Click OK in the MAP View Editor to apply the information to the new MAP View
78. projections when saving the coordinate system are listed below Albers Equal Area Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Polar Stereographic Cassini Soldner Cassini Lambert Conic Conformal 1SP Polyconic Cylindrical Equal Area Lambert Conic Conformal 2SP Robinson Equidistant Conic Lambert Cylindrical Equal Area Sinusoidal Equidistant Cylindrical Mercator Stereographic Equirectangular Miller Cylindrical Transverse Mercator Gnomonic New Zealand Map Grid Transverse Mercator South Oriented Hotine Oblique Mercator Oblique Mercator VanDerGrinten Laborde Oblique Mercator Oblique Stereographic Orthographic Chapter 12 Working With Images 129 Register Image Export Image Object gt Filters gt MAP Images gt Export Image or MAP Toolbar EN Export Image Store Geography As Store Geography As Select the output format for the georeferencing information for the selected image Save As Choose a destination name ee SE and directory for the exported image MapInfo TAB file TAB ListGeo file LGO GeoTIFF FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher offers the ability to export placed raster files as georeferenced images for use in other programs and or for archival purposes This can be useful in a number of ways For example when working with an image for which there is no georeferencing file use the MAPublisher Export Image function to create a GeoTIFF or other georeferenced image file based upon the coor
79. radians Searches the source string using a regular expression Rounded to specified decimals of precision The sine of an angle Square root of a value Returns true if the source string starts with the prefix string Tangent of an angle Strings converted to upper case When you have finalized your expression and it has been validated click OK The expression is inserted into the ex pression field of the appropriate tool The Edit Expression tool can be re opened if further edits are required NOTE String values are case sensitive and must be entered in double quotes Example Basic Expressions APPLY EXPRESSION Ontario applied to column NAME Result All selected items are assigned the value Ontario in the NAME column MAP Area 01 applied to column Style Result All selected area items are assigned the value MAP Area 01 in the Style column and are assigned the Graphic Style MAP Area 01 on the page 45 applied to Rotation Result All selected point items are assigned the value 45 in the Rotation column and are rotated to 45 on the page Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 7 Edit Expression SELECTION FILTER NAME Ontario Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are selected POPULATION lt 1000000 Result All items with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta Result
80. redundant or otherwise unnecessary attribute fields from the map attributes table Many sources of street data include paths vectors that are segmented based on street addressing information You can use the MAPublisher Join Lines filter to join these into single linear features based on a selected attribute field Reducing the number of objects and data records in the map file will free up memory Many GIS data files are large and when a series of such files is imported you may find that the import filter starts to run more slowly This is because scratch and memory allocations are being used up The best solution is to periodically save your work quit out of Adobe Illustrator and then restart This will free up the available scratch memory Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 25 Memory Considerations The minimum number of undoes can be reduced since they ALL reside in memory Use polylined or pre joined linear feature data sets where available In your GIS application strip out the attributes you won t be using for queries or labelling before importing the data into Adobe Illustrator You can set a primary and secondary scratch disk under the Adobe Illustrator preferences option in order to draw additional storage from a partitioned or multi drive environment Turn off the layer preview icon that appears to the left of each layer name in the Adobe Illustrator layers panel This can be done by clicking the options menu in the l
81. required to choose the columns of the selected attribute file that will be used to derive the X and Y coordinates of the data and ensure correct georeferencing These and further settings will be discussed in the Delimited Text Data Settings section in appendix A1 36 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats Import and Export Supported Data Formats KML kml Import and Export Keyhole Markup Language KML is an XML based language for managing the display of three dimensional geospatial data in the programs Google Earth Google Maps Google Mobile and WorldWind The KML file specifies a set of features for display Each feature always has a longitude and a latitude and can have other data such as tilt heading and altitude KML shares some of the same structural grammar as GML KML files are very often distributed as KMZ files which are zipped KML files with a kmz extension KMZ files are not supported in this version of MAPublisher S 57 000 Import only S 57 is referring to the IHO International Hydrographic Office Special Publication number 57 related to the HO transfer standard for Digital Hydrographic Data Maintained by the IHO S 57 format is intended for the exchange of digital hydrographic data between national hydrographic offices and for its distribution to manufacturers mariners and other data users It is used for the supply of ENC cells Electronic Navigational Charts to ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information S
82. ront of the attribute column name cent Boolean ne Integer EM Real Panel i Show icons in column headers String Qe MAP LabelPro 9 R an Ei Table font Use default font SP MAP Selection Filters Table font Set the text font for Ls ham i O MS Shell Dig 2 headers and attribute values ee E Editor Table font size Table font size Set the text font size Panel MAP Views EE Editor Panel 26 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Preferences MAP LabelPro Preferences The MAP LabelPro preference category contains general settings to save the path access to saved rules styles and symbol folders see chapter 17 for more information on MAP LabelPro The Editor sub category controls the aspect of the MAP LabelPro dialog box MAP Label Pro Preferences MAPublisher Preferences Gp General MAP LabelPro MAP Attributes Base rule folder Base style folder Panel amp MAP Stylesheets Symbol folder Panel MAP Views E Editor Panel EE Editor Ignore invisible artwork Publisher 8 LabelPro Rules Publisher 8 LabelPro styles iblisher 8 LabelPro Symbols NOTE The default directories for the rule style and symbol folder are as follow Base rule folder Directory path to the rule folder Click the browse button J to open a folder browser and change the path Base style folder Directory path to the style
83. separate physical files that must all reside in the same directory You must select the shp file for import Point multipoint polyline and polygon geometric data can be stored in shp files However a single shp file can contain only one type of geometry Each entity in a shp file has a corresponding entry in the shx index file and a corresponding row of attributes in the associated dbf file The order of the entries in each of these files is synchronized For example the 3rd geometric entity in the shp file is pointed to by the 3rd entry in the shx index file and has the attributes held in the 3rd row of the dbf A single Shapefile may also consist of a number of additional files with the following file name extensions sbn sbx Spatial index files for the geometric data These two files are only generating by an ESRI product however they are not required by MAPublisher for import and will they be generated when exporting data to the Shapefile format prj Spatial coordinate system information If a prj file exists in your Shapefile directory holding the coordinate system information of the Shapefile this will automatically be read by MAPublisher on import If your Shapefile folder does not contain a prj file you will be required to specify the coordinate system in order to fully utilize MAPublisher Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions shp shx dbf prj Aggregate Yes Automated
84. source or destination MAP View has an unspecified coordinate system Missing Coordinate System The New MAP View MAP View does not contain any coordinate system information Please specify the coordinate system of this MAP View Specify coordinate system Select Coordinate system i F se Same as Choose this option in order to assign a coordinate system to the named MAP View that matches that of an existing MAP View The coordinate system of the selected MAP View will be displayed below Sameas Lower 48 Coordinate system United States Lambert Conformal Conic meter Layer Name Search and Replace Layer Name Search amp Replace Replace Text Find what _area Replace with Polygon the units of the selected coordinate system X 6334798 068564 m Y 2766307 037666 m Lx Page Anchors The location ag Anchor Replace with Type in the variable you wish to change of the Page Anchors in the units of the current document see File gt Document Setup X 548 700195 pt Y 126 860352 pt Coordinate System Use MAP View s coordinate system Use NAD27 Select Coordinate system Specify the reference coordinate system in which the anchor coordinates are entered Use the current MAP View s coordinate system or specify a different one by default the geodetic system base of the projection or WGS84 in latitude lo
85. specified simply select the appropriate column in the Sort Order list and click either the Up or Down button To remove any Sort By columns from the hierarchy select the column in the Sort Order list and click the Remove button Note that a maximum of five columns can be used to sort points into a logical order If the columns specified to sort by do not distinguish an ordering between certain points the order of these points in the attribute table will be used to determine the order of the nodes in the generated line string RESULTS When all the options have been set click OK to join the points on the specified layer An A Area or L Line layer will be generated depending on the specified output layer type which will be placed in the same MAP View as the Input Point layer which has been joined 100 Chapter 8 Line Functions Join Lines Simplify Lines Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines gt Simplify Lines or MAP Toolbar o Simplify Lines Proximity Set the simplification f f tolerance type in or use arrows Proximity 0 00 OK Unit Select page unit or map units T angular or linear unit list depending Vertex Count Displays the number Vertex Count if the map coordinate system is of vertices in the original and Oricinak 343 projected or geodetic used for simplified line after clicking the T i proximity tolerance B 5 ee Preview Display a preview on the artboard before running the tool
86. technology developed by Autodesk for their AutoCAD package Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions dwg dxf Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes 3D Support Yes Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Supported Versions Windows Releases vrs R12 to 2007 Mac OS X Releases vrs R12 to 2007 Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import e Group Entities Group entities by Layer Name or Geometry e Hatches Check this box if you want MAPublisher to read your hatch patterns upon import e White Lines and Fills Enabling the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Check the Change white lines and fills to black box to import black lines instead of the files native white lines Check the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the AutoCAD environment ESRI INTERCHANGE FILE E00 An archive of files that describes a complete Arclnfo coverage This is either ASCII or compressed into a binary and is used to transfer files between different versions of Arc
87. text character instance and click the menu Type gt Create Outlines to convert the text to vector art 7 Open the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel Window gt Symbols 8 Select the artwork that will comprise the new symbol and drag it into the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel double click the symbol in this panel to assign a name 9 When MAP Stylesheet Editor is accessed for Point Stylesheets this symbol will be available in the Style column CREATING A STYLESHEET TEMPLATE You can create template files with legends to automate the production of a series of similar maps 1 The procedure when using MAP Stylesheets is as follows 2 Create a prototype map using the MAPublisher Stylesheet function to create the desired look 3 Make a copy of your prototype map file Delete all the layers from the file so that only the designated stylesheets exist 4 Save it to a new template file 5 Use this template file as a base for future maps as follows a Make a copy of the template file b Import all map layers into the template file and do any needed processing c Inthe MAP Stylesheets panel drag your MAP Layers into the desired MAP Stylesheets d Your new layers will be symbolized by the previously defined Stylesheet CREATING A MULTI CONDITION IF EXPRESSION In Edit Expression it is possible to assign symbology to map objects by assigning an expression to the Style column In the following example this is achieved by creating a multi
88. that data used within a single mapped area have the same map projection If different data sets for a geographic location have differing coordinate systems the chances are high that they will not overlay on import If the files are of differing coordinate systems any software will give you the same results If the coordinate systems are known you can use the MAP View Editor filter to change all data to a common coordinate system For more information about map projections see http www gisdevelopment net tutorials tuman007pf htm Why do my MapInfo files crash on import or do not import properly There are a couple of possible common causes of this A couple of possibilities may be 1 How did you transfer the file to the machine where it is being imported If you have transferred these files from one operating system to another then you must always use ASCII FTP transfer or the files may be corrupted We have found that you can not rely on the automatic transfer with all ftp utilities Some do not recognize the MID files as being text The mid files may be inadvertently interpreted as binary music files which often carry the same file extension If they are transferred as binary you will have trouble importing them 2 Were the files compressed If the files are compressed using a Windows ZIP format you must be careful when decompressing them If this is the case and the utility you used was Stuffit you need to make sure that it was set for a D
89. the active Adobe Illustrator data layer a green check mark icon will be displayed Apply as New Selection Makes a new selection using the highlighted criteria Add to Current Selection Adds the highlighted criteria to the current selection Remove from Current Selection Removes the highlighted criteria from the current selection Delete Selection Filter Deletes the selected filter s Create New Selection Filter Opens the New Selection Filter function below Get Subset of Current Selection Makes a selection within the current selection C_N Name Assign or edit the name of the selection filter Expression Enter the expression directly into the entry field or click the Browse button to access the Edit Expression function see chapter 5 Expression Assign or edit the expression E CAPITAL true Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional information is reported Edit Expression Opens the Expression Builder for editing the assigned expression see chapter 5 MAPublisher Preferences pamaenna 4G General MAP Attributes 5 Panel RS MAP LabelPro S P MAP Selection Filters Panel aaa S amp MAP Stvlesheets MAP Selection Show filters on two lines 120 Chapter 11 Making Selections MAP Selection Filters MAP Selection Filters panel AP SELECTION FILTERS New Selection Filter Edit Selection
90. the appropriate v I vertexCount Display Label STATE_NAME Display Label Edit the column label button to move the selected S Style a ann SS ans displayed column up or down the Type S String bd hierarchy paee oe Type Edit the column type here pires me choose from Integer Real String or Column list Attribute and Area Boolean AREA Default Value property columns on the T fagaeanatananenerinnsnnnsrsnnsstnnsstnnesntnetan g current layer are listed here a Visible Size Decimals Edit the size of String Select a column here to edit its Il POPULATION C Read only or amount of decimals of Real i i R z001 ype properties on the right jo a OEE Default Value Assign the same value to all items in the selected column if Add Click to add a new column required toe coimmiatlet ifika Visibility Choose to show or hide the selected column by editing this option Remove Click to delete the selected i column Derive value from expression Check this option to assign an Read only Check this option to ensure expression to the selected column Either enter the expression that values in this column can not directly into the entry field or click the Browse button to be edited access the Edit Expression function In MAPublisher the term schema is used to define the structure and makeup of the map attributes table FUNCTIONALITY The Edit Schema function allows to edit and manage various
91. the callouts Images that will be used in the Web tagging process must be collected and grouped in a folder Source Media Folder If you plan to insert the images using a MAP Attributes field in the Multiple mode remember that you will not be able to change the sizes in the Web Tag Dialog If required image sizes have to be changed in a picture editor first c Setting document size for the Flash map If the document size hasn t been set at step one document creation it should be modified through the Adobe Illustrator menu File gt Document Setup prior to the Web export NOTE Changing the document size might result in the adjustment of the symbol and text sizes as well as stroke widths d Attribute table information to attach the callouts In order to use attribute information for Web tagging they must be organized using the MAPublisher MAP Attributes panel This process might include creating new attribute columns to type Web site links or image file path in that case create a column of type String e Data preparation Run the crop tool simplify lines and remove unneeded attributes 3 USING MAP WEB AUTHOR a Setup the Source Media Folder The user have a choice between entering an absolute or relative path for the Source Media Folder Example Absolute path C Work Flash_Project lmages Relative path lmages Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 163 MAP Web Author Workflow NOTE If an image is placed under C Work Flash
92. the desired scale bar selected scale bar mrpr r menu Object gt Edit Scale Bar Ad d toggle Click to sh i peau NE Interval Specify the length of or hide the scale bar options i mhe owersecion ae a each interval in the selected map unit Horizontal lines Select the desired number of horizontal Units US Survey Foot v Yard lines to be included in the _ l Labeled intervals Enter the number of interval which will 2 Ad d scale bar Used with certain ae comprise each bar scale bar styles only 3 Number of labeled intervals 5 4 Intervals to subdivide Enter the Sub intervals Select the Number of horizontal lines 2 0 allie arial neal to be subdivided number of sub intervals for FO ga a S S x o each subdivided scale bar interval Number of sub intervals 2 2 Add interval left of zero Check this box to have an Text Stylet Select the Adobe LJ Add interval left of 0 interval placed on the scale Illustrator Character Style to bar to the left of the zero be applied to the text Labeling mark Display scale value Check this Text style Normal Character Style x Labelling Set a style for labels option to display the scale Dipiny scale value eats iv from the Character Styles value above or below the bar S panel Display the scale value C Display page to map units ratio above and specify its location Display page to map units ratio Page units for captions Sach Display a
93. to a specified minimum size in points Checking Reduce horizontal scaling will allow text to be scaled down horizontally by the fraction specified Checking the Wrap Labels that are longer than area option will enter a carriage return at the nearest space in the text NOTE The Wrap Labels that are longer than area option is not available if the Labels curve with lines of latitude option is checked Feature Text Label also provides an additional option which is not available with the MAP Tagger tool If any of the labels have been adjusted in size due to the deployment of an area adjustment rule all labels can be resized to the same size by checking the Set all labels to the same minimum font size option If no rules are enabled MAPublisher will not perform any label scaling If none of the rules specified in the panel can be satisfied MAPublisher will default to placing the label centered over the area In situations with area compounds MAPublisher will label the largest area in the compound P Point Labels Click the Point Labels button to assign MAPublisher Point Label Settings If the Labels curve with lines of latitude option is selected MAPublisher creates a path that conforms to local line of latitude and places the text along it If this option is not selected the labels are placed horizontally This option is enabled only for MAP Views set with a projected coordinate system Adjust the Label Position by specifying where you wan
94. totals Totals for each layer Shows both placed and unplaced labels Options Just layer totals Show all Show all Show all statistics The Statistics type drop down lists several options for displaying statistical information after the labelling process is completed This information is useful in determining how successful the labelling operation was based on the number of labels written to Destination and Suppression layers It may help indicate whether adjustments to the rule base are required to necessitate a higher rate of success 186 Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro Label Verification Appendices Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Graphic File Formats sacuneetseatuvaadetnundaes einen caw nda ketene ees A1 1 MAPublisher Import Formats ccc s ccaciw vce asdus eases seadeneonnae cows A1 2 MAPublisher Unicode Support haus cadcctaidereinanivdaasnaeewuwerwians A1 12 Frequently Asked Questions ccc cece eee e cece eee eeeeeeeeeanes A1 15 GIS Backgrounder vanan av deanae nae eesadeness teas se eaneeesnneieeaten A1 21 Graphics Backgrounder ccvascceteusnecdreneee eens reaidseeucisnadade as A1 23 Memory Considerations saccndreriuciagaenrsieus oe eeesa eters ue aeaeren A1 25 ONIMPG EIS goed doad tanec E E EE E E EEE T E A1 27 Technical Support Options ssssssesessesessessesesseeresersesee A1 30 General Tips and Hints 4 vcccas lt taddneensataw sae casts amasnnsda ecresaeuns A1 32 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems
95. unit first should be the first node in the line string with the second and third points being located at the second and third nodes In order to specify these parameters choose columns by which to sort your points These should be attribute columns which contain rising alphabetical or numerical values In the Sort By Available Columns list select the primary sorting column This should be the attribute column that contains the best fit for rising alphabetical or numerical values For example if points have rising values from 1 10 the point with a value equal to 1 will be at the start of the generated line and the point with a value equal to 10 will be at the end of the line When you have selected the column click the Add button to place the column into the Sort Order list If all the values contained in the first Sort By column are unique you will not be required to set a secondary column If the first Sort By column contained any similar values you must specify a secondary column Again click a column in the Sort By Available Columns list and then click the Add button to place the column in the Sort Order list Similarly third fourth and fifth Sort By columns can be specified in the same manner if previous columns contain similar values Note that the Sort By columns are a hierarchy with the topmost specified column being used for the primary sort then the second then third etc To move columns up or down the hierarchy after they have been
96. units for each parameter by clicking the Units button A2 8 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource Datum Shift Editor Identification Definition Envelope Ethiopia Source Adindan Target WGS 1984 Method Geocentriciranslation Parameter Value 165 11 Datum Shift Editor Ellipsoids For Ellipsoids you must enter the parameters for the Semi Major Axis and Semi Minor Axis often noted as a and b respectively define the linear units the axes are specified in by selecting a predefined unit in the appropriate fields The Inverse Flattening often noted as 1 f will automatically calculate in the field below Alternately you can make the Inverse Flattening definitive by enabling the check box at the bottom You can then manually enter the Inverse Flattening rather than the Semi Minor Axis parameter Identification Definition Semi Major Axis Value 6378137 Units Meter Semi Minor Axis Value 6356752 31424518 Units Meter Inverse Flattening Value 298 257223563 Inverse Flattening Definitive Ellipsoid Editor Envelopes The use of an envelope is not required but very much recommended to indicate the geographical extents where a given coordinate system is applicable To define Envelopes you must select whether or not there are extents points and if so what point style they are in and what the values of the minimum and maximu
97. use If the first line of the text file you are importing contains column headings check the Use first line as a header check box though MAPublisher will generally automatically detect if this is the case If the file does not appear to contain column headers MAPublisher will assign the default headers Co lumn1 Column2 to the attribute columns on import Importing Data When you have your file s selected and if necessary specified the coordinate system and or extra settings you can click OK to import If MAPublisher finds there is a coordinate system already in your document which matches the incoming data the Matching MAP View dialog box will open see chapter 4 on MAP Views If this dialog box opens you must choose to either add the incoming data file to a specified MAP View or create a new MAP View to hold the incoming data 1 If you specify Add to choose the MAP View from the drop down list to add your incoming data to This option will also allow you to rescale the existing and incoming data which will comprise this MAP View in order to fit them all inside the page extents To achieve rescaling check the Resize MAP View to fit option If you do not check this option some of your data may be imported outside of the page extents 2 If you specify Fit to page based on new MAP View the incoming data will be treated separately from the matching data as if it was the first import RESULTS The data will be imported into Adobe Ill
98. when imported with MAPublisher The Adobe Illustrator Object gt Path gt Simplify filter can be used to convert this type of feature into a Bezier curve see chapter 8 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 35 General Tips and Hints If Bezier curves are exported from Adobe Illustrator using any of the MAPublisher Export filters they will be converted to link and node topology i e the end points of the curve will simply be joined as straight lines It is therefore necessary to create additional points to curves to retain their true shape This can be done globally by using the Adobe Illustrator Add Anchor Points function via Object gt Path gt Add Anchor Points This version of MAPublisher supports Bezier curve features during the following operations e Scale and Projection transformations via the MAP View Editor e Area and length calculations CREATING SYMBOLS FOR USE IN POINT STYLESHEETS A MAPublisher Symbol Library and a National Parks Symbol Library are supplied in the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on the MAPublisher CD You may also find that a search on the internet may be useful for finding additional libraries If you are required to create new symbols the steps below will help you to quickly create symbols manually in Adobe Illustrator 6 Use Adobe Illustrator Tools for the manual creation of artwork that will comprise the new symbol If you wish to use a character that are contained in a font library select the
99. will alter the stroke weight of the art Perimeter describes the perimeter of the area in world units This property cannot be set PathClosed describes whether or not the path is closed yes or no Editing this value will open close the path ArtScale describes the scaling of the line stroke Editing this value will scale the stroke weight Area describes the area of the path in world units This property cannot be set 68 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Attributes Foreword Line layers ID Name VertexCount Style StrokeWeight PathClosed Length ArtScale Name HorizontalScale VerticalScale Rotation Style MapX MapY Text layers PageX PageY ID FontSize FontFamily Name Text TextLength Rotation Style PageX PageY describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document There will never be two pieces of artwork with the same ID value at the same time This property cannot be set describes the name of the polygon Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the number of points in the art This property cannot be set describes the Graphic Style in use Editing this property will apply the selected style to the art describes the stroke weight of the path Editing this property will alter the stroke weight of the art describes whether or not the path is closed yes or no Editing this value will open close the path
100. will be applied You can select the value from the drop down list or enter the value manually Similarly the value does not have to appear in the list to be valid If you chose any Comparison except Equal to you then have the option of extending your expression further Clicking the Range operator check box enables an additional Comparison and Value input pair As with the first set you must pick a Comparison and a Value thus completing your expression If you enter an expression with Equal to e g Attribute A when you select this rule again and click the Add button the new expression will be automatically written using the same attribute Equal to the next value on the list e g attribute1 B This does not occur with the other operators Advanced Expressions The Advanced Expression panel lets you construct more complex expressions Enter a valid expression in the Expression field The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes Alternatively click on the Browse button to enter and edit expressions via the Edit Expression tool see chapter 5 The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be entered for styling rules NAME Ontario Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are assigned the selected style POPULATION lt 1000000 Result All items with values less than one million
101. will be no greater than 5 pt If the label font is set to 50 pt but the fixed symbol size is 22 pt the label will have a maximum size of whatever fits inside the symbol or the selected font size Symbols are stored in the location set in the MAPublisher Preferences see chapter 1 The default locations are Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Symbols Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Symbols Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro Symbols NOTE Labelling with symbols is only available for Line layers To label areas with symbols use the Plot Centroids function from the MAP Point Plotter see chapter 6 Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro 181 MAP LabelPro Styles MAP LabelPro Rules MAPublisher LabelPro provides users with an intuitive easy to understand graphical user interface for setting up labelling rules Each Point Line and Area rule dialog box has numerous label placement options for a high level of label Rules detail and a variety of configurations To access label rules click the Rules edit button la in the Rules column of the Highway Labels la main MAP LabelPro dialog box Depending on the layer type this will open Default either the Area Line or Point Rules dialog box Configure label rules and if Default needed save the rules to add it to the Rules drop down list Rules operate in a very similar approac
102. will display the new data extents for any new coordinate systems specified in the MAP View Editor To match coordinate systems across a number of MAP Views move the Adobe Illustrator layers into the MAP View containing the coordinate system you require as discussed in the MAP Views panel section If you wish to view the parameters of a certain coordinate system click the Info button To edit a coordinate system please refer to appendix A2 Assigning a Coordinate System To set the current coordinate system of the data rather than change coordinate system you can click the Specify button in the Source Coordinate System frame of the MAP View Editor You must use caution as this option will set source coordinate systems only and not serve to reproject your data Therefore data integrity may be lost if you overwrite the current coordinate system of the MAP View via the use of this utility In the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box coordinate systems are separated into folders to ease the process of choosing a coordinate system Choose the folder All to list all the coordinate systems in the database If the coordinate system needed cannot be found then enter a text string in the search text box to query the database for coordinate systems The results are displayed in the Search category For an overview of projections and datums see appendix A2 Searching For a Coordinate System The Specify Source Destination Coordinate System d
103. within an attribute column For example it may be desirable to join all segments of a particular street by the common attribute of street name in order to create a single line element representing that street When the Join Lines filter is run a new layer is created containing the joined lines in order to avoid deleting other attributes within the original street layer The new MAP Layer contains the joined lines with an attribute column representing the joined column Join Lines can be very useful for reducing the size of a data file by joining related lines and thus reducing the number of segments and associated data present in the file It is also very useful to run Join Lines prior to labelling with Feature Text Label in order to reduce the occurrence of duplicate labels see chapter 10 Labelling Functions PREREQUISITES This tool can be executed on selections on L Line layers To access Join Lines choose Filter gt MAP Lines gt Join Lines or click the MAPublisher toolbar button USING JOIN LINES In the Join on attribute drop down list select the attribute column containing the attributes you wish to join For example to join lines based on street name you should select the column containing the street names This will result in line segments containing the same street name being joined In the Destination Layer text box you should specify a name for the new L Line layer that MAPublisher will create to hold your joined li
104. you to change the preview to None default green rectangle Coloured boxes previews up to 10 MAP views symbolized with rectangles of different colours as specified in the 58 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP View Editor MAP View Editor MAPublisher Preferences see chapter 1 Thumbnails preview a reduced image of the document contents including all MAP views and Thumbnails and boxes shows both thumbnails and coloured boxes of up to 10 MAP views in the document You can click inside the green rectangle and drag to move the data to a more suitable position within the page Use the Zoom In Zoom Out and Center buttons to set the magnification of the preview NOTE Due to Adobe Illustrator rasterization limitations thumbnails cannot be displayed when a very large MAP View is present in a file MAP View Name The current name of the MAP View is listed in the Name text box which you can edit if desired Whether the MAP View Editor is accessed via Advanced Import or from the MAP Views panel editing the name here will change the name of the resultant or existing MAP View Page Anchors Current page anchors are displayed in the Data Extents LL Lower Left Corner X Y text boxes in the current document units As discussed in the section on georeferencing at the beginning of this chapter the default page anchors are 0 0 in document units Editing the page anchor values will move the data relative to the lower left location of th
105. you want to group the elements of the file on import If you group the elements by level it may result in a large number of output files By Level is the default e Coordinate Units Choose Master or UOR Unit of Resolution as the coordinate units Master is the default e White Lines and Fills Enabling the Import as is option will instruct MAPublisher to import the data true to the original colour settings contained in the file Check the Change white lines and fills to black box to import black lines instead of the files native white lines Check the Create black background option to incorporate a layer containing a black background to mimic the AutoCAD environment Other Check Drop complex chains if you want each component of a complex chain to be returned as its own feature otherwise all elements of the complex chain will be merged into a single linear feature TIGER LINE RT1 BW1 Topologically Integrated Geographic Encoding and Referencing TIGER TIGER is the United States Census Bureau format for its digital database of geographic features TIGER includes both land attributes such as roads buildings rivers and lakes as well as areas such as counties ZIP codes census tracts and census blocks Some of the geographic areas represented in TIGER are political areas including counties congressional districts school districts and ZIP codes Others are statistical areas including Metropolitan Statistical Areas MSA census
106. 0 Use existing France Visual Scale 1 7856651022696 491211 Map Anchors 12851181 6704 Auto scale 8625249 3932 Map Angle 0 Create new Editor File Name The directory path of the map file s to be imported File List This is a table where all files selected for import are listed Remove Removes selected files from the list Edit Allows the edit of the selected file by re opening the Simple Import Data Source function see below Details Displays details of currently selected file Coordinate System Unit Page Anchors Scale Map Anchors and Rotation Create new Allows you to import all of the files in a new coordinate system Clicking the Editor button opens the MAP View Editor see chapter 4 ta Source Format Settings Dataset torial Guide amp Data Tutorial Data worldeast shp Encoding System m ESRI Shape ource Coordinate System Robinson rious Import Settings dialog boxes and options Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Settings Opens Settings dialog box for file formats that requires the input of extra parameters such as for the import of DGN DXF DWG E00 GML KML MIF MID Tab and Delimited Text Data see chapter 2 Browse Opens a Data Source browser to enable the selection of files for import Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected dataset uses a double byte character set
107. 0 Jan ODIE iarere rera En EEEE E EEEE EEEE EERE 81 EXDOrCAWIDUTOS 4ahot tones ater ed EEEE ha ANE E EA ERNEA 83 Contents V yi Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Contents Plotting Points MAP Point Plotter nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnerennnnnenene Plot Centroids cc ccc eee cee cee cece eeeeees Drawing Tools MAP Area TOOIS 00000ccecccrscccsnsssesnsseetecsens MAP Vector Crop Tool ccscsaxedeadenaasdidusiwewen vee ters Line Functions 310 Ue ag Blige eee ee ore meee er E FID LINES tixaschin at abanpareiidaashhedheesatts eeaataeee JONG PICS scene sere ond cee saat os dese earee ewer JOURN PONS secere pasuse rinie tanari ra aden aie Simplify LINCS ascinserernsscecniacce eenaviseabnianeawerds MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheets Panel cicstsstecsscaaneeeemadviasadies MAP Stylesheet Editor ccc cece eee cence Labelling Functions A CIN FOO Se cers sees wees aeons E se eaweaes Feature Text Label ccc cece ccc ee eee eee eeeee MAP Tagger Tool was ox eet aenesrnee day dan ees aren ween tes Making Selections MAP Selection Filters 0 ccc ce cee cee cee eens MAP Selection Stats 0 cc cece ec ee cee eee eee eeee Working With Images Register Image sitchen tucaccucssecucesstecsceesececses BOR Ma Geen EEE EE EEEN Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules i ssdecda eaw
108. 00 Compression Level None Partial Full Do not export attributes Check this option for export to KML to be used in Google Maps Google Maps does not support KML files with attribute values 00 Compression Level Set the compression of the exported E00 file default is None Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 63 Export FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher supports the export of single MAP Layers or whole MAP Views to various GIS formats maintaining all georeferencing and attribute information The following export formats are supported CAD dxf dwg Delimited Text Data csv tsv txt ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI Arclnfo Generate gen ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 3 1 1 gml xsd KML kml MapInfo MIF MID mif mid MapInfo TAB tab Microstation Design dgn NOTE Exporting a MAP View to CAD or MicroStation format will assemble all hosted layers into a single file PREREQUISITES The Export function will export a single selected Adobe Illustrator layer contained in a MAP View or all layers contained in a specified MAP View Therefore both imported and user created MAP Views will contain MAP Layers that are suitable for export to GIS formats USING MAP EXPORT Export a MAP View To export all the MAP layers within a single MAP View select the MAP View to be exported in the MAP Views panel then click the button i s Alternatively click Ex
109. 4 Select and enter the appropriate parameters for the envelope point style geodetic value projection vertical reference angular unit linear unit or scale factor unit that the new object is based upon NOTE Foranew coordinate system the parameters themselves may be customized Every parameter must be set in the following sequence ellipsoid datum envelop unit angular or linear geodetic system and then projected system 5 Press the OK button to create the object 6 Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file Changing An Existing Object 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 Select the object and choose the Edit Object button 7 3 Enter the modified parameters for the envelope point style geodetic value projection vertical reference angular unit linear unit oe scale factor unit where appropriate 4 Press the OK button to commit your changes 5 Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file Deleting An Existing Coordinate System Object Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel Select the object and choose the Delete Object button Press the OK button to commit your changes Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file eS T Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems A2 13 The Geodetic Datasource Copying An Exis
110. 57 imported features to appropriate nautical symbols and graphic styles The basic template allow users to quickly apply styles to the imported data The advanced template is more detailed to help users learn the format and make use of the data Nautical_Graphic_Styles ai Graphic style libraries for use with S 57 data Nautical_Symbols ai Symbols library for use with S 57 data main symbols S57_Advanced_Template ait Adobe Illustrator template with detailed MAP Stylesheets for use with S 57 data S57_Basic_Template ait Adobe Illustrator template with simplified MAP Stylesheets for use with S 57data US5FL12M Sample ENC file in S 57 format chart of Tampa Bay courtesy of NOAA Use of the S 57 templates e To create anew document choose File gt New from Template Select 57_Advanced_Template ait Import a S 57 file for example use the sample file In the MAP Stylesheets panel move the layers from No MAP Stylesheet to its corresponding stylesheet when available gt Advance template the corresponding stylesheet has the same name as the layer but not all layers have a stylesheet therefore stay under No MAP Stylesheet gt Basic template all layers have a stylesheet with the same name as the layer or if not the name others The letters A Land P have be added to the names to sort the stylesheets per feature type Area Line or Point Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files A4 1 NOTE This representation is non exhau
111. 7100 Export attributes J toa delimited text file comma be viewed with this list 2 Alds2 ieee i lector 5130632 pices space tab or semi colon 3 Aids1 52913 232000 Arkansas 2673400 r separated Attributes and Properties J4 M ids4 Se ee esac Preferences Opens MAPublisher Attribute and property 5 104101 231000 Colorado 4301261 Preferences on the MAP values on the selected layer 6 Aids2 4976 566000 Connecticut 3405565 Attributes Panel property sheet are displayed here 7 Aids1 2054 586000 Delaware 783600 see chapter 1 8 Aids2 66 063000 District of Colum 572059 i Selected objects Number te49 areas selected Es AAA e Join Table Click to join an external of objects selected on the data table to the current attribute current layer table Apply Expression To assign attribute i ToF Hide Column To hide the Cone Right click Windows values or graphical properties to currently selected column Hide Column or Ctrl click Mac on selected art via the input of an New Column To add a new d New Column a column to display EXPIESSION Edit STATE_NAME column to the attribute table A this menu Find amp Replace Click to find and Delete STATE_NAME ttibutesinth t ni 5 replace attributes in the curren Show All attribute table Hide All M 1 Show Hide Columns Select or un select Fah heme Toran ihe properties IS Name of all columns comprising the column names to show or
112. Author Alt Ctrl F9 Navigator w MAP Toolbar Alt Shift Ctrl Fa can be found under the Object menu for editing Scale Bars Grids and Graticules menu item name is adjusted accordingly Chapter 1 Getting Started The MAPublisher Tools 21 The MAPublisher filters can be found under the Object gt Filters menu MAP Images Export Image Register Image ii MAP LabelPro MAP LabelPro Lock unlock MAP Legend Create North Arrow Hide Feature Text Label SNOW A Grids and Graticules Make Index Scale Bar a a MAP Images MAP Lines Buffer Lines Rasterize MAP LabelPro S Create Gradient Mesh MAP Legend Flip Lines Create Object Mosaic MAP Lines Join Lines Simplify Lines comme Five MAPublisher tools can be found in the main Adobe Illustrator Tools panel a f te PF i al Ll Ee Bd ve E ic 3 lal ae Ws l el E l p ji Dy O PN a He MAF Location Tool T In Adobe Illustrator CS3 MAPublisher Filters are found in the Filters menu 22 Chapter 1 Getting Started The MAPublisher Tools MAPublisher Toolbar Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Toolbar The new MAPublisher Toolbar allows the user to launch the MAPublisher tools described in the previous paragraph in a single click The MAP toolbar is divided in five sections MAPublisher Import MAPublisher Lines MAPublisher LabelPro MAPublisher Legends MAPublisher Imaging and MAPublisher P
113. Behind When pasting map objects elements you have the option of deciding to paste the new object in front or behind the copied elements at the time of pasting Postscript Pattern Fills You can use PostScript pattern fills and complex vector strokes You can sample colours from images and apply them precisely to vector data Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 23 Graphics Backgrounder Complex Colour Treatments Even with complex colours you can quickly and accurately create colour ramps with differing depths intensity of 10 20 etc These can be set as individual colours on a panel or as a gradient across mapped features Improved Symbology Improved symbology e g road treatments and cartographic symbols than is available in traditional GIS software Speed Drawing You can easily turn on and off selected layers of a map to speed drawing This can be done by turning off specified layers and or limiting the display of selected layers to simple vectors with all symbology removed Not only will this speed the handling of the map it lets you easily use underlying vectors for reference with no distraction or distortion caused by mapping symbology Actual Size Viewing In addition to standard zooming and panning capabilities you can view the details on a map at the actual size at which they will be plotted printed Rulers Guides and Alignment Tools Rulers with adjustable guides and multi combination alignment tools
114. CTIONALITY By using the MAP Area tools areas of exact map dimensions can be quickly added to any MAP Layer and its related attribute table Whenever an area is created using the MAP Area tools any objects that fall inside the area in whole or part will be automatically selected USING THE MAP AREA TOOLS Overview MAPublisher offers Ellipse and Rectangle drawing tools Select the shape you require from the main Adobe Illustrator Toolbar and select the MAP Layer which contains the coordinate system on which you want to draw the shape There are two methods of using the MAP Area tools As with Adobe Illustrator shape tools you can either click and drag to create a shape at an unspecified size Alternatively you can single click in the MAP document to open the Add Area dialog box where you specify exact width and height values for the shape Drawing via Click and Drag To draw shapes at unspecified sizes click and drag over the Map document while holding down the left mouse button until the desired area has been outlined as is done with the standard Adobe Illustrator area drawing tools Use the Alt key Windows or the Option key Mac to draw from the centre and or the Shift key to constrain the proportions When you release the mouse button the area will be created Entering Specific Dimensions To draw shapes at specified sizes single click at a point in your Map document at the location from which you wish to plot the shape The MAPub
115. CVEIVICW E EE aetna e sees ethane ee seeenaceen nee ates A2 1 The Geodetic Datasource pois scacncesaedandeewsiusageeddsse sense endaws A2 3 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Legend Functionality in MAP Stylesheets cc cece eee eeenes A3 1 Grid and Scalebar Operations lt i ciiw cscs cies vesedus sauna vuatawsonsadeews A3 3 CODY AIG Paste o ccg eset sec E A EEN E A E E A3 4 Legacy Text Conversion esesssssesessesesesesesososorecseseseso A3 4 Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files Appendix 5 Glossary Appendices 187 Contents Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Graphic File Formats Al The Adobe Illustrator native postscript file format Refer to the Adobe Illustrator User Guide for more information DOQ Digital Orthophoto Quadrangle DOQ are geographic images from the United States Geological Survey USGS and are stored in the JPG format They can be placed by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter DOQ are usually very large files 30 40 MB or more and will require extremely large amounts of RAM DRG Digital Raster Graphics DRG are scanned images of published topographic maps from the USGS stored in TIF format They can be placed by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter DRG are also usually very large files 30 40 MB or more and will require extremely large amounts of RAM for any manipulation within Adobe Illustra
116. EREQUISITES For Register Image to be functional the geospatial properties of the raster image must be known Some raster image formats store the relationship between source image coordinates pixel location and real world reference coordinates in an associated reference file but do not save the coordinate system information e g world file tfw The commonly used GeoTIFF images are embedded with geographic information such as position and coordinate system Depending on the image format check the position and coordinate system of your imagery with your data provider before attempting to use this tool To fit the imagery to existing vector data one option is to first transform the vector data to match the image s coordinate system in MAPublisher see the MAP View Editor in chapter 4 Alternatively Avenza s Geographic Imager for Adobe Photoshop can be used to transform the imagery to match the coordinate system of the MAP View Finally the image must be imported to the document using the Adobe Illustrator Place command File gt Place The image can be placed on any layer MAP Layer or not Use a MAP Layer only if it is certain that the image s coordinate system matches the MAP View containing the layer NOTE The image can be placed to a layer containing artwork but it is recommended to use a specific layer dedicated only to the image registration for better layer management and workflow At this point the image is placed on the artboard
117. Filter Delete Selection Filter Edit Selection Filter Opens the Edit Selection Filter function below for editing the assigned expression a Capital Cities CAPITAL true aes Interstate ADMN_CLASS Interstate Toll TOLL_RD y Apply as New Selection Add to Current Selection Remove from Current Selection Get Subset of Current Selection a oekt amp amp d Split usroads_line Split layer Opens the Split Layer function below for copying or moving selected objects to a new layer Preferences Preferences Opens the MAPublisher Preferences on the MAP Selection Filters property sheet New Edit Selection Filter Edit Expression Opens the Expression Builder for editing the assigned expression Edit Selection Filter Provinces with density greater than 10 Density gt 10 f The expression is valid Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional information is reported Split Layer f The expression is valid Destination e ____________Destination Layer Enter the name of the alas Capital_cities new layer to be created C Copy attribute schema Copy attribute schema Check this option to copy the attribute schema onto the new layer Copy qualifying art to destination layer R ENA Method Select the option to copy or O Move qualifying art to destination layer move objects from the source
118. Glossary B C Colour Ramp A graduated range of colours between two extreme colour selections Conformal A map projection is conformal when at any point the scale is the same in every direction Therefore meridians and parallels intersect at right angles and the shapes of very small areas and angles with very short sides are preserved The size of most areas however is distorted Contour A line connecting points of equal elevation Coordinate system A graticule or a Cartesian grid in which points are located from two or three axes which intersect at a point Curvature The amount of curve in a line as defined by a series of points D Data model An abstraction of the real world which incorporates only those properties being relevant to the application at hand The data model would normally define specific groups of entities and their attributes and the relationships between these entities A data model is independent of a computer system and its associated data structures Database A collection of data organized according to a conceptual structure describing the characteristics of the data and the relationships among their corresponding entities Database management system DBMS A set of computer programs for organizing the information in a database usually containing routines for data input verification storage and retrieval Datum Any numerical or geometrical value surface line or point which may serve as a base o
119. IN Upon creation the north arrow will be added to the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel and the coordinate system of the host MAP View will be used to align the north arrow correctly When the north arrow symbol is repositioned on the map it will be re oriented to the true north at the new location NOTE Sample north arrow designs are included on your MAPublisher CD Go to Window gt Symbol Libraries gt Other Library navigate to the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on your CD and load the MAP_NorthArrows ai file Drag the required symbol onto your Legend layer and then execute the Create North Arrow filter In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Create North Arrow is found in the Filter gt MAP Legend menu Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows 143 Create North Arrow Bestocted Ac cece Wesecher Island is an important brooding area for saa ti Actrssis by parit orty be AN Ta y K 2 f vr Ne dy TEES VA th alee Se zi by Sess TEE VI MS A i iV i j l i Wi y q 4 rele li RS ae Pa ai ce a 5 p FY 3 f F Pa ad Poe SE ed ak gt p She s f f d i ET f 4 BY pees n N x f al Y OWE x A gs S A Fe KA f ml Fa X gt 4 Si a RJ aes oN Ss ie ees Pte ae s tes 4 gt 4 F 4 ikaz F Pi A wai ZIE 2 ef j Px Cautba Along parts of te Toston Dassta Trai you wit toost to enfoncad harardous cht aigos MAP Web Author Users should have a basic un
120. Info It is a commonly found format for freely distributed data such as that found at the GIS Data Depot http www geocomm com A single E00 file describes a complete Arclnfo coverage The file itself is actually an archive of several smaller files referred to as subfiles Some of these subfiles have fixed names which do not vary from coverage to coverage and A1 2 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats follow a predefined data format The remainder of the subfiles contained within an E00 are the info files These files may contain user defined attributes and have names which vary from coverage to coverage Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions e00 Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Spatial Index Never Ellipses No Schema Required Yes Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute e00_type Donut Polygon Yes Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes There are essentially four types of geometry defined in E00 files which will be reproduced as layers during import Arcs lines Points Polygons and Text Prior to the import process an additional Setting can be made e Ticpoints layer This option enables you to include an additional layer which will hold the registration points for the imported data The default is to set to Yes ESRI ARCINFO GENERATE GEN ESRI simple ASCII storage and interc
121. LATION Area Expression Validity Indicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional info is reported FUNCTIONALITY The Apply Expression tool allows for the assignment and application of expressions to currently selected artwork for the purpose of assigning attributes assigning properties or transforming artwork For example the tool can be used to assign attribute values based on values in other columns assign graphic styles to selected elements or transform data on the page via the assignment of a rotation value Note that property attributes are dynamic Changes made to them in the map attribute table are reflected immediately in the graphical properties and on screen display of the data to which they are linked Expressions can be generated and applied to data based on the values found in an existing attribute column providing a one step process to transform a vast number of different objects in a single operation NOTE Unlike the Derive Value From Expression option in Edit Schema values computed through Apply Expression are not tied to the original attributes constructing the expression and can be edited later on APPLYING EXPRESSIONS Ensure the data required for the application of the expression is selected and that layer is selected in the MAP Attributes panel Then access the tool by clicking the Apply Expression button or menu item in the same panel First specify a column from the Apply to li
122. Layer Control panel into the Flash map To do so the option Enable Layer Visibility Toggle must be checked Layers that are checked in the Layer List will be included as toggable in the Layer Control The layers that are not checked are exported but it will not be possible to switch them on and off of the display when the Flash map is opened in a Web browser In general the layers display order is the same as setup in Adobe Illustrator However toggable layers will be displayed at the top of the non toggable layers Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 155 Export to Web The style of the Layer Control is set through the Layer Control list box The two styles options are e Built in Flash Datagrid the control is automatically placed on the Flash document and cannot be modified Layers Major city names Major cities N IS Is Canadas province External layerCheckboxes js Check boxes are placed outside the Flash map The great advantage of this option is that the position and layout of the check boxes can be re arranged using HTML tags By default they are placed at the top of the Flash map Major city names M Major cities V Canada province V Canada land Flash Viewer Settings Users can setup the following parameters for the Flash Viewer how the Flash map will be displayed when opened in the Web browser The parameters that can be setup are e Size of the display window width and height it cannot be larger than the Adobe Ill
123. OLS MAP LabelPro has the ability to place labels inside symbols A typical application of this would be numbered highway route shields To label lines with symbols check the Label with symbol check box to enable the symbol options Choose an appropriate symbol set from the Symbol File drop down list and select a symbol from the Symbol drop down list Use the Size option to change the size of the symbol The symbol size refers to the size of the symbol and not the label created within it e g specifying a size of 5 pt will result in a symbol being generated 5 pts in height Style Family l T Arial Size 12 00 pt Sample ce ce LO Sme ie Label with symbol Enable this check box to activate the symbology options ne Symbol file Choose which symbol nited States Route Size Specify a size manually file Isf that contains the desired United States Route or allow the symbol to be symbols Empty Highway Shield scaled automatically to accommodate the label s text Symbol Choose the symbol you wish ner l via the Auto option from this drop down list R T igus P Vertical Oval Square Rectangle Rounded Rectangle Pentagon Hexagon v NOTE The label font size and a fixed symbol size not Auto size affect how a label is sized inside a symbol For example if a fixed symbol size of 22 pt is used but the label font size of 5 pt the symbol will be 22 pt but the label inside
124. ORD LOG SETTINGS DIALOG BOX The Record Log Settings dialog box requires either navigation to a directory or manual specification of a location to which the log file is to be saved Once a directory has been specified the file name for the Record Log must be specified This file will be saved as a standard text file that is readable in Notepad or any other plain text capable application It may also be used at a later date to import the log information into a new or existing document as MAP features In addition to specifying a file name and location either the Append option or the Overwrite option must be specified The Append option will add all new information to the end of the file if the selected file contains information The Overwrite option will overwrite any information currently contained in the specified file with the new information received NOTE Once a Record Log file has been specified using the Overwrite option and plotting started any interruption to the plotting for example evoking a Stop Scanning operation will result in the saved log file being overwritten by new log data once scanning and plotting restart If it is desired that a complete session log be created and saved which is not overwritten each time plotting is stopped and restarted the Append option should be used Chapter 16 MAP GPS 173 Record Sentence Log Playback Sentence Log Accessed from the MAP GPS menu Browse Allows the user to navigate to the loca
125. OS zip file or the file can be corrupted The shareware utility ZIPIT found at http maczipit com has been found to be quite good for decompressing Windows zip files I am having trouble with importing SDTS files Where am I going wrong Be very careful how you receive a xxx tar gz file off the USGS web site and decompress it These files are in a binary format and if you use Smart TAR CR LF translation it will not import and may cause errors in MAPublisher Make sure that you do all FTP transfers as binary After you receive it use gzip to decompress it and TAR to further decompress it You should have about 20 separate files look for the ones that end in xxxxCATD DDF Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 17 Frequently Asked Questions Why does my data sometimes vanish If you imported some data and it appeared when selected but when you deselected the data it seemed to vanish here are a few things to check e You may have inadvertently pressed cut or the delete key Check under Edit in the menu bar if the Undo Clear task is available this means that you just deleted something Select Undo Clear and the data should return e Check the order of your layers Try moving the layer in question to the top of the list of layers in the Layers panel so that it is drawn on top of the other layers e Make sure that current layer is available for viewing in the Layers panel by having a dot in the left hand column under the eye visualization
126. Opens a Data Source browser to enable the selection of files for import Source Coordinate System Character Encoding Assign a codec if the attribute information held in the selected dataset uses a double byte character set Source Coordinate System Provides a description of the coordinate system and units detected in the data source Clear Click this button to clear the existing source coordinate system Specify If the coordinate system of the selected file s is known but it was not automatically detected by the program click here This will open the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box below Same as Check this option in order to assign a coordinate system that matches that of an existing MAP View RELATED TOOLS Specify Source Coordinate System Accessed via the Specify button Specify Source Coordinate System Datasource C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files geodata xml 7 Coordinate System Information This area shows information about the coordinate systems i e Name Custom Data C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 customsystems xml Folder QO E Coordinate Systems FAI Geodetic WGS 84 Horizontal Datum WGS 1984 WGS 1984 Display Name Name Coordinate Systems Choose a category appropriate to the Aitoff Aitoff amp Behrmann Behrmann WGS 84 Recent Earr amp Bonne Bonne
127. P view You have three choices when deciding the destination coordinate system for the imported files 1 You can choose to import all of the listed files in the coordinate system and parameters that exists in one of the listed files Click New based on and then select one of the files in the coordinate system you require If you have multiple files in the File List you can check the Auto scale option to ensure that when the data is imported it is scaled to fit the current page extents If you do not check this option your current scale will be used and some of your data may fall outside of the page extents during the import process 2 Choose to import all of the listed files in the coordinate system and parameters that currently exists in the document for example via a previous import In this case select Use existing and then select the MAP View containing the desired coordinate system Check the Auto scale option to ensure the combination of incoming and existing data will be fit inside the page extents i e existing data may be rescaled as a result If you do not check this option some of your data may be imported outside of the page extents 3 Choose to assign another coordinate system completely by first selecting the Create new option and then clicking Editor This will open the MAP View Editor allowing you to specify a coordinate system from a projection list and make numerous page scaling edits For an in depth look at this tool see cha
128. Pro they will not be labelled or used as obstacle To take them into consideration uncheck the option Ignore invisible artwork See chapter 1 on MAPublisher Preferences for more information on this topic Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro 177 MAP LabelPro MAP LabelPro Settings SETUP LAYERS Before labelling the Setup Layers dialog box must be configured to specify which MAP Layers are to be labelled and which layers if any will be denoted as obstacles Obstacles are map objects that are included in the conflict resolution decision making process and are considered objects that must be avoided when trying to place a label The Setup Layers dialog box displays all valid MAP Views and their MAP Layers in the document To mark a layer for labelling purposes or as an obstacle check the appropriate check boxes to the right of the layer name All layers are listed but only layers that are checked will be included in the labelling process or considered as obstacles NOTE Layers may be used as both a label and an obstacle concurrently It is possible to perform labelling operations for multiple MAP Views simultaneously however source data layers and destination text layers must belong to the same MAP View Label Enable the check box for r Setup Layers each data layer to be labelled Enabling the option beside the Name Displays all MAP Views Name Label Obstacle VAF MEW eile wllvenable he thie th
129. Publisher and Adobe Illustrator tools The size set for the Adobe Illustrator document will be the size of the Flash map on the Web browser It is recommended to set the document size before any work is started However at a later stage the document size may be changed in the Adobe Illustrator Document Setup dialog box Using the Pixels unit is the most practical to compare with Web browser sizes To benefit from the Web tagging based on MAP Attributes the MAP layers must have the relevant attributes populated For example to insert links to images using the Multiple method the image file name and path must be set as an attribute value therefore the MAP layer must have a dedicated attribute field e g house jpg NOTES e Not just any map can be made into a Flash Map A print ready map does not necessarily mean that it is a Flash ready map Unneeded art and attributes should be removed lines should be simplified Layers that do not require tagging will still be exported e Only the active artboard will be exported to Flash Adobe Illustrator CS4 only Furthermore the directory containing the images Source Media Folder must be organized The supported image formats are jpeg png and gif To be sure that images can be viewed properly the latest Flash Player version should be installed download from Adobe website www adobe com USING MAP WEB AUTHOR Specify the Source Media Folder The Source Media Folder is the directory containing the
130. Selection Filter will update the left hand field in this panel The right hand field will display the total number of map features that exist on the current MAP Layer All or Reverse The dialog box offers a quick way to select all map features on the current layer Simply click the A All button to select all the Map features on the current layer Clicking the R Reverse button will reverse the current selection i e all the features that were selected will be deselected and the features that were deselected will be selected Saving Selections The Save button will save the current selection to memory allowing you to retrieve your selection again later Only one selection can be saved and it is limited to the current Adobe Illustrator session A subsequent click of the Save button will overwrite the original saved selection Clicking Recall will perform the selection that is saved to memory Clicking Clear will remove the saved selection from memory Chapter 11 Making Selections 123 MAP Selection Stats Additional Selection Options This panel also offers additional selection tools MOR MAND and MXOR Clicking the MOR button will select both the currently selected objects and urent Resulting Saved m aE the saved selection Selection M AND res gt The MAND button will select the map features in the current selection which Current Resulting Selection Saved ME E are included in the saved selection Selectio
131. Symbols and Colour Map attributes can be represented by labels symbols and colour to make them easy to interpret e g rivers may be represented with blue lines of varying widths depending upon their size Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 21 GIS Backgrounder Layers Map features can be logically grouped into layers of related information For example a map could be layered by rivers soils mineral deposits and municipality This layering makes it easy to perform analysis that overlay geographic features and combine adjacent areas with similar characteristics Lines A line represents the linear shape of a map element which is too narrow to be an area e g a contour line or road Map Features A GIS stores two types of map information spatial information which describes the location and shape of geographic features and descriptive information about those features A GIS links these two types of data and maintains the spatial relationships between the map features Features are portrayed on two dimensional maps as points lines and areas For example a map may contain points representing location information such as telephone poles lines representing linear features such as roads and areas representing geographic features such as lakes Points Usually represented by a symbol or label a point is a discrete location which is usually too small to be identified as an area or line e g an oil wellhead or manhole
132. View Click this button to switch the selected layer from one MAP view to another Remove GIS data moves the selected layer to Non MAP layers section discarding the geographic information and attributes in the process __ Al madsen New MAP View button Create a A world_ares New MAP View and specify its Non MAP layers name and coordinate system ae information Non MAP layers List the Adobe Illustrator layers that are not part of a specified MAP View and do not contain georeferencing information 4MAP Views Wp ean RD a Delete MAP View button Delete the currently selected MAP View Export MAP View s MAP Layer _______ T iiaii aa sai C o provided it does not contain any Switch to Alaska map layers Export the selected MAP View or MAP Layer to various GIS formats Switch to Hawai Switch to World MAP VIEWS PANEL OPTIONS MENU New MAP View New MAP View Create a new MAP View and specify its name and coordinate information ae Duplicate MAP View Create a duplicate of the currently selected MAP View Edit Lower 48 Edit MAP View Open the MAP View Editor to edit the name and coordinate system of the currently selected MAP View Specify Anchors N i hpt Ona Seles bert Delete MAP View Delete the currently selected MAP View provided it does not contain any Adobe Illustrator Export Coordina
133. WGS 84 WGS 1984 Type Envelope EPSG Code To i i e Cylindrical Equal Ar Cylindrical Equal Ar WGS 84 WGS 1984 data to be imported To view all ere co Edert SWS 84S 1984 choose a known source coordinate i All Eckert 11 Eckert II WGS 84 WGS 1984 oye of the coordinate systems select Recent 5 Equidistant Conic Equidistant Conic WGS 84 WGS 1984 system select it from this list All For a list of the last 10 is Search Equidistant Cylindrical Equidistant Cylindrical WGS 84 WGS 1984 3 Africa D Gall Sterographic Gall Sterographic WGS 84 WGS 1984 amp coordinate systems used select nes Goode Homolosine Goode Homolosine WGS 84 WGS 1984 Recent Sasi wc bi ee p aot Systems N 5 Miller Cylindrical Miller Cylindrical WGS 84 WGS 1984 Search T Click th IS button and your E Molweide l Mollweide WGS 84 WGS 1984 search results will be populated Search Specify a text string E a NSIDC EASE Grid North NSIDC EASE Grid North Unspecified datu Not specified based on Ir NSIDC EASE Grid South Unspecified datu Not specified based on Ir Outdated D n NSIDC EASE Grid South naa Robinson Robinson WGS 84 WGS 1984 amp Sinusoidal Sinusoidal WGS 84 WGS 1984 v UT M CE lt i gt to search the database for coordinate systems Results are displayed in the Search category Matching MAP View Automatically opens if there is already a coordinate system in your document which m
134. WING THE FLASH MAP WITH A WEB BROWSER To view the Flash map with a Web browser without posting the files on a server users must first set the Global Security Settings or export using the off line viewing option Users should also download the latest Flash Player version for their Web browser It can be downloaded free of charge from Adobe Web site www adobe com 164 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Workflow an COCONINO ma NAT L FOREST anes Cim imas The MAP GPS feature allows for the collection display and styling of raw GPS data directly in Adobe Illustrator Using the MAP GPS feature you can connect to many NMEA compliant GPS devices collect data points and then use the information to apply it to maps The data can be reprojected styled and scaled automatically when it is received The MAP GPS Panel is covered in this section Chapter 16 MAP GPS 165 MAP GPS Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP GPS Panel or MAP Toolbar EA Start Stop Scanning Begins or ends scanning of the GPS device depending GPS Fix Displays the status of the GPS on the current state fix No Fix 2D or 3D will be displayed Manual Plot Plots a single point at the stalin te Displays the number eps No Don of Paso E eaeee of satellites which are currently being i u tracked by the GPS oe Soe eae oe ng Point Plot Settings dialog box Altitude n a HDOP n a Altitude Displays the current altitude T n a
135. _Project lmages Mylmage Mylmage1 jpg and the Source Media Folder is C Work Flash_Project lmages then the path Mylmage Mylmage1 jpg must be typed in the Web Tag Dialog or in the MAP Attributes panel when using attributes b Creating callout bubbles Using the Web Tag Dialog insert the information relative to the callout bubbles title images text contents etc When MAP Attributes have been prepared for some layers users may first select all objects in one layer and choose the Multiple tagging mode Use the Preview to check the aspect of the callout bubble prior to the export process When tagging multiple objects use the buttons Next Previous to display the bubble created for each individual objects 4 EXPORT FLASH DOCUMENTS The settings entered in the Web Export Dialog are determined by the desired aspect of the Web map We recommend that users tryout the different configurations Here are some simple examples Ml Major city names M Major cities V Canada province Canada i Simple MAP No layer control no navigation Basic Settings No Search box Advanced Settings Default Style Map Built in layer control and navigation button added through the Basic Settings only No Advanced Settings required Customized Style Map External layer control and navigation button added through the Basic Settings Removed zoom buttons and changed callout bubble style through Advanced Settings 5 VIE
136. a Lambert Conic Conformal Robinson Eckert IV Mercator Sinusoidal Eckert VI Miller Cylindrical Swiss Oblique Mercator Equidistant Conic Mollweide Stereographic Transverse Mercator Gall Stereographic New Zealand Map Grid Coordinate Systems using this projection will not be stored when saving the reference file ListGeo file Igo A ListGeo files are text files containing the GeoTIFF metadata information or tags which can then be read and may also be used as input to other programs GeoTIFF File tif tiff Tagged Image File Format TIFF or TIF is a common raster graphic file format and one of the most common geospatial image formats you are likely to come across Many raster geographic images from GIS systems are stored in this format A GeoTIFF is a TIFF file with embedded geographic information such as position and scale in world coordinates coordinate system or an explicit list of ground control points NOTE The only way to differentiate a regular TIFF image from a referenced GeoTIFF image is to open it in a spatial imaging software application such as Avenza s Geographic Imager product Unlike the other geographically referenced image formats discussed in this section GeoTIFFs do not require a separate reference file When registering a GeoTIFF image in MAPublisher the same file name must be selected in the Load File dialog box the required georeference information is contained in the file header Supported
137. a MicroStation MID MIF E00 and KML See the Export Settings above Choosing a Destination Folder Most of the export formats will require the selection of a destination folder only For export to ESRI or MapInfo formats click the Browse button to specify a destination folder Click the OK button to export your MAP Layer In the case of exporting to AutoCAD format you will be required to specify a name for the exported file and select the file extension DXF or DWG to be used For MicroStation formats you will be required to specify a name for the exported file If you wish to export to either of these formats click the Browse button to name the export file and then choose the file format from the Format drop down list ADDITIONAL NOTES Valid Area Direction Area Layer Exports When exporting Area layers to GIS formats polygon outlines must have a positive Area value whereas holes held inside compound paths or complex shapes must have a negative Area value If you have values for polygons in the Area property column of your MAP Attribute table which contradict these guidelines you can use the following tools to convert the MAPublisher area calculation from a negative to a positive value or vice versa Flip Lines tool chapter 8 for convert multiple areas e Create a Selection Filter chapter 11 to select all elements that have an Area of less than zero to select negative values or greater than zero to select positive val
138. a GIS or ASCII file containing these points ready for import Provided you have the real world coordinates for the locations you wish to plot you can manually create a delimited ASCII file using a text editor ex Notepad BBEdit SimpleText Ultra Edit etc or a spreadsheet program ex Excel Lotus 123 etc This file can then be imported using either Simple or Advanced Import using the ASCII Point Data import format One column in the file must contain the X coordinates of the points and another must contain the Y coordinates You can add as many additional columns as you wish containing additional information to be imported as attribute data If you are using a text editor you can simply type in your data in the following format Column 1 Header Column 2 Header Column 3 Header etc Column 1 Value 1 Column 2 Value 1 Column 3 Value 1 etc Column 1 Value 2 Column 2 Value 2 Column 3 Value 2 etc Note that negative values for the X and Y coordinates denote west longitudes and south latitudes respectively Also make sure to enter a carriage return using the enter key on your keyboard after the last line of data otherwise the last line may be ignored by the MAPublisher Point Importer If you are using a spreadsheet application you can enter your point information as a table and save the file in a text format preferably csv or txt choosing either comma or tab delimiting Th
139. a standard Import process an Adobe Illustrator layer is created for each feature type automatically and is automatically appended with a _point _line _area or _text suffix in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Certain file types generate multiple layers such as the levels found in DGN or DXF but they are similarly split up by feature type A single import of such files produces a single MAPublisher View as an import can only take place in a single coordinate system Custom MAP Views may be created in order to georeference existing Adobe Illustrator artwork The following pages deal with the creation and management of MAP Views specifying and reprojecting a coordinate system editing scale and data placement on the page merging Adobe Illustrator layers and exporting to GIS formats The topics covered in this section are as follows Georeferencing MAP Views Panel MAP View Editor Import MAP View Export MAP Location Tool Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 49 Georeferencing INTRODUCTION TO GEOREFERENCING Georeferencing a non georeferenced Adobe Illustrator file in MAPublisher can be separated into three steps 1 A Source Coordinate System must be specified The coordinate system gives a method to represent geographic points in relation to a world origin these are also called point map geographic real world or spatial coordinates 2 MAPublisher bases its georeferencing on a tie point within an Adobe Illustrator d
140. acement Offset V Above E Below Vertical split Centerline T Spread words Spacing 1 00 H Inches Repeat labels Spacing 5 00 Inches F Allow overhang 30 00 gt Main Street V Allow stacking V Allow labels to cross lines V Allow font reduction Steps pA Each step allows Label Pro to shrink the selected A font by 0 5 pt if necessary F Allow use of leader lines Allowed Line Crosses 3 Leader Width 1 00 pt Spread words Multiple word labels placed a specified amount apart Repeat labels Repeat labels along a line at specified amounts Allow overlapping labels Check this option to allow line labels to overlap with other labels in the same labelling session Allow overhang Labels are allowed to overhang the line up to a set percentage The percentage of overhang is relative to the start of the label and the end of the line Allow stacking Labels are allowed to stack to a maximum of two lines Allow Labels to Cross Lines Labels are allowed to cross line features and area boundaries Allow font reduction Automatically reduces the label size incrementally when necessary Each step shrinks the selected font by 0 5 pt Allow use of leader lines Incorporate the use of leader lines Allowed Line Crosses permits the number of lines the leader line will be allowed to cross
141. ach pixel in the selected map unit updates the Effective Map Size Register Image supports non square pixels Constrain Proportions Check this option to keep the pixel proportions Effective Map Size X Y Specify the X and Y size of the image in map units updates the Pixel Size Register Image Object gt Filters gt MAP Images gt Register Image or MAP Toolbar ce Register Image 3937769 58270208 deg Y 1901733 70370871 Image Size 2726 by 1546 pixels 1 Pixel X 2540 0637098751 Y 2540 3422982886 C Constrain Proportions Effective Map Size E X 6924213 67311952 L Y 3927369 19315418 Coordinate System United States Lambert Conformal Conic meter t Editing these options is not required when using the Load File function Select MAP View Register the image on a new MAP View created from the image registration information or select an existing MAP View from the drop down list FUNCTIONALITY Undefined Layer This dialog box appears if the image to register is not placed on a MAP Layer Select MAPView Please specify the destination MAPView for the image layer Create new Add to existing USA MAP View Please specify a feature type for layer Image Feature type Legend Advanced Base attribute schema on A eastusa_area Placement X Y Specify the coordinates in map units of the selected corner of the raster image Load File Cho
142. ach platform two tables have been created For each data format there are four areas where Unicode character encoding can be used 1 File Directory when Unicode encoding is used in the path to where the file is located 2 Filename when Unicode encoding is used in the filename 3 Attribute column name when Unicode encoding is used in a column name for attributes 4 Attribute value when an attribute value contains Unicode encoding Windows Unicode Support mporting File Attribute Attribute Data Format Column Directory Value Name Delimited Text FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES ESRI Inter CAD DWG CAD DXF ESRI Arclnfo FORMAT HAS NO Generate ATTRIBUTES ESRI GML Simple MapInfo M EAESEa MicroStation FORMAT HAS NO Design ATTRIBUTES EA o ASCII TEXT FOR ATTRIBUTE NAMES AND MOST VALUES A1 12 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Unicode Support Windows Unicode Support Exporting File Attribute Attribute Data Format Column Directory Value Name Delimited Text FORMAT HAS NO ATTRIBUTES FORMAT HAS NO ESRI Inter ESRI Arcinfo we FORMAT HAS NO Generate ATTRIBUTES ESRI Shapefile GML Simple MapInfo CAD DWG MicroStation FORMAT HAS NO Design ATTRIBUTES Mac OS X Unicode Support Importing Mac OS X Unicode Support Exporting Data Format rig Directory Attribute Attribute Attribute Attribute Column Value Data Format Column Value Name
143. acked DMS MinutesSeconds Seconds point Avenza Office 43 6969N 43 41 48 98 N 79 23 32 38 W 48 41 8163 N 79 23 5396 W 48 6969 N 79 3922 W 79 3922W 43 6969 79 3922 N 43 6969 079 3922 43d41 48 98 N 79d23 32 38 W 43 41 48 98 W 079 23 32 38 N 43 41 48 98 W 79 23 32 38 43 418163N 79 235396W N43 418163 W79 235396 43 418163 079 235396 43 414898N 79 233238W N 43 414898 W 79 233238 43 414898 079 233238 434148 98N 0792332 38W 434148 98 0792332 38 N 434148 98 W 0792332 38 43414898N 079233238W N 43414898 W 079233238 43414898N 079233238 Chapter 6 Plotting Points 87 MAP Point Plotter Choosing a Symbol and Scale After entering coordinate values select an appropriate symbol to use by clicking the symbol name link Again the symbols displayed are the symbols that currently exist in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel To scale the symbol used edit the Scale entry field Clicking the Up and Down arrows will increase or decrease the value by 10 Plotting Points Click Plot to plot the point in the designated MAP layer To plot subsequent points edit the coordinates and also choose different symbols if required and click Plot again 88 Chapter 6 Plotting Points MAP Point Plotter Plot Centroids MAP Point Plotter panel gt Plot Centroids MAP View Select the MAP View containing Plot Centroids the layers o
144. age NOTE String values are case sensitive and must be entered in quotes Adding Deleting and Re Ordering Columns Stipulations regarding the display order of attribute columns in the MAP Attributes panel can be set by reordering the existing list according to your preferences Any column may be promoted in the list attribute table by selecting it in the list and clicking the Up and Down buttons to move it up or down within the list Columns will display in the MAP Attributes panel according to the display order established in Edit Schema To create a new column click the Add button and input the desired column properties To delete an existing column choose it from the available list and click the Delete button Click OK to confirm your edits to the attribute structure on the selected layer These edits will immediately be visible in the MAP Attributes panel EDIT COLUMN Edit Schema can also be accessed via the Edit Column context menu Within the MAP Attributes panel select the column to be edited right click the column heading or cell and click Edit This opens the Edit Schema dialog box with the same column immediately selected in the column list NOTES e MAPublisher does not support punctuation characters in column names to avoid complications when exporting to external formats The following illegal characters are replaced with an underscore _ upon data import or join table space amp lt
145. age The file itself is actually an archive of several smaller files or sub files which will have fixed names and follow a predefined data format MAPublisher will reproduce these sub files as distinct Adobe Illustrator layers on import Therefore importing a single e00 import can result in the generation of point area line and text layers Note the hierarchy of layers in multi feature imports is by feature type text layers then point then line then area layers ESRI Arcinfo Generate gen Import and Export ArcInfo Generate files are created by ESRI Arclnfo product and have a simple ASCII from x y to x y format Due to its simplicity you can also use a text editor such as Notepad to create text files and save them with a gen extension which can then be imported with MAPublisher ESRI Shapefile shp Import and Export Shapefiles are most commonly created by ESRI ArcGIS or ArcView Shapefiles store both geometry and attributes for features and a single shapefile will consist of at least three physical files The shp portion contains the geometric data the dbf contains attributes for the geometric data and the shx contains the index information All three files are required in order to successfully import a shapefile to Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher There is also usually a prj file which holds the coordinate system information of the shapefile and will automatically be read by MAPublisher on import If your shapefile f
146. ain wwhelp wwhimpl common html wwhelp htm context LiveDocs_Parts amp file 00000922 html Auto Size Option When this option is used the callout size automatically adapts to the contents and callout image size 152 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Tag Dialog Trigger External URL The Trigger External URL options allow an advanced Web designer to load a specified HTML document designated by its URL address into a targeted HTML frame when the object being tagged is hovered or clicked A Web browser can be divided into multiple panes called HTML frames to present documents in multiple views which may be independent windows or subwindows For example within the same window one frame might display a static banner a second a navigation menu and a third the main document that can be scrolled through or replaced by navigating in the second frame An example layout could be as follow r T et Frame 1 l pacen 4 Frame 3 l l Frame 2 l l ee ee ee ee es es ee J Names of frames created by Web designers must begin with an alphabetic character a z A Z Some special purpose HTML frames have reserved names with a leading underscore The following reserved names are available for selection from the Target drop down list _blank Loads the linked document into a new blank window unnamed _self Loads the linked document into the same frame in which the link was clicked frame containing the Flash map _paren
147. and the style of arrow to be used as the leader line Area Rules Placement W Alow stacking Lox PP Mon terami raie s Damsco D m Allow extending beyond V7 Allow labels to cross lines boundary boundary E 7 Allow font reduction Steps 4 A E Allow use of leader lines hig A New Village Each step allows Label Pro to shrink the A Allowed Line Crosses 3 ig as selected font by 0 5 pt if necessary Leader Width 1 00 pt f 2 Allow overlapping labels Arrow Style Style 1 Pagano Allow stacking Labels are allowed to stack up toa maximum of two three or four lines Allow labels to cross lines Labels are allowed to cross line features and area boundaries Allow font reduction Automatically reduces the label size incrementally when necessary Each step shrinks the selected font by 0 5 pt Allow overlapping labels Area Labels are allowed to overlap other labels in the same labelling session For areas grouped in a compound path the largest area of the compound will be labelled Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro 183 MAP LabelPro Rules LINE RULES The Line Rules dialog box contains the label configuration options for labelling Line layers Rules can be set by selecting a line feature type layer clicking the Line Rules edit button in the Rules column The placement settings in the graphic below represent the default configuration however these settings may be changed to match a
148. anels rrje homun es Duseerere MAPublisher MAPublisher Lines MAP MAPublisher Legends MaAPublisher MAPublisher Panels Import LabelPro Imaging NOTE MAPublisher Toolbar cannot be saved in a workspace Adobe Illustrator main menu Window gt Workspace gt Save Workspace MAPUBLISHER IMPORT Simple Import Advanced Import a I MAPUBLISHER LINES Buffer Line ap lt Poi t 2 Simplify Lines a a Flip Line _ C O Join Points Join Lines MAPUBLISHER LABELPRO MAP LabelPro ih MAPUBLISHER LEGENDS North Arrow ii Fe E H A J bul a i Scale Bar Feature Text Ss Doo o Make Index Grids Graticules Chapter 1 Getting Started 23 MAPublisher Toolbar MAPUBLISHER IMAGING Export Image Ta o Register Image MAPUBLISHER PANELS es S 0 D F MIM 0 B MAP Web Author MAP GPS pnd rer MAP Location Tool MAP Stylesheets MAP Selection Stats MAP Views MAP Selection Filter MAP Point Plotter 24 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Toolbar MAPublisher Preferences Edit gt MAPublisher Preferences Windows Illustrator gt MAPublisher Preferences Mac OS MAPublisher Preferences are options that allow users to customize MAPublisher panels and editors including those for layer ordering font for attribute data display panel style etc Settings are available for the following categories e General e MAP Attributes panel e MAP LabelPro e MAP Stylesheets panel and editor
149. anner and either the origin or destination MAP View does not contain a defined coordinate system the Missing Coordinate System dialog box is displayed offering the two options 1 Specify custom coordinate system to specify the projection of the named MAP View via the Source Coordinate System function 2 Same as to specify the coordinate system of the named MAP View by choosing a coordinate system which already exists in a MAP View in your document NOTE Many transformations will inherently cause the loss of precision by the very nature of the complex mathematical calculations that must be performed Additionally there are differences in precision between MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator MAPublisher calculations are in 64 bit for accuracy but the results still must be stored as 32 bit for Adobe Illustrator As a result please be aware that you may lose precision if you drag repeatedly from one coordinate system to another When determining a coordinate system to use via the drag method we strongly recommend to use Edit gt Undo to revert coordinate systems until you find the appropriate system for your data Creating New MAP Views To create a new MAP View click New MAP View under the panel options menu or click the New button at the base of the panel This will automatically open the MAP View Editor which will be discussed in the MAP View Editor section allowing you to set up a coordinate system and enter values for scale rotation and
150. arch parameters Folder Angular Units Each category can be Find in Name searched by it s unique parameters e g Name EPSG Code Search Folder Projected Find in Name Geodetic Horizontal Datum Point Style Units Projection Type Projection Name Envelope EPSG Code All At the top of the Edit Geodetic Datasource dialog box two paths will be listed the path to the main Geodetic Datasource file which is protected from user modification and the Custom parameter file where all of the user defined definitions are stored On the left hand side of the dialog box objects are organized into object type categories with sub folders organized in a tree To explore the sub folders of a category click the plus sign Windows or arrow Mac OS to the left to see categories listed underneath Click a sub folder name to list the contained objects on the pane to the right New folders or sub folder can be created by clicking the New Folder button The default name is New Folder right click and click Rename to type in another name Only empty user defined folders can be deleted using the Delete Folder button Recently used objects are listed under the Recent sub folder of each object category To clear this list right click on the Recent folder name and choose Clear Recent Object History The Search Results sub folder contains the recent search results To run a query use the Search frame enter a text
151. area object in its entirety Click the Up or Down buttons to adjust the order in which the rules will be Set all labels to same minimum size If at least implemented in the labelling process one label has been reduced in font size due to the implementation of rules then ALL text items will be reduced to that font i ae ear areca gi Is size Feature Text Label only Point Label Settings Label Position Point Labels wt Label Position Choose the position of A the label relative to the point symbol Lower Right Ed Labels curve with lines of latitude _ Labels curve with lines of latitude e For projected layers choose this option to generate curved text on latitude lines 112 Chapter 10 Labelling Functions Labelling Tools Feature Text Label Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend gt Feature Text Label or MAP Toolbar FUNCTIONALITY The Feature Text Label filter allows labels to be added to your map based on the attribute data of the features Line Point or Area MAP Layers containing attribute information can be labelled using this filter All selected features on MAP Layers which contain appropriate attribute information can be labelled using this tool Data selected on multiple MAP Layers can be labelled simultaneously In addition you may specify options such as alignment to lines of latitude minimum font size horizontal scaling and label position
152. ase model for coordinates on its own Envelopes Defines a geographic area of use for a particular object e Horizontal Datums A horizontal datum more commonly referred to as just datum is the base model maps are built on All coordinate systems must have a datum associated with them to be related to any other map Without a known datum coordinates are meaningless e Linear Units Units for measuring straight line cartesian distances e Prime Meridians The prime meridian represents the line of longitude that is designated as 0 degrees All other lines of longitude are expressed by the angle by which they deviate from the prime meridian Together with the equator of an ellipsoid the prime meridian defines the origin of a geodetic coordinate system A prime meridian is defined by the angle that separates it from the Greenwich meridian A2 4 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource Users have the possibility to define new coordinate systems make copy and modify existing objects The custom objects are stored in a separate xml file saved by the user Users can also re organize the Geodetic Datasource default and custom parameters into categories and sub folders These changes are saved to a view file xvw The view file may be deleted to reset the Geodetic Datasource Editor to its default state Edit Geodetic Data Source Datasource File containing the default
153. atches the incoming data Matching MAP View Found Your data matches one or more MAP Views found in the document Please select a destination MAP View a Add to Add the incoming data file to a matching MAP View Destination MAP View Add to world C Resize MAP View to fit MAP View list Select the matching coordinate system that you wish to align the incoming data to Resize MAP View to fit Check this box to rescale the matching data so that both the selected layer and the incoming data fit inside the page extents Fit to page based on new MAP View Fit to page based on new MAP View Both the matching coordinate system and incoming data will be treated separately in terms of page scaling 40 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Simple Import IMPORT SETTINGS Delimited Text Data Settings Latitude Longitude or X Y Columns These two drop down lists hold the names of all the numeric columns in the selected file Select the columns from which the coordinates for each point will be read Columns Longitude Longitude 123 127416 Latitude Latitude 49 299093 Use first line as a header detected Coordinate Format Format Decimal Degrees D d Decimal Degrees with optional direction indicator Examples 7 5444W 54 9777N 79 44 Notation items in are optional means zero or more digits and means one or more digits Direction can be indicated with
154. ates to the base 2 number 1111111111111111 Binary numbers are the fundamental basis of computing Bitmap A grid of small squares cells or pixels stored in memory and used to generate an image Boolean There are two types of values true and false True false or yes no usually represent these C CAD D Computer Aided Design and Drafting Cadastre A public register or survey that defines or re establishes boundaries of public and or private land for purposes of ownership and taxation Cartogram An abstracted or simplified map for displaying quantitative data for which the base is normally not true to scale Cartography The organization and communication of geographically related information in either graphic or digital form It can include all stages from data acquisition to presentation and use CAST Centre for Advanced Spatial Technologies at the University of Arkansas Cell The basic element of spatial information in a raster image Character encoding A character encoding consists of a codec that pairs a sequence of characters from a given set with something else such as a sequence of natural numbers octets or electrical pulses in order to facilitate the storage of text Choropleth map A systematic representation in which colour or shading is applied to areas bounded by statistical or administrative limits Clipping A graphic process of cutting lines and symbols off the edge of a display area A5 2 Appendix 5
155. ation profiles for a specific work area Since the GML models base abstract classes these application profiles schemas are required for accessing and processing any GML datasets GML data has a gml extension and requires a attributes schema file xsd Some GML files may have their xsd file referenced to a URL path we recommend to copy the xsd files locally to avoid error messages upon import when no internet connection is available Users have two options to store their gml and xsd files they can be both located in a same directory or the xsd files can be kept in the MAPublisher GML Schema directory found here Windows XP and Vista C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files GMLSchema Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Data Source Files GMLSchema The second option is the most practical if all the GML files are using a same schema only one instance of the xsd file needs to be saved Installed with MAPublisher are three default xsd files e xml xsd generic GML attribute schema e nen3610 xsd and top10nl xsd models standardized in the Netherlands maintained by the Dutch topographic office Kadaster GML files with a missing xsd file or with an invalid attribute schema will cause a GML validation error upon import see chapter 3 Users have the option to either find the appropriate xsd file and copy it to the GML Schema directory or to the GML file directory or to disable the GML validat
156. ator projection A5 12 Appendix 5 Glossary T U UTM Grid A grid system based upon the Transverse Mercator projection The UTM grid extends North South from 80 N to 80 S latitude and starting at the 180 Meridian is divided eastwards into 60 6 degree zones with a half degree overlap with zone one beginning at 180 degrees longitude The UTM grid is often used for topographic maps and for georeferencing satellite images V Vector linework artwork One method of data type used to store spatial data Vector data is comprised of lines defined by beginning and end points which meet at nodes The locations of these nodes and the topological structure are usually stored explicitly Features are defined by their boundaries only and curved lines are represented as a series of connecting arcs Vector storage involves the storage of explicit topology which raises overheads however it only stores those points which define a feature and all space outside these features is non existent Vector data An abstraction of the real world where positional data is represented in the form of coordinates In vector data the basic units of spatial information are points lines and polygons Each of these units is composed simply as a series of one or more coordinate points A line is a collection of related points and a polygon is a collection of related lines Vertex One of a set of ordered X Y coordinates that constitute a line A points representing s
157. attributes for creating legend rules or expressions 104 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheets Panel Loading Symbols and Styles The symbology used by MAP Stylesheets is directly related to the symbols and styles which exist in native Adobe Illustrator panels In order to correctly function the MAP Stylesheet requires that symbology or styles appropriate to the feature type is established in the following Adobe Illustrator panels J Area Stylesheets Graphic Styles panel Window gt Graphic Styles Line Stylesheets Graphic Styles panel Window gt Graphic Styles Point Stylesheets Symbols panel Window gt Symbols Text Stylesheets Character Styles panel Window gt Type gt Character Styles Symbology can be quickly added to these panels by dragging and dropping artwork from the artboard or by dragging and dropping symbology from custom libraries As an example under Window gt Graphic Style Libraries gt Other Library navigate to the Helpful Styles amp Symbols Files folder see Appendix 4 on your MAPublisher CD and load either MAP_AreaStyles ai or MAP_LineStyles ai Then shift select these styles and drag them into the Graphic Styles panel for use in Area and Line Stylesheets Similarly you can navigate to Window gt Symbol Libraries gt Other Library and load MAP_PointSymbols ai Then shift select these symbols and drag them into the Symbols panel for use in Point Stylesheets NOTE An Adobe Illustrato
158. automatically A5 10 Appendix 5 Glossary R S Schema In MAPublisher 7 the term schema is used to define the structure and makeup of the map attributes table SDTS Spatial Data Transfer Standard a standardized format used by the USGS for transferring Earth referenced spatial data between dissimilar computer systems that includes support for the inclusion of spatial data attribute georeferencing data quality report data dictionary and other supporting meta data within a single file transfer format SEA Self Extracting Archive a file compression format for reducing the size of large files for archival or transfers Shapefile The shapefile format is a public format that is the native file format for ESRI ArcView product This format can be used to export data with attributes from both Arcinfo and ArcView From Arclnfo the command at the ARC level to create a shape file is arcshape Sliver A gap formed when two lines which should be contiguous are slightly separated in a graphical representation or map Spaghetti data Vector data composed of line segments which are not topologically structured or organized into objects and which may not even be geometrically clean Spaghetti data can be useful however if all that is required is a visual image or plot of a map and no spatial analysis is to be performed Spatial Of space a two or three dimensional position in space Spatial data Any information about the location and shape
159. aved You can open this file in a text editor or place it back into document using the Adobe Illustrator Place function Using Adobe Illustrator CS4 on Mac OS X it is recommended to copy the index contents into a text box instead of using the Place function 138 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Make Index TREDYFFRIN EAST ne tee E Lee 252 WHITELAND RE Z EX WILLISTOWN a amp 4 S P 8 OS KS iN 2 PENNSBURY Scale Bars and North Arrows MAPublisher contains tools for plotting accurate scale bars and north arrows onto your map The Scale Bar filter offers a number of different designs that you can choose from including double bar designs for the placement of scale bars in multiple units North Arrows are created from selected artwork on the page using the Create North Arrow filter and will be immediately aligned to true north Topics covered in this section Scale Bar Create North Arrow Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows 139 Scale Bar Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend gt Scale Bar or MAP Toolbar Hiii Object gt Edit Scale Bar Scale Bar Preview Panel Displays a review of the generated P g Select Style Use the Previous scale bar Scale 1 12000 d Next b l 0 750 1500 2250 3000 3750 US survey feet on A a Bronson map units to be used in the F n Tip Edit an existing i lected scale b 200 400 600 800 Yards scale bar by selecting it select
160. ayers panel and then selecting small panel rows in the panel option dialog box A1 26 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Memory Considerations Online Links For Geographic Information System GIS users the appeal of graphics is strong and the increasing ability to discover and share GIS across the Internet is fascinating The Internet offers a large number of free access GIS related web sites from which you can access map and information data sets For the general public there s general information about countries states and places simple maps of areas e g GIF PS format lists and maps of Internet resources in an area For cartographers and geography researchers there are cartographic GIS base map files e g USGS Demos DLGs TIGER thematic data of a geographic nature e g census data and complete GIS data sets e g ESRI Interchange Files As of the writing of this manual all the following links were active and functional FREE MAP DATA The following are just some of the many sites on the Internet that offer free download of GIS data Data is available from these and other Internet sites in a wide variety of formats Please consult the sections in this manual on file formats chapter 2 and MAPublisher Import Format section to ensure that you obtain usable data AUSLING data Australian national mapping agency offering digital map data satellite imagery and elevation data Data obtained here can be used for
161. be the y coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document There will never be two pieces of artwork with the same ID value at the same time This property cannot be set describes the font size used by the text describes the font family used by the text describes the name of the text field Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel describes the contents of the text Editing this property will edit text on the page describes the number of characters in the contents of the text art This property cannot be set describes the rotation in degrees of the art around its anchor point Editing this value will rotate art describes the Character Style in use Editing this property will apply the selected style to the art describes the x coordinate in the world units of the current point text For text on a path or text in a path this will be the x coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path describes the y coordinate in the world units of the current point For text on a path or text in a path this will be the y coordinate of the first vertex on the associated path Warning ID property is not persistent if you save a document and re open it you will find that the ID has changed The value will usually not change over the life of a document session but there are Adobe Illustrator operations that can cause the value to cha
162. bels can be indexed For example if High Street passes through grid cells A 3 B 3 and C 4 the grid cells will be sorted alphabetically on one line High Street A 3 B 3 C 4 e Select the Make index based on label and matching feature position button to generate an index using this method e Choose the Label layer from the drop down list which contains the text you wish to index e Choose the layer that was used to generate the labels from the Feature layer drop down list e n the Label text matches attribute list select the attribute column in the selected Feature layer which matches the labels you are indexing Formatting Options If you wish to set additional options to control the formatting of your index file click the Advanced button Choose an option to Sort index by This will be the ordering of your index entries The default is the Feature label itself meaning for example countries starting with A will be listed first Alternatively you can choose to index by Grid cell meaning labels inside the cell marked A 1 will be listed first Make Index also provides an option to specify an Entry Delimiter being the form of the separator between grid cell and text label for each index entry You can choose from Tab Comma or specify a Custom delimiter Saving the Index File When you have set all of your index options click the Save As button This will allow you specify a name for the text file and the location where it will be s
163. by removing detail M Mac OS Apple Macintosh operating system Map A graphic representation of features of the Earth s surface or other geographically distributed phenomena Map anchor The minimum X and Y coordinates of the data files Map coordinates The X Y representations of ellipsoidal Earth locations on a mapping plane Map extent The geographic extent of a geographic data set specified by the minimum bounding rectangle MAP Layer A MAPublisher term for an Adobe Illustrator layer containing georeferencing information Map projection A map projection is a systematic representation of a round body such as the Earth on a flat plane surface Each map projection has specific properties that make it useful for specific purposes Also see Projection Appendix 5 Glossary AD L M MAP Selection Filter Expression criteria used for making a selection in MAPublisher documents MAP Stylesheet A MAPublisher Stylesheet containing styles based on attribute information MAP View A MAPublisher term for a distinct configuration for the geospatial parameters coordinate system anchor map scale and rotation that are applied to a common grouping of data layers A MAP Layer must reside within a MAP View Marquee A dashed rectangle drawn with a selection tool used to select multiple objects Meridian A line of longitude running vertically from the north pole to the south pole Metadata Data about data typically including in
164. cal Reference Guide Technical Support Options MAPUBLISHER MAINTENANCE PROGRAM MMP The MAPublisher Maintenance Program is a subscription based service plan that guarantees its members e unlimited priority technical support guaranteed same business day 9 4 EST or next business day response e unlimited telephone support 1 416 487 6442 e free MAPublisher updates e free MAPublisher version upgrades e additional discounts and offers available to MMP members only Your MAPublisher purchase includes a one year membership in the MAPublisher Maintenance Program so you are well on the way to worry free use of MAPublisher for the first year and will be able to enjoy all the benefits of the MMP immediately All MAPublisher Maintenance Program subscriptions begin on the date of purchase and run for one calendar year Your email address has been automatically entered in the mp maintenance I online email list for MMP subscribers so that you are assured of receiving all the latest MMP news and access to all the update and upgrade files If you purchased your MAPublisher license from a reseller or are the end user but not the person who purchased the software please contact us at sales avenza com to ensure that we receive your email address and add you to the MMP notification group Renewal Approximately 6 8 weeks prior to the expiration of your annual MMP subscription you will be notified regarding renewal options You will be contacted a minimum
165. ched objects FUNCTIONALITY The final settings for the export to Flash are entered through the Web Export Dialog started from the MAPublisher MAP Web Author panel While settings concerning the map contents and Web tags are done through the classic MAPublisher tools and the Web Tag Dialog the settings in Web Export concerns the parameters specific to the Flash format navigation buttons search box layer controls callout bubble aspect id E e Search box Type in text It will search Canada J J through the contents of all the exported callout bubble Navigation buttons Pan up down left right Zoom in and out 9 984 670 km NAME New Brunswick Population 723900 CapitalCity Fredericton fo Lines By default objects clicked Layer control Check boxes to e Layers toggle on off layer display me arene on are highlighted in blue objects Layer list and position is set in 2 Major cities hovered on are in green and objects WEnExtpont Dialog eens found by the search are in yellow Colors are editable PREREQUISITE Web tags must be first setup with the Web Tag Dialog USING EXPORT TO WEB The Web Export Dialog is started from the MAP Web Author panel by clicking the Export to Web button a l In the Export Location field enter the directory and file name of the exported HTML index file by default index html Layer Control Settings Users may choose to insert a
166. cking again the Find Next button Find amp Replace To replace records selected through the Find operation click the Replace tab Find amp Replace criteria can be typed directly into the Find what and Replace with entry fields previous criteria can be selected from the lists A find and replace may be performed on all attributes by default or only on specific columns contained within the MAP Attributes panel by enabling the Just option and choosing a column from the list Criteria may be further refined by enabling the Case sensitive and Match whole word only options There are two methods to replace values The first method requires to approve each replacement manually by clicking the Replace button so that each instance of the attribute located via the search parameters is successively replaced in the map attribute table The second method allows for the replacement of all found records simultaneously accomplished by clicking the Replace All button Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 79 Find amp Replace Attributes Apply Expression MAP Attributes panel gt Apply Expression Apply Expression Apply to Select the attribute column on which to apply the expression Attribute and MAPublisher Apply to Density Property columns can be assigned expressions Expression Enter the expression W W The expression is valid directly into the entry field or click the Browse button to access the Edit Expression function Expression POPU
167. cles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No 3D Support Yes Polygon Yes Schema Required N A Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute s57_type Line Yes Text No NOTE Most ENC producers private and public publish their 000 files in encrypted formats Only non encrypted files can be imported in MAPublisher from NOAA or USACE for example GEOGRAPHIC MARKUP LANGUAGE SIMPLE FEATURES GML GML was designed as a geographic interface language for the Geo Web It is currently in draft as an ISO standard ISO 19136 The goal of the format is to provide users with a set of abstract base objects that can be built into working real world datasets It uses as XML base to store geometry and feature information that can easily be transported across the Internet The GML simple feature profile was created by the Open Geospatial Consortium as a restricted subset of the GML specification It provides a reduced geometry and metadata profile that can be shared across many GIS tasks This simple feature model can be used as a base to generate local application profiles for a specific work area Since the GML models base abstract classes these application profiles schemas are required for accessing and processing any GML datasets Generally GML data has a GML extension and requires any application specific schema files xsd
168. components of the data s map attribute structure including creating editing and deleting columns setting visibility preferences and assigning expressions Any changes made to the schema will instantly be reflected in the MAP Attributes panel USING EDIT SCHEMA Select an object of the MAP Layer containing the attributes to be edited It gets selected in the MAP Attributes panel Access the tool by clicking the Edit Schema button or menu item in the MAP Attributes panel options menu Edit Schema lists all of the columns which currently exist in the MAP Layer attribute structure including MAPublisher Property attributes see previous section By default imported or created attributes will be visible whereas property columns will not be shown by default Please note some Property column structures cannot be edited read only Editing Column Format To rename a column enter the new text directly into the Name field Specify a data type by making the appropriate selection in the Type list Please note the following e String columns can contain attributes that are both alpha and numeric e Integer columns contain only whole numbers e Real columns contain numbers carrying decimal values e Boolean columns contain True or False values To modify the amount of characters or decimals enter a value into the Size Decimal text box A Default Value can be assigned for all new objects placed on the selected layer by entering text accordingly Chec
169. condition IF statement In the following example a point layer represents cities Each point has the value Y N or C in the CAPITAL attribute column describing whether the city is a state capital Y is not a state capital N or is a country capital C A1 36 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide General Tips and Hints There are three point symbols to assign to the type of point In this example the following expression can be assigned to the Style column of the point layer IF CAPITAL Y MAP Symbol 017 IF CAPITAL C MAP Symbol 02 MAP Symbol 03 Therefore If the capital is Y assign the symbol MAP Symbol 01 If the capital is C assign the symbol MAP Symbol 02 All other symbols assign MAP Symbol 03 NOTES FOR EXPORTING IMAGES If the document colour mode is CMYK exporting an embedded image may result in increased file size compared to RGB mode If the image is LINKED consider the following 1 The image will be exported in the original colour mode of the image irrespective of the current colour mode of the document i e a linked grayscale image in a CMYK document will be exported as a grayscale image whereas a linked RGB image in an CMYK document will be exported as a RGB image 2 A linked image with Alpha channels may be exported in a different colour model For example a grayscale with two alphas will export as an RGB or an RGB with an alpha chan
170. corner of the Flash map and the top right corner of the search box along the Y axis SearchLineAlpha Transparency level of the lines depicting the objects which meet the search criteria SearchLineColor Color of the lines depicting the objects which meet the search criteria SearchLineThickness Thickness of the lines depicting the objects which meet the criteria entered in the search box SeachBoxOffsetY Search iy SeachBoxOffsetX Seach Line 162 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Export Advanced Settings MAP Web Author Workflow MAPublisher 8 is installed with tutorial materials It is recommended that users go through the exercises described in them in order to get more familiarity with the tools The tutorial materials have an exercise dedicated to the new MAP Web Author panel Users can also refer to this chapter that presents a general workflow to be used for guidance 1 MAP COMPILATION WITH ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR MAPUBLISHER 8 Users must create their map document using the traditional MAPublisher 8 and Adobe Illustrator tools If the only purpose of the map is to create a Flash map consider at this stage the document size parameter as this determines the size of map extents in the Web browser 2 PREPARING FOR MAP WEB AUTHOR a Creating a working directory Create a folder in your computer This folder is to store all the components for the Web Flash map and the exported Flash files b Preparing images for
171. crowded but still containing the information they wish to display NOTE Objects associated with a callout are also called Web Art Only Web Art will be searchable in the resulting Flash map see Export to Web Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 149 Web Tag Dialog PREREQUISITES In the Web Tag Dialog text and image parameters are edited using HTML Tags HTML Tags are key codes written between less than lt and greater than gt signs that indicate how the Web browser should display the text There are opening and closing version for most but not all of the tags and the affected text is contained between two tags Both the opening and closing tags use the same key code but the closing tag is preceded by an initial extra forward slash sign Examples of text formatting Opening Tag Closing Tag Result lt i gt Maps of the world lt i gt Maps of the World Some HTML tags are used to insert links and images Examples e lt a href http ww avenza com gt Avenza web Page lt a gt Creates a link to www avenza com accessed when clicking Avenza Web Page text e lt img src Sourcemedia picture jpg hspace 0 vspace 0 align left gt Inserts an image picture jpg located in the Source Media Folder Besides HTML ignores extra spaces and returns therefore commands must be used to create line breaks For example the key code lt br gt is used for line break lt p gt to start a new paragraph In addit
172. ctronic version Unstuff the mp81mi e dmg file if this operation has not been completed automatically Then proceed to the MAPublisher 8 1 folder and double click the Install MAPublisher 8 1 icon 3 Proceed through the installation screens as instructed Note that documentation and tutorial data will also be installed After installation these files can be found in the Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Tutorials An Alias to this folder will be created at the end of the installation process which will be placed on the desktop 4 Launch Adobe Illustrator Please proceed to the section on Registration and Licensing on the following page Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 Installation Instructions MAPublisher Compatibility Notes MAPublisher 8 is compatible with Adobe Illustrator CS3 and CS4 Please read the following important compatibility information for use when opening legacy MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator documents BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY MAPublisher 8 documents are not backwards compatible with previous versions of MAPublisher MAPUBLISHER 5 OR EARLIER DOCUMENTS Point Data MAPublisher introduced new standards on dealing with point data in MAPublisher 6 Pre MAPublisher 6 documents will have font based points converted to symbols on opening of the document MAPUBLISHER 6 OR EARLIER DOCUMENTS Grids and Graticules Grids and Graticules were redesigned in MAPublisher 7 Please note that grids created in previo
173. cy The Expression field describes the criteria for the selection of feature art Build a valid expression in the Expression field The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes Alternatively click the Browse button to enter and edit expressions via the Edit Expression tool see chapter 5 The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be entered for use as selection filters NAME Ontario Result All items with the value Ontario in the NAME column are selected POPULATION lt 1000000 Result All items with values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected NAME Ontario OR NAME Alberta Result Items with the value Ontario OR Alberta in the NAME column are selected NAME Ontario AND POPULATION lt 1000000 Result Only items containing the value Ontario in the NAME column AND values less than one million in the POPULATION column are selected Click OK to create the filter adding it to the list of filters in the panel EDITING AND DELETING SELECTION FILTERS The name and entered expression can be edited To edit a MAP Selection Filter double click the appropriate selection filter in the panel or click the selection filter in the panel and click the Edit Selection Filter in the panel options menu This will open the Edit Selection Filter dialog box D
174. d If no rules are enabled MAP LabelPro will not perform any labelling 182 Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro MAP LabelPro Rules AREA RULES The Area Rules dialog box contains the label configuration options for labelling Area layers Rules can be set by selecting an area feature type layer and clicking the Rules edit button in the Rules column The placement settings in the screenshot below represent the default configuration however these settings may be changed to match any labelling requirements Click the Save As button to save the label configuration The rule will be saved with a user assigned name Click OK to apply the current settings Allow horizontal inside Labels are allowed to be placed horizontally inside the polygon Allow dominant angle Labels are allowed to be placed parallel to the dominant angle of the polygon Allow extending beyond boundary Labels are allowed to exceed the boundaries of the polygon being labelled Allow outside Labels are allowed to be placed outside the polygon being labelled Allow inside along boundary Labels are allowed to be placed inside the polygon following the polygon boundary NOTE For Area type data labels are placed relative to an object s centroid Allow use of leader lines Incorporates the use of leader lines Options include the number of lines the leader line are allowed to cross the width of the leader line being used
175. d and the axes used for aloha and numeric labels can be flipped The ability to choose between labels starting from zero and actual projected coordinates is also when labelling the end of line When using graticules on projected world maps axis and line labels may not display properly due to the extreme curvature of the graticules at the edges In this case it is recommended to use the don t label options The labelling graphic shows the status of axis cell and line labels solid labels mean that label is enabled grey labels mean that label is OFF Click any cell label to switch all cell labels on or off Click a line label to switch that line label only on or off Click an axis label to switch the labels on that axis only on or off Click a horizontal arrow to flip the direction of labels on the top and bottom axes Click a vertical arrow to flip the direction of labels on the left and right axes Click a corner graphic to swap which axes are labelled numerically and which are labelled alphabetically For indexing choose a character style to use for the cell labels by selecting an entry for Center Style choose a 134 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules character style to use for the labels on each axis by selecting an entry for Axes Style For axes labels specify a distance away from the edge of the grid that the labels will be placed Choose a character style to use for the line labels by selecting an entry for End of Line
176. d by clicking the column separator and manually dragging it to resize as desired Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 71 MAP Attributes Panel The type of attribute is indicated by an icon preceding the column name Bi Boolean columns contain True or False values Integer columns contain only whole numbers limited to 10 digits F Real columns contain numbers carrying decimal values 2 String columns can contain attributes that are both alpha and numeric Editing Attributes MAPublisher MAP Attributes panel is a fully editable spreadsheet environment All attribute values may be edited except for certain MAPublisher Property attributes see earlier in this chapter To change the value of a cell double click within the cell and enter the new value such as you would in a spreadsheet program Keep in mind that entered values must correspond with a column s type i e only enter numbers into a column of type Real or Integer The edits will immediately be reflected in the map documents database records Existing attribute records may also be edited or modified by performing a find and replace operation on them Column Visibility Click the Show Hide Columns button or Right click Windows or Ctrl click Mac on a column in the dialog box to edit the column visibility either toggling visibility for individual columns or for all columns It is also possible to edit the visibility of attribute columns with the Edit Schema tool Zoom To a
177. d click the layers in the MAP Views panel and click the option for Merge Layers The layers will then be merged to provide a single layer holding the data and its associated attributes Creating New Layers to Hold Additional Features In order to plot points generate text use legends or plot grids scale bars and north arrows you will first be required to create extra Adobe Illustrator layers to hold this information This is due to the fact that layers cannot contain more than one feature type Therefore prior to generating these additional map features you need to first create a layer in the Adobe Illustrator layers panel on which these features will be held Subsequently in the MAP Views panel you should move these layers into the MAP View which contains the coordinate system you require to plot the extra features The Feature Type you should specify for these features in the Define Layer dialog box are as follows for Text items Feature Text Label and MAP Tagger chapter 10 require you have a Text layer for output P for Point symbols Point Plot see chapter 6 will not function without a Point layer selected for Legend items Grids and Graticules see chapter 13 Scale Bars and North Arrows see chapter 14 must be placed on Legend layers Zoom to MAP View 3k Zoom to MAP Layer k Use these functions to zoom to the selected MAP View or MAP Layer in the MAP Views panel This is particularly useful for files containing a lar
178. d in callout bubbles Remove Click this button to clear the tags of the selected objects Add Modify Click this button to open the Web Tag Dialog add or modify the tags of a single selected object Add if no tag exists Modify if a Tab already exists MAP Web Author x Specify Source Media Folder l 4 ju Tag Multiple Click this button to open Zoom Click this button to zoom to Web a l era eeneonese ae iat ee existing tag for all the selected objects ge at ee Template Click this button to modify the layer template By default the Web Selection template lists all the attributes from the a layer of the selected object All Web Art Click this button to select All Web Art Web Art On Layer all the artworks that have a tag in the document o Web Artwork 1 of 12 selected Export to Web Click this button to open the Export to Web dialog box Web Art on Layer Click this button to select all the artworks that have a tag in the currently selected layer Previous Next Web Artwork Click the arrows to navigate from one Web tag object to another Specify Source Media Folder Specify Source Media Folder Absolute Path Select this option to set an absolute path best used when working on a single computer Browse Click this button to browse to the directory containing the media files images Source Media Folder m Absolute Path Relative Path
179. d or all ee on Layer L the generated lines points on the selected MAP Layer C Close paths Close paths Check this option to aa Group By Specify the attribute column generate an Area layer If unchecked a Column Name v containing similar values to determine Line layer will be generated each group of points Sort By Sort By Available Columns Select an Available Columns Ei Sort Order attribute column containing m Sort Order Contains a hierarchical list of ascending values to sort by Then click c3 A the columns specified to sort by the Add button to add the column to c5 To remove a column from the Sort the Sort Order ae Order click the Remove button c8 Remove c9 CH C12 Move Up Move Down You can move er columns up and down the c15 m Up Sort Order hierarchy by clicking the appropriate button FUNCTIONALITY The Join Points filter allows a group of point symbols to be joined to form a line based upon sorting criteria which exist in the attribute structure of the point layer For example it may be desirable to join points that were originally generated by a GPS device in order to create line elements connecting these points When the Join Points filter is run a new layer is created containing a line linking each set of common points with the generated layer containing the same common attribute column that was used to group the points together PREREQUISITES Join Points can only function on P P
180. date all categories of spatial data represented on a conventional line map DLG is a published ASCII format developed by the United States Geological Survey USGS Federal Agency and is intended to assist in data exchange with the National Digital Cartographic Data Base NDCDB The DLG reader supports all three distinct types of DLG data e Large scale DLG data 1 24 000 scale e Intermediate scale DLG 1 100 000 scale e Small scale DLG data 1 2 000 000 scale The three scales of DLG data are physically formatted into files in one of these ways standard optional and graphics formats MAPublisher supports both the standard and the optional DLG distribution formats however the graphics format is not supported Most DLG data is distributed in the optional format The DLG file structure was designed to accommodate all categories of spatial data represented on a conventional line map Node line and area data types are present within the DLG format along with linkages and attribute codes Linkages are references to other features within the same DLG data set used in a variety of contexts DLG files do not explicitly store attribute values but use a feature coding approach in which unique feature codes are assigned to the different types of features stored within the data set MAPublisher will look for the extension dlg or opt for the input DLG files Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions dlg opt Aggregate No Automated
181. de USA hg W LayerListFlashControlX X position of the top left corner of the Flash control containing the layer list when Enable Layer Visibility Toggle is enabled with the Built in Flash datagrid option selected LayerListFlashControlY Y position of the top left corner of the Flash control containing the layer list when Enable Layer Visibility Toggle is enabled with the Built in Flash datagrid option selected PanUpX X position of the top left corner of the pan up icon in the Flash map PanUpY Y position of the top left corner of the pan up icon in the Flash map PanDownX X position of the top left corner of the pan down icon in the Flash map PanDownY Y position of the top left corner of the pan down icon in the Flash map Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 159 Web Export Advanced Settings PanLeftX X position of the top left corner of the pan left icon in the Flash map PanLeftY Y position of the top left corner of the pan left icon in the Flash map PanRightX X position of the top left corner of the pan right icon in the Flash map PanRightY Y position of the top left corner of the pan right icon in the Flash map ZoomInX X position of the top left corner of the zoom in icon in the Flash map ZoomInY Y position of the top left corner of the zoom in icon in the Flash map Zoom0utX X position of the top left corner of the zoom out icon in the Flash map ZoomO0utY Y position o
182. ded to the Geodetic Datasource during the map data import process when the file coordinate system is not found in the existing lists of coordinate systems it is automatically created with the proper required parameters Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems A2 15 The Geodetic Datasource Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Legend Functionality in MAP Stylesheets A number of functions have been redesigned in MAPublisher 8 Users of MAPublisher 6 or earlier should consult the following pages for information on how to perform common legacy MAPublisher tasks in MAPublisher 8 BUILDING COLOUR RAMPS TO CREATE STYLES You can enhance the look of your maps by using colour ramps rather than random colours for your area and line styles A possible use for this would be in the creation of relief maps Determine the number of new graduated styles you wish to create Create two rectangles with the Rectangle Tool aligned vertically one at the top of the page the other at the base Colour the first top and last bottom elements with two end colours for the ramp Choose Object gt Blend gt Blend Options Choose Specified Steps from the list Enter the value you determined in the first step minus two Click OK Select the two rectangles Choose Object gt Blend gt Make The legend elements will be blended between the two end colours 7 Choose Object gt Expand then choose Object gt Ungroup This ungroups the art so that
183. derstanding of HTML syntax to use this feature MAPublisher 8 introduces the MAP Web Author tool that exports Adobe Illustrator documents with GIS data to interactive Flash maps fully completed with callout bubbles rollovers layer control pan and zoom controls and with all the underlying GIS attributes intact As with the other MAPublisher functions MAP Web Author is a completely built in to Adobe Illustrator Therefore users are not required to have Adobe Flash installed to benefit from this tool An interactive Web map is exported without any additional coding or software requirements immediately after the map document is created with MAPublisher All the GIS attribute information can be embedded in callout bubbles The resulting Flash map offers controls for the layers visibility Additionally specific feature point line and area can be identified from the attribute information when users type a keyword in a search box Users with advanced knowledge in HTML syntax will be able to embed the created Flash map objects to any Web page Topics covered in this section are MAP Web Author Panel Web Tag Dialog Export to Web Web Export Advanced Settings MAP Web Author Workflow Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 145 MAP Web Author Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Web Author or MAP Toolbar MAP Web Author Panel Specify Source Media Folder Specify the directory path to the media files that might get inserte
184. dex a Do not use characters Enter alpha Start numeric index at characters to omit from cell Do not use characters references Reference label order Choose to make Reference label order Center Labels alpha numeric or numeric alpha Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 135 Grids and Graticules GENERATING AND EDITING THE GRID When all the options have been set click OK to create the grid The grid will be plotted on the legend layer using the entered parameters Use the bounding box of the generated grid View gt Show Bounding Box to resize if required Resizing grids horizontally or vertically will add or remove component cells in the grid After transforming a MAP View containing a grid the grid will be transformed and rescaled within its current bounds the physical extents of the grid on the page is not edited In this scenario you should use the bounding box to resize the grid to the new bounds If you wish to change any parameter without generating a new grid simply select the grid and access the Object gt Edit Grid Edit Graticules menu item This will re open the Grids and Graticules function and the current parameters of the grid will be available for editing You can even choose an alternate grid type if required IMPORTANT NOTES Manually editing type position font colour etc is not possible on Grids and Graticules in their default grouped state Manual editing is possible however if you first expand the obj
185. dinate system of the host MAP View The Register Image filter can be used to accurately position and scale imagery with vector data Alternatively the imagery can be manually moved scaled or rotated to align with artwork in a designated MAP View If the host MAP View contains accurate georeferencing information Export Image can be used to save raster data to a fully georeferenced image format It is also possible to convert the vector artwork to a georeferenced raster image MAPublisher will export the selected image as a TIF with a choice of the five reference file formats see the previous page USING EXPORT IMAGE With the image selected go to Filter gt MAP Images gt Export Image or click MAPublisher Toolbar button 4 The Store Geography as drop down list will show the five available reference file formats A regular TIF file will be generated with a reference file carrying the extension TFW IRP TAB or LGO if one of these formats is selected If Geol IFF is selected from this drop down list only a TIF file will be produced as this will carry both the image and the georeferencing information RESULTS When all of the export options have been set click the Save As button Specify a name for the TIF file and the location where it will be saved If the format is a TIF and reference file combination the reference file will carry the same file name and will be saved to the same location as the TIF This image file can be subsequent
186. e Subsequently the MAP View s can still be transformed rescaled etc See examples on the next page NOTE The purpose of the MAP Vector Crop is to cut vector data types points lines and polygons Some Adobe Illustrator specific objects might not be cropped properly using this tool for example e Blend and Live Paint objects e Any art using effects that have been rasterized e Custom art such as scale bars grids graticules north arrows expand custom art to crop Images cannot be cropped with this tool Legacy Text Chapter 7 Drawing Tools 93 MAP Vector Crop Tool Due to an Adobe Illustrator limitation text on a path may flip after a crop operation This is corrected by checking the Flip option from Type on the Path Options dialog box choose Type gt Type on a Path gt Type on a Path Options Examples Crop vector data Original map Create Inset w Paris Saal git Bordeaux Crop result lines and area are clipped text with 1st letter within the cropping rectangle and symbol with center point in rectangle are maintained The MAP view can be re scaled to fit better to the document size e Open a map and make a copy choose File gt Save a Copy Leave the original map open make the copy the active document e Use MAP Vector Crop to crop the area of special interest e Make the original map active In the MAP Views panel select the option menu Import MAP View from document Select the MAP View
187. e grid to place the labels Append units to labels Choose to include labels i e degree symbols for Line Labels Meter vje Units Set the units for Measured Grid dimensions if appropriate Flip Label Axes Click to flip which axis will be labelled alpha and which numerically t If the Center Axes and Line style lists do not contain a recently created character style simply return to the Character Style panel double click this style and click OK in the Character Style Options dialog box This forces Adobe Illustrator to re load the list of character styles Index Grid Settings Grid Dimensions Number of Columns and Rows Select e By Number of Columns Rows this option to create a grid with it Labels Values Select the type of labels to display distances measured from the lower left corner of the grid or actual projected coordinates Eastings Northings By Cell Size in Page Unitse I Size in Page Unit Select this option to specify the cell size Columns 10 Width 72 pt f f dimensions specify the number of in page unit as specified in the columns and rows Rows 10 Height 72 pt Adobe Illustrator Document Setup Display Options Style Select a style for the grid Style MAP Grid Style mi Graticule Settings Latitude Pass through latitude Specify a line of f latitude that must be included this can gt DERS Interval
188. e MAP Views panel and editor MAPublisher Preferences 5 General MAP Attributes m n Panel Property sheet with options specific to cancel _ QY MAP LabelPro the selected category on the list on the left side J SP MAP Selection Filters Panel amp MAP Stylesheets EE Editor Panel MAP Views EE Editor Panel MAPublisher Preferences are saved within the Adobe Illustrator preference file called AlPrefs Windows or Adobe Illustrator Prefs Mac OS which is launched each time Adobe Illustrator is started Therefore MAPublisher Preferences are not file dependent NOTE The Adobe Illustrator preference file is located in following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings user profile Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSX Settings AlPrefs Windows Vista C Users user AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSX Settings AlPrefs Mac OS X Users username Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CSX Settings Adobe Illustrator Prefs OPEN MAPUBLISHER PREFERENCES MAPublisher Preferences can be opened from the Adobe Illustrator main menu Edit gt MAPublisher Preferences Windows or Illustrator gt MAPublisher Preferences Mac OS X and from the panel options menu of the following MAPublisher panels MAP Attributes MAP Selection Filters MAP Stylesheets and MAP Views When opened through the Adobe Illustrator menu MAPublisher Preferences opens up with no category selected
189. e a new layer and then drag this to the MAP View which holds line work you wish to buffer remembering to set the feature type to Area To use this tool select the line s you wish to buffer and then go to Filter gt MAP Lines gt Buffer Lines or use the MAPublisher toolbar button A i USING BUFFER LINES You can choose to buffer lines by entering a value or by selecting an attribute column that contains buffer values The buffering value specified designates the total width of the new area object For example a value of 10 map units would create a buffer of 5 map units on either side of the selected line This works on individual lines or a selected set of lines The buffer width will be calculated and created using the units of measurement set in the dialog box 1 Set the unit to use for the buffer value from the Units drop down list 2 Then choose which option to use for the buffer values When the Buffer Lines filter is run with the Attribute Value option checked an area width is calculated based on the value s related to the selected object s in the attribute table The area will then be constructed based on the line s attribute value When the filter is run based on a Static Value an area object is created by the specified value 3 Choose the Area layer to place the buffer s then click OK to generate the areas In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Buffer Lines is found in the Filter gt MAP Lines menu 96 Chapter 8 Line Functio
190. e by 10 increments Plot Click to plot the symbol after Display Options coordinates have been entered ai Style Choose a symbol to use Click Scale toe 100 at the symbol name to open the list of p symbols to choose from 1ER New Symbol 16 Input Coordinate System Specify the Input Coordinate System Select a style reference coordinate system in which the point coordinates are entered Use Use Current Layers coordinate system maPubiisher Default Symbol the current layer s coordinate system Blue Bird or specify a different one by default Use Woz 3 Blue Flower WGS84 latitude longitude format _ _ _ _ _ _ _ lt Cloud Click the Select button to open the Select Grass Coordinate System dialog box and choose Red Flower any coordinate system Rosette j New Symbol 16 NOTE Points can only be plotted on point layers The plot button will be disabled if another map layer type is the active layer PREREQUISITES In order to plot points using the Point Plotter you must first have a fully georeferenced MAP View in your document as this function will use the coordinate system of that MAP View in order to generate points Furthermore you must create a new Adobe Illustrator layer in which your points will be placed as the software will not support multiple feature types on the same layer Remember once you have created a Point layer you must drag it into t
191. e categories Information on a selected item is displayed in the Description panel Double click to insert an object at the current cursor position Available objects are as follows lt MAP Layer gt List of property columns see page 37 List of attribute columns Constants true false Boolean true value Boolean false value Layer may vary depending on tool For Edit Schema Apply Expression and New Edit Se lection Filter the current layer is displayed In the MAP Stylesheet Editor all layers hosted by the stylesheet are displayed Unique values contained in each attri bute column can be viewed in the Descrip tion panel Descriptions and examples have been provided for each function and parameter in the Description panel Confirmation Functions ABS ACOS ASIN ATAN CONTAINS COS DEGREES ENDSWITH IF LIKE LOWER NUMBER POW PROPER RADIANS REGEX ROUND SIN SQRT STARTSWITH TAN UPPER Absolute value of anumber Inverse of the cosine of an angle Arcsine of an angle Arctangent of an angle True if source string contains search string Cosine of an angle Converts values from radians to degrees Returns true is the source string ends with the suffix string Based on a conditional statement Searches the source string using wildcards Strings converted to lower case String values as numbers Base to the power of an exponent Strings converted to capital case Converts values from degrees to
192. e data Entering negative values will move the data to the left or down entering positive values will move the data to the right or up There are also two graphical ways to edit page anchors Firstly the data can be assigned to respective positions in the document by clicking a respective Alignment Control button of which there are nine positional options Conversely dragging the green data preview rectangle around the page in the Preview Pane will update the Page Anchor values accordingly Note that editing Page Anchors will not affect data integrity It simply means that the lower left corner of the data in coordinate units Map Anchors is located at this new document position Scale The scale of the current MAP View is shown in the Scale text box For MAP Views in projected coordinate system the scale value is a real world scale exact ratio linear distance on the page over distance on the ground For MAP Views in geodetic coordinate system i e Lat Long format in angular unit the scale value is approximated using the common formula 1 111 353m metres per degree at the equator This is not an accurate number because the formula is only valid at the equator but it is more intuitive for cartographic considerations This text box is editable allowing you to quickly specify an alternate scale Furthermore the up and down buttons will allow you to fine tune scales by increasing or decreasing a scale by 10 of the starting value The Auto Scale
193. e file but lose attribute information associated with MAPublisher text elements Legacy Document Format MaRP nisher Adobe Illustrator 10 or earlier Open in Adobe Illustrator CS2 CS3 or CS4 Adobe Illustrator This file contains text that was created in a previous version of Illustrator This legacy text must be updated before you can edit it e Choose Update to update all of the legacy text now Choose OK to update the text later Choose Cance to cancel opening the file Legacy Text Conversion MAPublisher has detected that this document contains legacy Illustrator text art Illustrator will not recognize such text as true text art until that art is converted New Document Format and MAPublisher will not display attributes for legacy text art If you decide not to convert the text at this time and instead opt to convert it M P 8 manually at a later time be aware that Illustrator s legacy text conversion process A ublisher does NOT preserve attributes for converted text art Update Adobe Illustrator CS2 altextart Y CS3 CS4 MAPublisher text art only f Nothing Adobe Illustrator CS2 is deprecated we highly recommend using MAPublisher on Adobe Illustrator CS3 or CS4 only Chapter 1 Getting Started 17 MAPublisher Compatibility Notes MAPublisher License Management MAPublisher will fail to function until activated The following instructions are for the activation o
194. e spreadsheet application will format the text automatically The screenshot below illustrates an example of such a table in Microsoft Excel prior to exporting as a csv or txt for import into Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher X Microsoft Excel Book1 IE File Edit Wiew Insert Format Tools Data Window Help l i 18 x DSa BBS BEANA Arial 310 B Z Ull S O A Al X Coords EERE S X Coords iY Coords Name Population il si 79 5 43 5 Toronto 3 000 000 74 40 75 New York 10 000 000 73 5 45 5 Montreal 1 500 000 80 24 5 Miami 3 000 000 M4 iN Sheets Shest2 Z Sheets lt wif Ready INUM p e The MAP Location Tool can be used to generate the X and Y coordinate values suitable for building ASCII Point Files See chapter 4 for more information A1 32 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide General Tips and Hints JOINING SDTS TABLES The following information should be used in conjunction with the MAPublisher Join a Table function When working with United States Geological Survey SDTS files it is necessary to join tables frequently in order to obtain the map attribute table you require to make the map you want This is due to the fact that SDTS data is constructed such that the primary vector data is held separately from the various attribute tables that one might want to use for a particular mapping purpose The attribute table that comes as part of the vector file usually contai
195. e usually is called the same name as the image but may have a different extension irp tfw tab or lgo In the case of the GeoTIFF format the image file itself contains both the image and reference data however the same GeoTIFF file tif needs to be loaded to retrieve the georeferencing information The values contained in this reference file are automatically entered into the image parameters If the file is in GeoTIFF format the image coordinate system is read and displayed in the Register Image dialog box Coordinate system field for other file formats the coordinate system is left to unknown Chapter 12 Working With Images 127 Register Image Manual Registration To manually enter image parameters one of the following combinations must be available in page units or map units e The X and Y coordinates of one corner of the image and the X and Y Pixel Size e The X and Y coordinates of one corner of the image and the X and Y size of the image First choose the units to use for entering parameters by making a selection from the Units drop down list Then click the appropriate corner of the graphic to indicate the image placement point and enter the X and Y coordinates for this location in the adjacent fields Next set either the Pixel Size or Effective Map Size The Pixel Size is the value of a single pixel in the units set The Effective Map Size is the X and Y size of the whole image in the units set Setting either option will
196. e within MAPublisher by choosing Load Geodetic Datasource from the MAP Views panel options menu The directory containing the xml file must also contain the file geocalc xsd This file can be found in the directory of the default geodata xml file see above So the custom xml file can either be copied to the Data Source File directory prior to loading or geocalc xsd should be copied from there to the custom xml directory Any additional change will be saved into the loaded xml file Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems A2 3 The Geodetic Datasource MAPublisher New MAP View Look in Data Source Files W O amp f AF Duplicate Map View 1 T cv Edit Map View 1 QshiftFies x Ga gt My Recent Custom_System xml ws Documents LE geodata xml if Source Coordinate System FA Non map layers Specify Anchors Dein Import Coordinate System from File Export Coordinate System to File My Documents Import MAP View from Document Export Map View 1 My Computer Layer Name Search amp Replace File 4 Load Geodetic Data Source X a aay l m 1 MAP View J Edit Geodetic Data Source My Network _ Flesoftype Geodetic Data Source xml w Cca Selecting a geodetic datasource to load NOTE Coordinate systems may also be extracted from the input data formats during import process GEODETIC DATASOURCE EDITOR MAPublisher includes a
197. eat this command until the line has a sufficient number of anchor points that the shape of your curves will not be lost on export Adobe Illustrator stores the origin of text that has been applied along paths differently from other text objects We have found the following steps to be the most successful way to get such Text exported to GIS files 1 Create a new Adobe Illustrator layer Select any text that has been created along paths Drag this text to the new Adobe Illustrator layer Select Type gt Create Outlines The text will be converted to vector objects In the MAP Views panel drag this layer back into your MAP View specifying Area as the feature type You can now export your Text as Area objects Since the text is no longer text you can no longer modify the fonts We recommend that you make a copy of the original text objects before you do this process These hints on how to transfer Adobe Illustrator files are necessary because the graphics environment handles text and curves differently and they need some modification in order for the GIS software to represent these accurately v ewy DOUGLAS PEUCKER LINE SIMPLIFICATION The Douglas Peucker algorithm was primarily designed to reduce the number of points required to represent a vector line A common problem in digital cartography and geographic information systems can occur when lines are generated automatically from a mathematical function which records points at a fixed interval r
198. ect Object gt Expand though this will negate any opportunity to subsequently edit the art via the Grids and Graticules filter Certain projected coordinate systems may cause incomplete grids and or graticules to be drawn Such issues may occur if the MAP View is in a polar coordinate system or the extents of the data cross the 180 degree west east meridian Measure grids cannot be labelled properly using actual coordinates when the data is projected using a stereographic or orthographic coordinate system If the generation of a grid graticule causes blank or incomplete results the following workflow should be used Transform the MAP View to a geodetic coordinate system e g WGS 84 Generate your grid or graticules on this MAP View Expand the object Object gt Expand Create a new area layer in the MAP View Drag the expanded grid to this new layer Transform the MAP View back to the original projection ee eS Please see Appendix A3 for more information on working with grids and graticules in MAPublisher 8 136 Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes Grids and Graticules Make Index Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend gt Make Index or MAP Toolbar A 1 Make index based on label position An index Make index based on label position will be created by assigning one index location for each label found on the Fag a mm Oty_Text selected label text layer Make index based on label and matching feature position Labe
199. ected Number Existing The field on the MAP Selection Stats selected MAP Layer or reverse the current left represents the number of selected objects eae ee selection on the active MAP Layer The field on the right z 3 displays the total number of objects of a given Areas 44 Recall Restores a selection that has been feature on the active MAP Layer saved to memory Save Save the current selection to memory so Clear Removes the saved selection from that it can be recalled later memory MOR Selects both the saved and currently MAND Selects the saved M XOR Selects both the saved and currently selected features features that are also selected features but also removes from currently selected the selection any features that are both saved and selected USING THE MAP SELECTION STATS PANEL To open the MAP Selection Stats panel choose Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Selection Stats or click the MAPublisher toolbar button yj Layer Statistics On initial opening this panel will display the total number of Map features that exist on the current MAP Layer as well as how many are currently selected As only one feature type is supported per MAP Layer this dialog box will only display the current feature type Only MAPublisher objects will be displayed in the MAP Selection Stats panel Objects that are in Non MAP layers in the MAP Views panel will not be recognized in this panel Selecting objects manually or via a MAP
200. ed a Pa eae your Flash document with an internet layers number of vertices browser Permissions must be set to the and size Major dtes SS 0 1KB Export Folder see below Provinces 6833 70 KB background 0 Total SWF File Size Total size of the created swf files The smaller the better lt M IE Name 4 Size Type Total SWF File Size 94 KB O flashviewer File Folder A E ae oe oan index html 2KB Firefox Document i Sllayercheckboxes js OKB JScript Script File Metadata xmi File Size 30 KB map swf SKB SWF Movie This size should be less than 50 KB compressed or 400 KB uncompressed for best performance CD map xml zip 30KB WinZip File Metadata xml File Size Size of To reduce the metadata xml file size F map_Li swf 70KB SWF Movie ara L2 swf 1KB SWF Movi the created metadata xml file e Use Simplify Lines to reduce the number of vertices in your data ysis ae ee ser a 50 KB compressed xml zip Export as few attributes as possible only attributes that appear in Web Emap is ideal Tags are exported F MAPublisherSWF swf 403KB SWF Movie List of created files Export Folder The export creates a set of default files together with the files specific to the map The main files are filename html as specified in the Export Location field by default index htm map xml zip or map xmI when the compress option is not checked e MAPublisherSWF swf e map swf plus map_L1 swf map_L2 swf
201. ed in terms of an external polygon or in terms of a set of grid cells A fundamental unit of geographical information See polygon Aspect Individual azimuthal map projections are divided into three aspects the polar aspect which is tangent at the pole the equatorial aspect which is tangent at the Equator and the oblique aspect which is tangent anywhere else The word aspect has replaced the word case in modern cartographic literature Attribute Non graphic alphanumeric textual information associated with a point line or area element in a GIS data set tabular data associated with geographic features Azimuth The angle measured in degrees between a base line radiating from a center point and another line radiating from the same point Normally the base line points north and degrees are measured clockwise from the base line Appendix 5 Glossary A5D 1 A A B Base data Fundamental cartographic information e g coastlines political boundaries in relation to which additional data of a more specialized nature may be compiled or overlaid Bezier Curve A Bezier curve consists of two anchor points connected by a curved segment with at least one direction point and direction line attached to each anchor point Binary A number system of base 2 Numbers are represented simply as a series of 0 s or 1 s in contrast to base 10 number systems that represent numbers using the characters 0 9 For example the base 10 number 65535 transl
202. edccdteceGescee nse Make Index 0 ccc ccc ccc cece ec ee cece eeeeeeees Scale Bars and North Arrows SCAPI ariceutudosMouccdacsudescsudcctascakeeerencces Create North Arrow ccc ce cee cece eee cence eneees MAP Web Author MAP Web Author Panel cece cece eeeeeees Web Tag Dialog cs ntexednaxeeuneeeauyeesinens eaaeaens 85 ee eee 86 PEPEE EET 89 91 igeageectedeaedbeseis 92 EEE E E EE 93 111 112 113 116 119 120 123 125 126 130 131 132 137 139 140 143 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Appendices EXD OO IG WED oest rE Ner se eps en oe eee eee eee eae eases 154 Web Export Advanced Settings sic0ccs bineevidenesaaddeasdaaeredeaiatoeennys 159 MAP Web Author Workflow isos s40edereneieie dun eeieiinsere neds eeuwwnecion 163 MAP GPS 165 WAP GPS FANGI ch echacsaigoe eases REA REEERE EEEN 166 MAP GPS Panel Menu lt 4 pavccnsnedaa oeuancdeteraae cee irr tE Te ori TIETEN 168 MAP GPS Point Plot Settings ssrerierrrindk tinier OEE RENEE ERRA REREN 169 MAP GPS Autosave Settings essessnsssessosseesscssossossesssseses 171 Edit User Attribute for Current Layer cc cece cece cece ene ee neeeee 172 Record Sentence Log apicicon nceded ceherd ee acemanne sete senewes toaucunetens 173 Playback Sentence LO oikvan cep yaad meadow NONE eae eee Soe eRNedeweeeeer 174 MAP LabelPro 175 WAP EADCIPLO cascsaat itrio rreraino AETR EEA R 176 MAP LabelPro Settings sierpe sirine rinn EEEE
203. efault grouped state Manual editing is possible but objects must be first expanded choose Object gt Expand Note that this will negate any opportunity to subsequently edit the art using MAPublisher editing tools If you require a different design to be used for your Grid or Scale Bar or wish to change any parameter without generating a new version simply select the Grid or Scale Bar and choose Object gt Edit Grid or Scale Bar This will re open the Grids and Graticules or Scale Bar dialog box with the current parameters of the object for subsequent editing Editing the style of text text colour font alignment etc used in the Grid or Scale Bar can be achieved by modifying the properties of the style in the Character Styles panel Use the bounding box of the generated grid or scale bar choose View gt Show Bounding Box to resize Resizing scale bars horizontally will add or remove intervals from the bar s Resizing scale bars vertically will adjust the width of the bar s Resizing grids horizontally or vertically will add or remove component cells in the grid EXPORTING GRIDS To export a grid you must first expand the object choose Object gt Expand then move it to an Area layer Alternatively expand your grid move the legend layer to the Non MAP layers category then move it back into the MAP View specifying the feature type as Area MISSING DATA IN GRIDS ON PROJECTED MAP VIEWS Certain projections may cause incomplete grids
204. efore applying the changes to the vector data see next paragraph This way registering the image again is only a matter of loading a reference file SUPPORTED GEOREFERENCED IMAGE REFERENCE FORMATS World File tfw tifw wld eww jgw jpw pgw sdw eww blw dmw World files contain the affine relationship between source image coordinates pixel locations and real world reference coordinates lat long or other real world coordinate units World files simply contain a computed relationship between source image coordinates and reference coordinates and not the complete reference point information World files do not support storing coordinate system information IRP Image Report File irp IRP Image Report files are ASCII report files indicating the coordinates of the four corners of the raster file and the pixel size in ground units to allow for georeferencing of the image in other image processing CAD or GIS programs 128 Chapter 12 Working With Images Register Image MapInfo TAB File tab MapInfo Table file formats save the complete reference point list information such that it can be loaded again in the future MapInfo TAB files support storing coordinate system information Supported projections when saving the coordinate system are listed below Albers Equal Area Hotine Oblique Mercator Hotine Oblique Mercator 1pt Azimuthal Equidistant Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Polyconic Cylindrical Equal Are
205. egardless if they are all lying along a straight line A reduction of the number of points makes for a cleaner and more readable cartographic line As well in cartographic work within Adobe Illustrator the removal of points along a path can significantly improve the speed of file redraws and reduce the overall file size The Douglas Peucker Algorithm was created in Fortran 66 by David H Douglas and Thomas K Peucker at the University of Ottawa in 1970 71 It was extensively tested in 1972 and was publicly communicated in the following article Algorithms for the Reduction of the Number of Points Required to Represent a Digitized Line or Its Caricature Canadian Cartographer Vol 10 No 2 December 1973 BEZIER CURVES AND OTHER MAPUBLISHER OPERATIONS Bezier curves are defined using four control points Two of these are the end points of the curve while the other two effectively define the gradient at the end points These two points control the shape of the curve The curve is actually a blend of the control points This is a recurring theme of approximation curves defining a curve as a blend of the values of several control points Most GIS formats do not usually support Bezier curves used in graphics packages such as Adobe Illustrator As such you will typically find that curved sections of GIS data will be composed of a series of small line segments rather than an actual curve This is also how such features will first appear in Adobe Illustrator
206. elete a MAP Selection Filter by clicking the Delete Selection Filter button or menu item Chapter 11 Making Selections 121 MAP Selection Filters MAKING SELECTIONS Once MAP Selection Filters have been created they can be applied to a MAP layer Selection filters can only be applied to one layer at a time However more than one filter may be applied simultaneously use Shift or Ctrl Windows or Command Mac to select multiple filters When applying multiple selection filters art only has to satisfy one of the chosen selection filters to qualify i e multiple selection filters are combined using the OR operator NOTE When the expression is marked as valid it is not necessarily valid when applied to a given layer For example the expression Country Ohio is only applicable to a layer with the Country attribute If an expression is not valid for a layer an error is shown when the selection filter is applied There are four methods of applying a selection filter available as buttons and menu items e Apply as New Selection Clears the current selection and selects any art on the current layer that meets the criteria of the chosen selection filter s e Add to Current Selection Adds any art on the current layer that satisfies the chosen selection filter s to the current selection e Remove from Current Selection Deselects any art on the current layer that is selected and satisfies the chosen selection filter s e Get
207. els can then be dragged and positioned at any position along a line If the Line Smoothing option is not selected the labels follow the original path The Label Position option allows for the selection of the vertical position of the labels relative to the line Three op tions are available Baseline Descender and Center e Select Baseline to place labels above the generated text path e Select Descender to place the portion of a letter in a Latin derived alphabet that normally extends below the baseline of a particular font above the generated text path e Select Center to place the centre the label on the generated text path Labels can be modified if they exceed the length of the line in the current default font size First check the Adjust label if larger than line option to activate the label rules Rules are executed by MAPublisher in a hierarchical order and can be reordered by clicking the rule and clicking the Up or Down button Checking the Reduce font size option will allow you to reduce the size of the font to a specified minimum size in points Checking Reduce horizontal scaling allows text to be scaled down horizontally by the percentage specified Feature Text Label also provides an additional option not applicable in MAP Tagger If any of the labels have been adjusted in size due to the activation of a line adjustment rule all labels can be resized to the same size by checking the Set all labels to the same minimum font size
208. enable the composition of range expressions Value List of values in the selected column Expression Validity ndicates if the expression is valid or invalid If invalid additional information is reported t For Text stylesheets if the Style list does not contain a recently created character style simply return to the Character Style panel double click this style and click OK in the Character Style Options dialog box This forces Adobe Illustrator to re load the list of character styles FUNCTIONALITY Accessing the MAP Stylesheet Editor When you have a MAP Stylesheet created which hosts at least one MAP Layer of the same type click the stylesheet name and choose Options gt Edit Alternatively double click the new MAP Stylesheet The Name of the current MAP Stylesheet will be displayed at the top of this dialog box which is editable Also a feature type icon will be displayed To begin click the Add button to create elements in your MAP Stylesheet Assigning a Style Rule Name The Style Rule Name column will contain the name of each style rule This can be edited to describe the style rule and or its intention For example style rules could be named Roads or Cities with populations over 200 000 Selecting Styles and Symbols The Style field will contain a list of styles that currently exist in the Adobe Illustrator Graphic Styles panel for Area and Line stylesheets in the Symbols panel for Point styleshe
209. end Rivers SYSTEM St Lawrence hd a eee nyn Expression Displays the expression Text MAP Stylesheet Legend sry Province PROVINCE Y E aide Legend Symbol Displays the associated symbol for the MAP Stylesheet rule Rule Name Displays the name of the MAP Stylesheet rule To create a legend using MAP Stylesheets a X Legend layer must be created first Create a layer in the Adobe Illustrator layers panel drag the layer to a MAP View and define the layer as a Legend layer Select the MAP Stylesheet that you would like to use to create the legend In the panel options menu select Create MAP Stylesheet legend The legend font is set by the character panel Select the font you would like to use for your legend using the character panel before creating a MAP Stylesheet Legend Legends are fully customizable If you would like to change any aspect of the legend this is can easily be accomplished Select the legend and choose Object gt Ungroup The legend is now considered Adobe Illustrator artwork allowing the individual elements to be edited freely 106 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheets Panel Name Editable name of the MAP Stylesheet Rules List of styling criteria in a hierarchical format Move Up Down To adjust the order in which the rules will be applied to Rule Name Editable name of the style rule Stylet List of established Graphic Styles for area and line stylesheets C
210. eneral issues relating to MAPublisher and cartography These lists are also monitored by Avenza technical support staff who often participate with a solution or useful discussion item e mp mapublisher l This is the main MAPublisher list Subscribe by sending an email to majordomo avenza com with the statement subscribe mapublisher lt emailaddress gt in the body of the message Substitute your actual email address for lt emailaddress gt e map mac This is a very popular mapping list to which many MAPublisher users belong It is not limited to mac related discussions Subscribe by sending an email to majordomo avenza com with the statement subscribe map mac lt emailaddress gt in the body of the message Substitute your actual email address for lt emailaddress gt Contacting Avenza Technical Support Avenza offers a number of methods for direct communication with our qualified and experienced technical experts Please have your MAPublisher registration details handy to get prompt attention and include it in any email correspondence Support issues are handled on a first come first served basis Avenza does not guarantee a response within any specified time MAPublisher Maintenance Program subscribers receive free and unlimited support All others are eligible for support at the rate of US 49 per incident e email support avenza com e online form http www avenza com support form e phone 1 416 487 6442 A1 30 Appendix 1 Techni
211. ensus Bureau http www census gov Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 29 Online Links Technical Support Options MAPublisher support is provided free of charge to customers with a current MAPublisher Maintenance Program MMP subscription All new license and upgrade purchases include a one year MMP subscription Customers without a current MMP subscription may obtain support from a qualified MAPublisher technical specialist at the rate of US 49 per incident TECHNICAL SUPPORT Please consult the FAQs the additional how to s on the following pages as well as the following online options before contacting Avenza technical support as your situation may be easily addressed by one of the answers contained therein MAPublisher User Forum The MAPublisher User Forum is located at http www avenza com forum Answers to common technical questions may be found in the Common Support Issues and FAQs category All users with a MAPublisher license evaluation or permanent can post and read topics under the General Questions for Evaluation and Licensed Users category Additionally users with maintenance have access to the Maintenance Users category There users can find additional information relative to software updates etc Internet Mailing Lists There are two very popular Internet mailing lists that are populated by experienced MAPublisher users worldwide and offer an open forum for discussing problems solutions tips and other g
212. ere the data is to be moved then click the Auto Scale button or one of the Data Extents LL Corner boxes sit Zoom 11 16 Artboards Preview of the artboards present on the canvas Active Artboard White background Other Arborads Grayed out C Show Anchors Active Artboard 5 Previews None x Active Artboard Select the number of the artboard to be set as Active Name usa Data Extents LL Corner Scale Ange 4 17253025 a OOO 29581646 202038 S Ood 0 Yi D 009142 h ooo Auto Scale NOTE Adobe Illustrator CS4 allows users to move artboards However this action does not preserve the georeferencing same effect as moving arts on the active artboard Instead of moving the artboard users must do the following e Create a new artboard at the desired position on the canvas e Open the MAP View Editor and move the data from the initial artboard to the new one see explanation above Delete the initial artboard Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 61 MAP View Editor Import MAP View MAP Views panel gt Import MAP View From Document Import MAP View MAP View to transfer Document list List of LocationMap 1 open documents and the MAP Views MAP View 1 contained in them LocationMap2 Country LatLong County UTM FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher Import MAP View copies a MAP View from one document to another including all the layers that are within that MAP V
213. ers who may not have a cartographic expertise here are a list of simple considerations to take into account before making a choice e Use of a Geodetic Coordinate system angular coordinates Lat Long nT Geodetic J Appropriate for overlay with GPS data recorded in Lat Long format er e WGS84 system is required to export vector data to KML format for display fone in Google Earth Google Maps eo e Use of a Projected coordinate system ex Si e Appropriate for printed map so that users can use a ruler to measure a distances on the map Canada e Required to add a scale bar carton tens Greenlan Use of a particular system within the list of projected and geodetic systems a Maps that are part of a portfolio or Atlas have to comply to the same pier system to be consistent e When a geo referenced image geotiff or world tiff is to be used together mie with the data it is easier to use the same coordinate system for the vector rail data as of the raster Minnesota e Most countries or geographic areas have published standards or usual North Dakota way for representing the land e g for road maps or meteorological maps fe cae een In this case the user should make some test with the systems listed oie ae m in MAPublisher For a convenient use geodetic systems are sorted by continent gt country gt sub division state or county for example Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems A2 1 Overview In doubt it is recomme
214. es a line feature for all valid information received by the GPS Line styling is determined by the Graphic Style selected in the Adobe Illustrator Graphic Styles panel Chapter 16 MAP GPS 167 MAP GPS Panel MAP GPS Panel Menu Accessed from the MAP GPS Panel Many of the MAP GPS features can be accessed via the MAP GPS panel options menu These features include Device Settings Point Plot Settings Autosave Settings Edit User Attribute as well as many different log file features The following sections will outline each of the features and their uses Device Settings Opens the Device Settings dialog box Point Plot Settings Opens the Point Plot Settings dialog box Autosave Settings Opens the Autosave Settings dialog box f Device settings Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Opens the Edit User Attribute for Current Point Plot Settings Layer dialog box Autosave Settings Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Record Sentence Log Opens the Record Sentence Log dialog box Record Sentence Log View Sentence Log Opens the View Sentence Log panel View Sentence Log Playback Sentence Log Playback Sentence Log Opens the Playback Sentence Log panel Start Scanning Start Scanning Begins Scanning the GPS device Manual Plot Plot by Time Manual Plot Plots a single point Plot by Distance Start Route Plot by Time Begins plotting points by a specified time Plot by Distance Begins plo
215. ession Mode is set to Advanced the expression panel will always be the Advanced Expression panel irrespective of the expression being edited If the Expression Mode is set to Simple the expression panel will be the Simple Expression panel unless the expression to be edited is not a simple expression A Simple Expression is one that is either empty or includes only one attribute and no more then two clauses For example Simple Expression AttributeA 1 Simple Expression AttributeB lt 5 AND AttributeB gt 1 Advanced Expression AttributeC gt 1 AND AttributeD gt 10 If the current expression is not a Simple Expression editing it will always result in the Advanced Expression panel Dynamic Style Linkage Once a MAP Stylesheet has been assigned with styles and symbols those styles and symbols are dynamically linked to their attribute values in the MAP Stylesheet if the expression is a simple equality A simple equality expression is when there is only one attribute and only one clause an equality comparison For example AttributeA 1 is a simple equality expression while AttributeA gt 15 is not Applying the style from a style rule with a simple equality expression manually i e changing a style of a polygon directly from the Graphic Styles panel will assign the attribute value of that style rule in the MAP Stylesheet For example in the case above AttributeA on the modified art would be set to 1 Caution should be used with manual
216. ets or in the Character Styles panel for Text stylesheets For each rule choose a style or symbol to use Note you can only use a specified style once in a single stylesheet The Move Up and Move Down buttons will move the priority of the selected style up or down the list Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 107 MAP Stylesheet Editor Assigning an Expression The Expression field describes the criteria for applying the style rule By default the field displays the currently entered expression if any Clicking the Expression field opens either the Simple Expression panel or the Advanced Expression panel depending on the Expression Mode and the current expression Using the Advanced Expression expressions created in the MAP Selection Filters may be re used to create MAP Stylesheets rules See chapter 5 for more information on the Expression Builder and chapter 11 on MAP Selection Filters To choose the mode in which to compose your expression select the Simple or Advanced option Then assign an expression for each rule using the guidelines below Simple Expressions The Simple Expression panel is intended to facilitate quick expression generation First select a column from the drop down list or manually type in a name Choose a Comparison There are six options available Equal to gt Greater than or equal to gt Greater than lt Less than or equal to lt Less than I Not equal to Select the Value against which the comparison
217. export was designed to export MP imported or created data one layer and one feature at a time Why is it important to know this MAPublisher only recognizes objects that have been imported by or created with its filters If a layer was not imported with MAPublisher or is not hosted by a designated MAP View then MAPublisher will not allow you to export the layer If you have an entire layer that was not created by MAPublisher then 1 Ensure that your layer contains only a single feature type Point Area Line or Text 2 Inthe MAP Views panel check that you have a designated MAP View with a matching coordinate system If you do not create a new MAP Views Select the layer in the MAP Views panel 4 Drag the layer to the MAP View containing the matching coordinate system to georeference the layer A1 34 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide General Tips and Hints There are also a couple of additional considerations to be aware of when exporting Since the current exported vector formats are GIS formats that do not support the concept of Bezier curves you need to compensate for this If you have Bezier curves in your Adobe Illustrator file they will not be recognized in the GIS software In order for these features may be represented correctly you will need to add points to these lines in Adobe Illustrator first Simply identify and select any objects that use Bezier curves and then select Object gt Path gt Add Anchor Points Rep
218. f further considerations when using these formats during Import please see appendix A1 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 33 Import and Export Supported Data Formats DATA FORMAT DESCRIPTIONS AutoCAD Drawing dwg and Drawing Exchange dxf Import and Export These file types are most commonly created by Autodesk AutoCAD product though other software programs such as Bentley MicroStation and various other computer aided design CAD programs are capable of creating files in this format There are two formats used by AutoCAD DXF drawing exchange format files which are large and ASCII representations of the binary DWG drawing files Logically both files are identical and therefore MAPublisher treats both file types in the same manner AutoCAD files consist of drawing settings and configurations as well as a series of entities or graphic elements organized into layers MAPublisher provides broad support for many AutoCAD entity types and options Prior to import set the colour mode of the Adobe Illustrator document to the same scheme used in the colour table of the CAD file i e RGB or CMYK to ensure colours are imported correctly Note the hierarchy of layers in multi feature imports is by feature type text layers then point then line then area layers ESRI Interchange File e00 Import and Export ESRI Interchange File files are created by ESRI ArcInfo product A single E00 file describes a complete Arclnfo cover
219. f interest Source Layer and Destination Layer Map View Lower 48 Source Layer Select the Area MAP Layer Source layer Lower48_area containing the polygons on which the centroids will be calculated Destination Existing layer P uscities_point Destination Layer Select an existing Point New layer Centroids MAP Layer or create a new one where This will also copy attributes to resultant points centroid symbols will be added Style Select the symbol to use The list Options correspond to the symbols present in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel Style MaAPublisher Default Symbol Scale 100 S Scale Select the symbol scale FUNCTIONALITY The Plot Centroids function creates point symbols at the center of polygons while copying the attributes from the source Area layer when the New Layer option is selected This function is useful for cartographic generalization purpose e g replacing small island area by a symbol or to simply add a meaningful symbol at the center of areas For single polygons the centroid can be assimilated to the center of mass of the surface For polygons grouped into a compound path the centroid of the largest polygon is used NOTE The centroid of a Bezier polygon smoothed path may not be completely accurate because only the anchor points are used to calculate the centroid s position If necessary use the Adobe Illustrator Add Anchor Points function Object gt Path
220. f single user licenses of MAPublisher 8 only If you have purchased a floating license please refer to the floating license installation guide provided with your purchase MAPublisher 8 is available in both single user and floating license configurations Floating licenses are designed to allow an organization to deploy a specific number of licenses that can be used and shared on any number of computers over a network IMPORTANT Some peripheral components might interfere with the activation process Before activating MAPublisher users must temporarily unplug or disable mobile phone blue tooth wireless or GPS systems Laptop users with a docking station must activate MAPublisher in the undocked state After the installation of MAPublisher 8 launch the version s of Adobe Illustrator you installed it to The MAPublisher Welcome Screen will appear automatically This screen gives four licensing options Evaluate Register Retrieve and Floating NOTE Ifyou wish to continue to use Adobe Illustrator without MAPublisher you can cancel this dialog box and activate MAPublisher license later by navigating to the Help menu in Adobe Illustrator and then to MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management MAPublisher panels are marked with a lock icon when the software is not licensed Welcome to MAPublisher J i P i 4 4 gern d s tke s When Ma jQ Foo eng Feature Version Type Status Serial N
221. f symbols for the major transit systems of the world A library of weather related point symbols A4 2 Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files Appendix 5 Glossary A Accuracy The closeness of results of observations computations or estimates to the true values or the values accepted as being true Accuracy relates to the exactness of the result and is distinguished from precision which relates to the exactness of the operation by which the result is obtained AGI Association for Geographic Information Algorithm A set of rules for solving a problem ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange a widely used industry standard code for exchanging alphanumeric codes in terms of bit signatures ANSI American National Standards Institute an association formed by the American Government and industry to produce and disseminate widely used industrial standards Analog Analogue A continuously varying electronic signal Also refers to traditional paper mapping products and aerial photographs Annotation The explanatory or descriptive alphanumeric text or labels on a map or artwork such as street or place names Application A set of computer programs designed for a specific task ESRI Interchange File File format with the extension e00 for Arclnfo Interchange E00 files exported from ArcInfo Area A bounded continuous two dimensional object which may or may not include its boundary It is usually defin
222. f the top left corner of the zoom out icon in the Flash map NOTE The origin of the coordinates 0 0 on a Flash map is at the top left corner of the Flash extents Example of positions of pan and zoom buttons 4 PanUpX 19 PanUpY 5 4 PanDownX 19 PanDownY 33 4 PanLeftx 5 PanLeftY 19 PanRightX 33 PanRightY 19 ZoomInx 19 ZoomInyY 52 ZoomOutx 19 ZoomOutyY 68 ZoomButtonsW Width of the zoom buttons 14 pixel by default ZoomButtonsH Height of the zoom buttons 14 pixel by default PanButtonsW Width of the pan buttons 14 pixel by default PanButtonsH Height of the pan buttons 14 pixel by default NOTE The images png format for the pan up right down left and zoom in and out buttons are stored in the flashviewer interface directory in the export destination folder The image names are button _up png button_right png button_down png button_left png button_plus png and button_minus png respectively for pan up pan right pan down pan left zoom in and zoom out When customizing the images for the zoom and pan buttons the same image names must be used When the size of the button is different from 14 pixel width by 14 pixel height the size must be entered in the advanced options for zoom buttons width and height and pan buttons width and height POPUP STYLE BubbleRounding Roundness of the corners of the callout bubbles where 0 indicates the corner to be a right ang
223. ference Guide A1 9 MAPublisher Import Formats DELIMITED ASCII TEXT CSV TSV TXT An ASCII file containing a tabular data where delimiters separate the columns and rows Common delimiters are commas spaces or tabs Microsoft Excel and many other spreadsheet programs will export data in these formats Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions csv tsv txt Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon No Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon No Point Yes Line No Text No Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Axis Column Specify which columns contain the x and y coordinates for the point data to be read in e Coordinate Format Choose the formatting type of the data you wish to import e g Decimal Degrees Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds Packed DMS e Use first line as header Allows the user to enable the first line of the text file to be used as column headings S57 FORMAT 000 S57format is intended for the exchange of digital hydrographic data between national hydrographic offices and for its distribution to manufacturers mariners and other data users It is used for the supply of ENC cells Electronic Na
224. file is not intended for Web distribution and only for off line use Advanced Settings See next section for more details on advanced Settings Web Export Dialog _Basic Settings Advanced Settings Name Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Viewer Style Popup Style Popup Style Expand to set the TTE Line Style Search Box Style OK Click the button to launch the export to Flash of Web Tags Indicates the number of Web tags callout bubbles created per layer Export Attributes Indicates layers for which MAP Attributes are exported when used in Web tags Layer Control Select the type of layer control to be inserted in the Flash map Built in Flash datagrid layer controls are automatically placed within your Flash document External layerCheckboxes js controls are placed externally and can be re arranged using HTML tags Reset Change the size settings back to the default current document size JPEG Image Quality Drag the slider to control the amount of JPEG file compression Preserve Appearance Flatten artwork to a single layer before export Selecting this option limits the editability of the file When uncheck path simplifications are applied by Adobe Illustrator Line Style Expand to set the selection and hovering line styles color thickness Search Box Style Expand to set the style of the search box position color of sear
225. folder Click the browse button to open a folder browser and change the path Symbol folder Directory path to the symbol folder Click the browse button e to open a folder browser and change the path Ignore invisible artwork Enable this option to ignore individual invisible artwork If this option is disabled individual invisible artwork will be taken into account as labelling source and obstacle e Default rules and styles folders respectively Rules and Styles subfolders in the directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro e Default symbol folder Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Symbols Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Symbols Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro Symbols Chapter 1 Getting Started 27 MAPublisher Preferences MAP Selection Filters Preferences The MAP Selection Filters preference category does not contain general settings but has a sub category for the MAP Selection Filters panel see chapter 11 for a full description of the MAP Selection Filters panel MAP Selection Filters gt Panel Preferences MAPublisher Preferences Ge General MAP Attributes Panel R MAP Labe
226. for the Manual Plot the Scale and Plot symbol The scale controls the size of the point symbol to be plotted With a scale of 100 percent selected the point is plotted at the original size of the symbol The second option is the Plot Symbol which determines which symbol is plotted Plot By Time The Plot By Time setting options control how points will be plotted when using the Plot By Time feature from the main MAP GPS panel Three separate settings can be adjusted Scale Every and Plot symbol The Every setting is used to specify the time interval between plots For instance if the Every setting is set to 5 seconds a new point is plotted every five seconds These settings may be changed while plotting is occurring If the user wishes to increase or decrease the scale or change to a different point symbol while plotting by time they may do so by setting new parameters Changes will be reflected in the next point to be plotted Chapter 16 MAP GPS 169 MAP GPS Point Plot Settings Plot By Distance The Plot by Distance setting options control how points will be plotted when using the Plot by Distance feature from the main MAP GPS panel Three separate settings can be adjusted Scale Every and Plot symbol The Every setting is used to specify the distance interval between plots For example if the Every setting is set to 5 metres a point will be plotted every five metres These settings may be changed while plotting is occurring If the user wis
227. formation such as currency accuracy extent and geographic projection assigned Metadata is typically stored in data models or data dictionaries MIF MID The MapInfo Map Interchange Format An ASCII file format pair exported from MapInfo GIS software The mif file contains the geometry information and the mid file contains the attribute data MrSID MrSID is a file format developed by LizardTech that reduces the size of large high resolution images to a fraction of their original size while maintaining the original image quality and integrity N NAD North American Datum Network Two or more interconnected computer systems for implementation of specific functions or a set of interconnected graphic lines defining some spatial features Node The point or intersection at which areas or lines are joined endpoints of an arc NSDI National Spatial Data Infrastructure O Orthophoto A modified copy of a perspective photograph of the Earth s surface with distortions due to tilt and relief removed Overlay A set of graphical data that can be superimposed on another set of graphical data through registration to a common coordinate system The process of laying one set of digital spatial data over another for analysis purposes A5 8 Appendix 5 Glossary M O Page anchor The location on the page where the map anchor is placed Page extent Defines a rectangular portion of the graphics page to be displayed Page size The size
228. g This feature allows MAPublisher to interact with the specified GPS device When the Start Scanning button is clicked the settings specified in the Device Settings dialog box will be used to begin reading and interpreting the information the GPS is receiving This information is then used to display the GPS status in the GPS panel as well as to plot points and or lines Manual Plot This method plots a single point at the current position reported by the GPS device The plotted point is reflective of the settings specified under the Manual Plot section of the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel i e using the specified scale and point symbol When Manual Plot is clicked a single point will be plotted either on an existing point layer if selected or on a new layer which is automatically created if a point layer is not selected If the Adobe Illustrator document does not contain any MAP View a new one is created in the WGS84 geodetic coordinate system Plot By Time This method plots a single point each time the specified time interval is observed The time interval is displayed in the MAP GPS Point Plot settings panel along with other settings such as scale and point symbol Plot By Distance This method plots a single point each time the specified distance interval is observed The distance interval is displayed in the MAP GPS Point Plot settings panel along with other settings such as scale and point symbol Start Route This method creat
229. g Allows you to import all of the files in a coordinate system that already exists in a MAP View in the document Auto scale If you have multiple files in the File List and have selected the New Based On or Use Existing options check this box to ensure all the files fit inside the page extents when imported RELATED TOOLS Advanced Import Da Accessed via the Add or Edit button Format Select the data type you wish to import This drop down list shows all MAPublisher supported data types Dataset Displays the directory path and filename for the currently selected file s You can also manually type in the dataset location here Source Coordinate System This section allows the manual selection of the coordinate system if this information is not held in the data source Same as Check this option in order to assign a coordinate system that matches that of an existing MAP View Info Click this button to view the parameters of a selected coordinate system IMPORT SETTINGS See the Simple Import va Advanced Import File gt Import Map Data gt Advanced and MAP Toolbar Advanced Import Coordinate System Filename 1 NAD27 C Documents and Settings david Desktop Data Tutorial Data usa tab 2 Robinson C Documents and Settings david Desktop Data Tutorial Data worldeast shp araea Destination MAP View New basedon usa v Coordinate System NAD27 Page Anchors 0
230. g coordinates are entered in degrees The values entered into the Latitude and Longitude text boxes may be entered in different formats e Decimal degrees D d e Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds D dMM SS s Degrees Minutes D MM m e Degrees MinutesSeconds D MMSS s Packed DMS with decimal point D DDMMSS s Packed DMS D DDMMSS s Items in are optional means zero or more digits means one or more digits NOTES e Lines of latitude run East West the Equator is an example whereas lines of longitude run North South the Greenwich Meridian is an example Positive degree values represent north latitudes and east longitudes Negative degree values represent south latitudes and west longitudes Directions can be entered either with positing negative values or using the N S E or W letters preceding or following the numerical values separated or not with a space e Valid delimiters for Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds format are gt d degree single quote minute double quote second e g 43d41 48 98 N gt hyphen e g 43 41 48 98N gt space e g 43 41 48 98N e Packed formats require the use of two digits for degrees of latitude e g 1 N must be written 01 and 3 digits for degrees of longitude e g 1 E must be written 001 Examples of Latitude Longitude values Delimited Degrees Minutes Packed DMS with decimal Decimals Degrees Degrees Minutes Degrees P
231. ge number of layers Assigning Georeferencing Information To Adobe Illustrator Layers Similarly existing Adobe Illustrator layers that do not contain georeferencing or attribute information will also appear in this panel under the default MAP View entitled Non MAP layers Such layers can be quickly moved into a specified MAP View with a matching coordinate system When moving a non map layer into a specified MAP View you will be prompted by the Define Layer dialog box to specify the feature type of the layer you are moving Multiple layers may be selected and moved together to a specified MAP View Use the Apply to all function in the Define Layer dialog box if the type is identical for all layers to be moved The Advanced option Base attribute schema on allows you to copy the attribute schema from an existing MAP Layer see chapter 5 for details 56 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Views Panel Duplicating And Deleting MAP Views MAP Views can be duplicated For example to create inset maps make a duplicate and drag some MAP Layers into the duplicated MAP View Then use the MAP View Editor to edit the placement scale or coordinate system of the duplicate MAP Views that do not contain any MAP layers can be deleted Both of these tools are accessed in the panel options menu of the MAP Views panel You can also delete a MAP View by clicking the Delete button at the base of the panel Note that these functions act on MAP Views only and
232. geodetic L amp E Datasource C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files geodata xml parameter geodata xml Custom Data C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 customsystems xml Save Save As Save changes ote Folder Display Name Name Units per Degree Abbrev EPSG Code Tr to a custom file data to Custom Data File containing A ArcMinute ArcMinute 60 9103 xml and view to xvw i ArcSecond ArcSecond 3600 arc 9104 the custom geodetic Centesimal Minute Centesimal Minute 111 11111111111 9112 parameter File loaded or amp Centesimal Second Centesimal Second 11111 111111111 9113 Coordinate Points rat H amp Degree Degree 1 deg 9102 B saved by the user Coordinate Systems Degree supplier Degree supplier 1 9122 Lock Icon Indicates read amp Gon Gon 1 1111111111111 9106 only parameters default LAG amp Ellipsoids fh Grad Grad 1 1111111111111 grads 9105 Geodetic Objects See list Envelopes E Microradian Microradian 17453 292519943 9109 ones above Horizontal Datums amp Mil_6400 Mil_6400 17 777777777778 9114 Linear Units S Minute Minute 4 467707849 minute Prime Meridians amp Radian Radian 0 01745329251994 rads 9101 Warning Icon Indicates Add Remove Add and incomplete parameters rS co Ca fe ee remove folders and s aadA BiG sada iemovercdi categories TAREE information or cop Search y i objects Search Se
233. gly If you do edit the size of your document remember to reset your rulers before opening either Importer in order for MAPublisher to correctly fit the data into the page extents Once your page has been set up you can access the MAPublisher Simple Import function under the File menu at the Import Map Data pullout or from the MAPublisher toolbar button or by using the keyboard shortcut Shift Ctrl i USING SIMPLE IMPORT Overview The dialog box itself is split into two sections The upper section allows you to choose a file format select the file you wish to import and enter any additional settings that may be required The lower section will display the coordinate system of the selected file and allow you to specify this manually if the program has not detected a coordinate system 42 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Simple Import Adding Files In order to select a file or files for import you can either leave the Format drop down list as lt Auto detect format gt or set the drop down list to the file type you wish to import If this drop down list is left as lt Auto detect format gt when you search for your GIS file all supported files will be displayed It is often easier therefore to set the Format drop down list at the required format to ease navigation When you have chosen the format click the Browse button to select your file s and then click Open Alternatively you can type in the full path of the file s in the Dataset te
234. graphers have long been doing their mapping within graphics environments because they provide tools such as Bezier curves and true CMYK colour separation for publication quality mapping FEATURES OF THE GRAPHIC ENVIRONMENT Accurate Colour Colours displayed on screen accurately reflect the colours as they will be printed Proportional Symbology Symbology is accurately proportional to the map area you have zoomed into Views You can display your document on screen in a variety of ways using the View menu commands For example you can see a preview of the illustration as you edit you can view only the outlines of your artwork or you can preview selected parts of your artwork while displaying the rest as outlines You can also create and save custom views of your document retaining a particular magnification level layering and other viewing features for later retrieval You can even display multiple views of a document at several different magnification levels simultaneously Redrawing is Automatic Redrawing of the affected map objects is clean and automatic and impacts only the redrawn portion and possibly some immediately adjacent portions of the map This eliminates the need to wait while the entire map is re drawn or refreshed This applies to text as well as to vector data Broad Selection of Fonts A broad and flexible selection of text fonts styles sizes and enhancement features e g Haloing is available Paste in Front or
235. gt Add Anchor Points before running Plot Centroids on Bezier polygons PREREQUISITES The document must contain a fully georeferenced MAP View that includes a MAP layer of type Area with polygons An existing Point layer may be used as destination layer Existing Layer option in which case this layer must be included in the file before running the function Furthermore the symbol of your choice must be present in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel USING PLOT CENTROIDS Plot Centroids is located in the Point Plotter panel options menu Select first the MAP View that contains the layers concerned by the function e Select the Source Layer containing the polygons for which the centroids will be plotted MAP Layer of type Area e Select the symbol Style and Scale to apply e Choose the Destination Layer in which the centroids will be added select an existing Point layer or create a new one NOTE When the New Layer option is enabled the attributes from the source Area layer are copied to the new Point layer However when using an existing point layer attributes do not get transferred Chapter 6 Plotting Points 89 Plot Centroids RESULTS Symbols are added to the specified Point MAP Layer specified Depending on the type of polygon single or compound path symbols are located on the center of the polygons or at the center of the biggest polygon of a group Example result of plotting centroids on a Canadian provincial Area layer
236. h to Styles in that once added to the Rules list they can be immediately applied reused later in the same file or in other documents provided they are being applied to the same type of data Rules are saved to the Area Line or Point folder depending on the feature type of the map layer MAP LabelPro offers a pre configured Default rule for each data type It is loaded by default and used until new rules have been created or selected The default rule is a good starting choice as it is configured to be useful for the most common labelling situations however creating custom rules can be very useful when specific labelling conventions are required In an Area Point or Line Rule dialog box the sequence in which the rule options appear and are checked have no bearing on the order of label placement only whether the option is enabled or not Adjust the Priority value of layers to adjust the sequence of label placement Existing rules may be deleted by selecting them from the Rule drop down list and then clicking the delete button Fal Rules are saved to the location set in MAPublisher Preferences see chapter 1 The default locations are Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Rules Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Rules Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro Rules NOTE Labelling results will vary depending on which rules are enable
237. hange format There are three different types of gen files each with of its own syntax one for points one for lines and one for text geometries This is the format exported by Arclnfo generate command The gen files are use by Arclnfo to transfer coverages to other mapping systems Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions gen Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes No Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support No Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon No Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon No Geometry Type Attribute arcgen_geometry Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 3 MAPublisher Import Formats ESRI SHAPEFILE SHP The ESRI Shapefile is a geospatial vector data format for geographic information systems software It is developed and regulated by ESRI as a mostly open specification for data interoperability among ESRI and other software products A Shapefile is a digital vector storage format for storing geometric location and associated attribute information This format lacks the capacity to store topological information A single logical Shapefile consists of three physical files each with one of the following file name extensions shp Geometric data Sik Index to the geometric data dbf Attributes for the geometric data These extensions are added to the base name of the Shapefile creating
238. haracter Styles text stylesheets or Symbols point stylesheets Add Remove To add a new style rule or delete the currently selected rule Column Lists the attribute column s of the associated MAP Stylesheet Editor MAP Stylesheets panel gt Edit Edit MAP Stylesheet 1 Name Density A Style Rules Style MM MAP Area o7 Density gt 20 4 1 High J MAP Area 19 Density gt 10 E MAP Area 31 Expression Density gt 0 AND Density lt 5 AND Density lt 20 Simple Expression To compose and edit expressions in Simple Mode Simple Expression Expression Mode Simple Advanced Advanced Expression To compose and edit expressions in Advanced Mode Advanced Expression Scale To scale the symbols in point stylesheets or stroke in area and line stylesheets Expression Click to edit the expression assigned to each style rule see below Expression Mode Select the style of the display for creating expressions see below Expression Enter the expression directly into LJ the entry field or click the 20 v f The expression is valid Browse button to access j the Edit Expression Comparison List of operators function see chapter 5 Equal to Greater than Less than or equal to etc MAP Layers _ Density lvl i gt liv 10 Density gt 10 AND Density lt 20 Range operator Click to activate the second row to
239. he AreaDirection property is equal to Indeterminate therefore compound paths cannot be flipped The MAPublisher MAP Tagger tool or Feature Text Label have an option to enable Flip upside down labels to create text in a consistent orientation without requiring the use of the Flip Lines function see chapter 10 for details In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Flip Lines is found in the Filter gt MAP Lines menu Chapter 8 Line Functions 97 Flip Lines Join Lines Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines gt Join Lines or MAP Toolbar Pe Join on Attribute Select the column you wish to base the join on All lines within the selected proximity Join on attribute with matching column values will be joined Destination Layer ROADS_line_joined Proximity Units Select a map or page Proximity 0 500000 unit to be used for proximity values Destination Layer Enter the name of the output layer This new layer will Close Segment Gaps O _ contain the newly joined lines Proximity Assign a proximity value in the current unit This value Close Segment Gaps If two line segments are separated by determines how close together in a distance less than the Proximity selecting this option map units the lines must be in order will create a line segment that connects the two lines to be joined otherwise a compound path is created FUNCTIONALITY The Join Lines filter allows a group of linear features to be joined based on a common value
240. he Macintosh OS the equivalent of a DOS or UNIX directory Format The way in which data is arranged for storage and for transmission between software and computers FTP File Transfer Protocol Geographic features Points lines and areas that are components of a map Geographic Imager A suite of geospatial imaging tools for Adobe Photoshop Geographic Information System GIS Any system designed for the capturing storing checking integrating analyzing and displaying of spatially referenced data about the Earth Georeference To establish the relationship between page coordinates on a planar map and known real world coordinates GeoTIFF An industry wide standard for specifying information in TIFF tags which was developed by several organizations within the GIS community GeoTIFF files are raster images that contain georeferencing information as well as image information in a single file GIR Geographic Information Retrieval GIS Geographic Information Systems GPS Global Positioning Systems Grain The frequency of vertices or points forming a line Graticule The spherical coordinate system based on lines of latitude and longitude Great Circle A circle formed on the surface of a sphere by a plane that passes through the centre of the sphere The Equator each meridian and each other full circumference of the Earth forms a great circle The arc of a great circle shows the shortest distance between points on the su
241. he X and Y origin BOO Y JO m Display Options Style Select a style for the grid lines e Style MAP Grid Style vi FUNCTIONALITY The Grids and Graticules tool will generate fully editable grid lines based on a number of user defined settings There are three grid types available Selecting Graticules allows you to plot grid lines at specific lines of latitude and longitude which will be automatically curved if applicable Choosing an Index Grid allows you to specify the number of cells that you wish to divide the current grid extents into Choosing a Measured Grid also allows you to place grid lines but with advanced control over placement size alignment and labels using projected coordinates A number of labelling options exist for each type of grid allowing grid lines and grid cells to be labelled if required Any form of grid plotted with this tool can be subsequently resized using the bounding box of the grid and any parameter can be specifically edited via the Object gt Edit Grid Edit Graticules menu item PREREQUISITES Before using this filter you must create a j Legend layer in your Adobe Illustrator layers panel Create a new layer and then drag this to the MAP View holding the features on which you wish to plot a grid remembering to set the feature type to Legend MAPublisher will use the Normal Character Style when generating grid labels If you wish to use a different text size justification font stroke
242. he desired MAP View specifying Point in the Define Layer dialog box USING POINT PLOTTER Setting up the Symbol Selection The symbols used by Point Plotter are a direct reproduction of those that exist in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel To open the Adobe Illustrator symbols panel click the menu Window gt Symbols If you wish to add points to this panel create your symbols as closed Adobe Illustrator objects and drag them into this panel Alternatively open the MAP Symbols file from the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on your MAPublisher CD or local drive see Appendix 4 and drag the symbols into your Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel 86 Chapter 6 Plotting Points MAP Point Plotter Entering Coordinates When the Use Current Layer s coordinate system option is toggled coordinate values can be entered in the current MAP units of the coordinate system of the MAP View containing the selected layer When the Use WGS 84 option is toggled the Select button will become enabled Clicking the Select button will open the Select Coordinate System dialog box Choose any coordinate system the coordinates values entered to plot points will be in the unit Point Style for this coordinate system When the selected or default coordinate system is projected X and Y coordinates are entered in the unit Point Style of the coordinate system e g metre kilometre feet When the selected or default coordinate system is Geodetic Lat and Lon
243. he page it would get rounded to the nearest grid line intersection point Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 19 Frequently Asked Questions lam receiving an Error loading plug ins when I start Adobe Illustrator What should I do Search for and delete any copies of a file named Adobefnt05 Ist If that does not work search for and delete any copies of a file whose name starts with Adobefnt and has a st extension The Adobefnt Ist files are cached descriptions of the font environment They can be rebuilt when needed so it is safe to delete them Why do some art objects fail to display completely Sometimes drawing with Adobe Illustrator shape creation tools results in the object not being displayed completely by Adobe Illustrator The object s geometry is complete because if you set the View to outline View gt Outline as opposed to Preview you can see that the object is there in its entirety you can also zoom in and out However once you restore the zoom level to the original extents at which the object was created it will no longer appear as a complete shape The solution to this is to disable the anti aliasing option in the Adobe Illustrator preferences dialog box Are there any sources for free GIS data There are a multitude of web sites which offer free GIS data in several different forms A list of several free download sites is indicated later in this appendix What can cause attribute corruption The most l
244. he process of generating an image by means of a computer program Resolution The number of dots per inch displayed on screen or printed to an output device Rhumb line A line on the surface of the Earth cutting all meridians at the same angle A rhumb line shows true direction Parallels and meridians which also maintain constant true directions may be considered special cases of the rhumb line A rhumb line is a straight line on a Mercator projection A straight rhumb line does not show the shortest distance between points unless the points are on the Equator or on the same meridian RS Remote Sensing Rubber sheeting A procedure to adjust the coordinates all of the data points in a dataset to allow a more accurate match between known locations and a few data points within the dataset Rubber sheeting also known as rubber banding preserves the interconnectivity or topology between points and objects through stretching shrinking or re orienting their interconnecting lines S SAIF Spatial Archive and Interchange Format SAIF is a Canadian Draft National Standard for Geomatics data interchange It is a specification for data which includes an object oriented data model and a language for describing both Spatial and non spatial data Scale The relation between the size of an object on a map and its size in the real world Scanner A device for converting images from maps or photographs of part of the real world into digital form
245. her Edit Expression tool provides for the entry and edit of expressions for use in the generation of new attribute values and properties to make selections or to apply styles Expressions can be entered using the keyboard and or by selecting from listed column names operators and functions Edit Expression provides functionality for a number of tools Edit Schema To create or edit an expression for the generation of values in an attribute or column MAP Attributes panel gt Edit Schema gt Derive value from expression gt Browse Apply Expression To apply an expression to an attribute or property column for selected art only MAP Attributes panel gt Apply Expression gt Browse New Edit Selection Filter chapter 11 To create or edit expression criteria for use in selecting map data MAP Selection Filters panel gt New Edit Selection Filter gt Browse MAP Stylesheet Editor chapter 9 To create or edit an expression for use in styling map data MAP Stylesheets panel gt Edit MAP Stylesheet gt Advanced Expression gt Browse ENTERING EXPRESSIONS Expression can be built using the keyboard and or by clicking the operator buttons or items in the Objects list attributes name and values constants and functions These items are colour coded to ease the identification attribute names in purple string values in orange operators and numerical values in grey constants in green and functions in black Clicking any of the operato
246. here may be times when you wish to quickly add a point or a small group of points to your map but you do not have a GIS or ASCII file containing these points ready for import Alternatively your map may be in a projection that holds coordinates in linear units yet the coordinates of your point locations are in angular units i e degrees Provided you have a fully specified MAP View and know the coordinates coordinate system and unit can be specified for the locations you wish to plot you can use the MAPublisher Point Plotter to have your points automatically added at their correct locations Topics covered in this section are MAP Point Plotter Plot Centroids Chapter 6 Plotting Points 85 MAP Point Plotter Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Point Plotter and MAPublisher Toolbar i MAP PointPlotter x Ee Current Layer Displays the selected a a layer s name and coordinate system P Pont RGP33 Coordinates Enter the coordinates of the point to be plotted either in MAP units e Coordinates or in a different choice of coordinate system Format Decimal Degrees D d Scale Change the size of the chosen Long deg Format Select the input format deg symbol if required The arrow keys will for values in degrees when input Lat coordinate system is geodetic increase or decrease the scale valu
247. hes to increase decrease the scale or change to a different point symbol while plotting by distance they may do so by simply selecting new parameters Changes will be reflected in the next point to be plotted Plot By Change in Speed The Plot by Change in Speed auxillary settings will plot a point each time a change in speed is detected as specified by the threshold set in the Point Plot Settings Change in speed points are plotted in addition to the points plotted while completing one of the standard plot options Plot by Time Plot By Distance or Route To use this setting a user must first enable it by selecting the Enable this Auxillary GPS Plot Type from the bottom of the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel The optional settings for Scale Every and Plot Symbol must then also be specified The Every setting has an additional option which allows specification of the speed units Either km h knots or mi h may be used When plotting begins a new layer is automatically be created specifically for the change in speed points This layer will be automatically named based on the name of the current layer upon which the main plotting operation is being conducted with the phrase change_in_speed prefixed to it For example if the main plotting is in progress on a layer called ABCD the layer created for the change in speed plots will be named change_in_speed_ ABCD Plot By Change in Heading The Plot by Change in Heading auxillary settings will plot a p
248. hical unit of information such as a point line area or pixel EPS Encapsulated Post Script file format The EPS format is used to transfer PostScript language artwork between applications also see PostScript Equal areas A map projection is equal area if every part as well as the whole has the same area as the corresponding part on the Earth at the same reduced scale No flat map can be both equal area and conformal Equidistant Equidistant maps show true distances only from the center of the projection or along a special set of lines For example an Azimuthal Equidistant map centered at Washington shows the correct distance between Washington and any other point on the projection It shows the correct distance between Washington and San Diego and between Washington and Seattle But it does not show the correct distance between San Diego and Seattle No flat map can be both equidistant and equal area F FAQ Frequently Asked Question Feature A set of points lines or polygons in a spatial database that represent a real world entity The terms feature and object are often used synonymously Feature code A set of characters alpha alphanumeric or numeric within the GIS which uniquely identifies a feature class or group of features File A collection of related information that can be accessed by an assigned name A5 4 Appendix 5 Glossary D F Filter See Plug in filters Folder A storage area for files within t
249. hide I AreaDirection current attribute table i e edit columns You can also choose to ae I VvertexCount column names visibility type and B style show all columns or hide all columns width or assign expressions to StrokeWeight columns Perimeter PathClosed Zoom to Feature Click the Feature IR ArtScal ee F A Highlight Feature Click the feature number or right click the attribute E area attribute to highlight that feature on and select Zoom to Feature S STATE_NAME our map y POPULATION Draw The MAP Attributes panel displays the map attribute and property attribute records for a map layer which are linked to the map s graphic elements and makes them available for editing This panel is also the hub from which you can edit column schemas and visibility add or delete columns join tables find and replace attributes and apply expres sions to selected art Only the visible attributes of selected map features will be displayed in the dialog box USING THE MAP ATTRIBUTES PANEL Viewing Attributes Selected features are sorted per layer The Layer drop down list shows all the layers that currently have features selected as well as the number of selected map objects for each layer also reported at the base of the panel The attribute values displayed in columns in the MAP Attributes panel can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking the column header The widths of the columns may be change
250. his process an option will be given to backup custom coordinates systems and MAP LabelPro rules NOTE If MAPublisher 8 is installed without un installing an earlier MAPublisher version removing the earlier version will also un install MAPublisher 8 WINDOWS 1 Make sure that a compatible version of Adobe Illustrator is installed on the computer If Adobe Illustrator is running exit the program 2 CD version Insert the MAPublisher 8 CD If Autorun is disabled on the system navigate to the MAPublisher 8 1 directory on the CD and double click the Setup exe file Electronic version Double click the mp81wi e zip file to open the WinZip self extractor When the files are unzipped proceed to the MAPublisher directory and double click the Setup exe file 3 Proceed through the installation screens as instructed Options are given to install documentation and tutorial data If these components are selected the files can be subsequently be found here Start gt All Programs gt Avenza gt MAPublisher 8 gt MAPublisher Tutorials 4 Launch Adobe Illustrator Please proceed to the section on Registration and Licensing on the following page MAC OS X 1 Make sure that a compatible version of Adobe Illustrator is installed on the computer If Adobe Illustrator is running exit the program 2 CD version Insert the MAPublisher 8 CD Navigate to the MAPublisher 8 1 directory on the CD and double click the Install MAPublisher 8 1 icon Ele
251. ialog box allows you to search for coordinate systems based on an en tered text string Searches can be performed on the whole database or solely in continent and country sub folders To use the Specify Coordinate System type a search term into the text box located at the bottom of the dialog box and click the search button In the Find text box enter the text on which to search For example to find coordinate systems with NAD83 proper ties enter NAD83 Following the Find text box is the in text box to select an area of the database in which to search For example to find NAD83 in the name only select Names When you have entered the search criteria click the Search button If the search has returned results these results will be displayed in the Specify Coordinate System dialog box in the Search folder and can be immediately selected in order to reproject your data or to assign a coordinate system Search results will be stored in this folder until you restart Adobe Illustrator or perform another Coordinate System Search NOTE If you do not find an appropriate coordinate system you can edit or create a new one in this interface To do this please refer to appendix A2 Rotation A rotation figure can be applied or edited by specifying an angle in the entry field or by using the clock hand to rotate the MAP View graphically Notice that changes to rotation will be automatically previewed in the Preview Pane with the green rectangle and
252. ic vector and attribute information and makes it very easy to produce high quality maps This section explains the principles of attribute information and how these are maintained within MAPublisher Topics covered in this section are Attributes Foreword MAP Attributes Panel Edit Schema a Z gt Edit Expression Find amp Replace Attributes Apply Expression Join Table P 0 Ti Export Attributes 6740 x Day use only Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 67 Attributes Foreword ATTRIBUTE INFORMATION The attribute table that forms part of a GIS map file is one of the most important parts of any data set It is in the attribute table that we find important information such as street names for lines Zoning or zip code numbers for areas and elevations for points to go along with our vector line area or point data Along with vector line area and point data imported as explained in the previous sections MAPublisher also imports the attribute data table associated with any vector map file that it supports MAP LAYERS Throughout this guide an Adobe Illustrator layer containing georeferencing and or attribute information will be referred to as a MAP Layer Each MAP Layer which can contain attribute information is symbolized in MAPublisher panels and dialog boxes with an icon depicting its feature type Area layer e g county boundaries urban areas country
253. icence file from a previous activation installed then you should follow the procedure below 1 Exit Adobe Illustrator 2 Locate your Adobe Illustrator preferences file typically named Alprefs Windows Adobe Ilustrator Prefs Mac 3 Once the file is located delete the file and restart Adobe Illustrator This should resolve the problem NOTE This applies to both floating and stand alone license users MEMORY AND SPEED ISSUES Why do I need so much more memory RAM than I do with my GIS The graphics software environment of Adobe Illustrator loads the entire file into memory rather than just reading it from disk thus more memory is required MAPublisher builds a mini GIS application inside Adobe Illustrator so that it can geo code information and attach data to objects This also has some overhead When you are importing a lot of files with MAPublisher into Adobe Illustrator you ll notice that the amount of available memory will decrease rapidly and your computer loses speed This is due to the memory management MAPublisher reserves a fairly large amount of memory for each import action which is not always returned when the import is done The solution is simple save your file close it and open it again It s not even necessary to close Adobe Illustrator itself By closing the file the reserved memory is properly returned How can I improve the speed of my data import Many GIS data files are large and when a series of such files is i
254. idea to perform simplify lines on artwork before exporting a Flash map This will reduce the size of the file and therefore it will have a faster rendering time e To smooth the appearance of paths using Bezier curves use the Adobe Illustrator function Simplify Lines found in the menu Object gt Path gt Simplify 102 Chapter 8 Line Functions Simplify Lines MAP yg ers Ko S i A N x A SY Z D A f 7 g 3 40 Ao r ook A M gt tai G ija 4 ce Na apb ha A a ad cae y j fy Ys Se gg NEA N MAPublisher provides extensive tools for quick easy and accurate styling of points lines areas and text This function M ists Me y is able to read and work with the data found in the MAP N k aN Attributes panel and to apply symbols graphic styles and hk net character styles to artwork according to the legend criteria you specify The topics covered in this section are as follows MAP Stylesheets Panel MAP Stylesheet Editor Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 103 MAP Stylesheets Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Stylesheets or MAP Toolbar 5 teaei New MAP Stylesheet New MAP Stylesheet Opens the New MAP Stylesheet List An alphabetical list of gt T Label Stylesheet Duplicate Stylesheet Case 1 Stylesheet dialog box to specify a name the MAP Stylesheets and associated MAP State Names Edit Stylesheet Case 1 and feature type for the new stylesheet Layers in the current document Bo
255. iew This can be a useful tool when merging parts of several documents into a single document An example might be to import a commonly used inset map PREREQUISITES At least two documents must be opened to use Import MAP View The active document does not need to contain any MAP View but the second document must at least contain one MAP View To access the function click the Import MAP View from Document item in the MAP Views panel options menu IMPORTING A MAP VIEW The Import MAP View dialog box will show all other documents currently open along with all the MAP Views they contain Simply select the MAP View you wish to import into the current document and click OK to import the MAP View and MAP Layers 62 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing Import MAP View Export MAP Views panel gt Export and buttons ru E MAP View w MAP Layer Format Select the export format for the selected layer or MAP View Dataset Displays the directory path for the export of the currently selected layer or MAP View You can also manually type in the dataset location EXPORT SETTINGS Keep format extension Check this option to export layers with their feature extension _area _line _point or _text which may have been appended to layer names during import AutoCAD Settings Release Version Specify the AutoCAD version number you wish to export to MIF MID Settings C Keep format extension Export visible
256. ikely cause of attribute corruption other than the files being corrupted before you got them is that you have put layers with differing attribute structures into a single layer As a rule of thumb you should use one layer for each external file that you are importing Also some Adobe Illustrator functions cause the link between artwork objects and their attributes table to be broken and therefore attribute information gets lost These functions are e Compound path Make e Pathfinder Live Paint e Blob brush Adobe Illustrator CS4 If required users should first duplicate their working layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel before using these functions What can I do when a filter does not appear to work e Make sure that you have highlighted the desired Layer in the Layers panel and that it is unlocked and visible e Make sure that what you have asked the filter to do makes sense e Try closing Adobe Illustrator and deleting your Adobe Illustrator preferences file A1 20 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Frequently Asked Questions GIS Backgrounder WHAT IS GIS A Geographic Information System GIS captures stores checks analyzes and displays georeferenced data about the Earth A GIS uses a database management system DBMS to store and link data that relates to the same geographic area This facilitates the following types of queries e What if e What is it e Where is it e What spatial patterns e
257. in the Spatial Data Transfer Standard format and are generally distributed over the Internet as a means of promoting the standard For SDTS import select the catd file xxxxcatd ddf which is the index file that contains a description of the other files in the SDTS transfer Individual DDF files cannot be imported Generally all SDTS downloads will contain the CATD file DATA CONSIDERATIONS When obtaining GIS data for use with MAPublisher whether from an online source commercial vendor government office or from an internal source within your organization there are a number of important considerations to keep in mind First and foremost you should always endeavour to obtain data in one of the formats supported by the MAPublisher Importers see above In cases where the file format native to a particular mapping application is not supported by MAPublisher you can often request the data provider to export a file in one of the supported formats When obtaining data you should acquire as much metadata about the files as possible MAPublisher deals with data in the following manner Unprojected data will be imported by MAPublisher with latitude and longitude map anchors which will therefore range from x 180 to 180 y 90 to 90 If you receive projected data you should be aware of the following MAPublisher will import projected data with a true scale and appropriate map anchors Unlike unprojected data these map anchors will not be in lat
258. ion This option will assign a type string to all attributes See chapter 3 Importing Map Data for more details on these settings MAPublisher supports the import of simple features points lines polygons donuts and aggregates in GML 2 0 and later versions MAPublisher supports export to GML 3 1 1 Mapinfo Interchange mif mid Import and Export Files of this type are most commonly created by the MapInfo product though other products including MAPublisher are also capable of generating files in this format These files exist in pairs where each file has the same name but ends in either a mif or mid file extension The mif portion contains the vector geometric data and the mid contains the associated attributes Both files are required in order to successfully import a file of this format to Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher The important things to remember when importing MapInfo files are that the mif file must be the one that is selected through the MAPublisher import filter and that both files must be in the same folder MAPublisher will automatically locate and deal with the mid file Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 35 Import and Export Supported Data Formats Mapinfo Table tab Import and Export The TAB format is a simple non topological format for storing the geometric location and attribute information of geographic features and is an integral part of the MapInfo product The TAB format defines the geometry and
259. ion to the HTML tags MAPublisher can use text extracted from the MAP Attributes table The reference to the attribute field name is indicated between two percent signs Attribute_1 Examples use of attribute field e lt b gt Street_Name lt b gt gt Main Street e lt img src sourcemedia image hspace 0 vspace 0 align left gt gt Shows image indicated in the attribute called image a string text hspace and vspace set the horizontal and vertical space left blank around the image align set the image alignment to the left of the page e lt a href http webSite gt Avenza web lt a gt gt Avenza Web and opens the Website indicated in the attribute WebSite on click Text with HTML tags may be directly entered for formatting or benefit from the Web Tag Dialog HTML Text Editor Tools described here after USING THE WEB TAG DIALOG Callout Set up and Preview The user must set the Height and Width of the callout bubble in pixel units or use the Auto Size option The Auto Size option sets the size of the bubble automatically based on the contents image and text The Preview button opens or closes the preview of the callout As text and images are inserted the preview gets updated to show the aspect of the callout bubble prior to export 150 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Tag Dialog Insert a Title Callouts may have a title shown at the top of the bubble The title can be typed in as a simple text but
260. ist The subdivided cells will begin from the left of the bar s The Number of sub intervals that compose each of these cells can be specified in the next list You can also choose to Add an interval left of zero if required Labelling Options Choose a Character style for the scale bar labels by choosing a style from the list The label options allow you to add extra scaling information to the generated scale bar The text that will be generated by this tool is displayed in the Preview panel when the options are set Generating the Scale Bar When you click OK the selected scale bar will be placed on the legend layer at a default position The Adobe Illustrator editing tools may be used to move the scale bar to a desirable location Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows 141 Scale Bar EDITING A SCALE BAR Use the bounding box of the generated scale bar View gt Show Bounding Box to resize Resizing scale bars horizontally will add or remove intervals from the bar s Resizing vertically will adjust the width of the bar s Scale bars can also be resized using the Adobe Illustrator menu Object gt Transform gt Transform Each by changing the horizontal or vertical scales If you require a different design to be used for your scale bar or wish to change any parameter without generating a new version select the scale bar and access the Object gt Edit Scale Bar menu item This will re open the Scale Bar dialog box and the current
261. it and query the map data MAPublisher Simple and Advanced Import functions allow the import of major GIS and CAD formats ArcGIS MapInfo AutoCAD MicroStation KLM and more into Adobe Illustrator while retaining their native geometry Point Line Text Area layer structure geographic location and attribute data The cartographic workspace is managed through MAP Views that control the geospatial parameters coordinate system anchor map scale and rotation Layers organized under the same MAP View share the same geographic frame of reference A layer must reside within a MAP View to be managed by MAPublisher functions and keep its spatial and attribute information however layers not related to a MAP View may still be used for presentation purposes such as title scale and legend An Adobe Illustrator document may contain more than one MAP View For example a map with an inset map at a larger scale to represent a zoomed in area of interest The MAP Attributes panel allows for creating editing and querying attribute information For example for a line layer containing street data each line segment may be linked to a table with information relative to the street name and street category Using the MAP Attributes panel this information can be viewed queried edited or additional columns of data may be appended The MAP Stylesheets make use of the attribute data to apply Adobe Illustrator graphic styles symbols or character styles dependi
262. it can also be formatted using HTML tags and MAP Attribute values Insert an Image Images can be inserted in the callout bubble on the side of the main contents To insert an image by browsing to the image file with a file navigator select Manually To use an attribute value containing the path to the image file select By Attribute The attribute field name must be entered between percent signs e g lmage_File By default the original image size is maintained It is however possible to change it by using the Width and Height text boxes the width height ratio is maintained This option is not available for Multiple tagging with option By Attribute NOTE The maximum size for a callout is 1000 pixels x 1000 pixels When this limit is reached images are automatically scaled to fit image aspect ratio is maintained Add and Edit Contents As explained in the Prerequisites the callout bubble text and contents can be typed and formatted using HTML tags The Web Tag Dialog also provides a series of tools to create the HTML tags formatting It works as follows e Type the text or parameter for image link and charts e Highlight the text e Click the edit buttons see below The HTML tags are added to the text body In the Preview the text is shown in the appropriate format and images links or charts are displayed Aside from the HTML tags the Web Tag Dialog provides a drop down list to pick MAP Attributes name visible attribu
263. izontal scaling to best place labels within polygons and paths These Label Settings are common to Feature Text Label and MAP Tagger Tool 116 Chapter 10 Labelling Functions MAP Tagger Tool TAGGING MAP DATA When you have set all your Layer Label options and specified Label Settings click OK to close the dialog box and confirm your settings With the MAP Tagger Tool selected click the map object to label it The following list of keyboard modifiers may be used for additional labelling options note gt click map object with MAP Tagger Tool selected Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings E Line labels are placed at click point and assigned angle of line at click point Al Area labels are placed horizontally at click point Point labels are placed horizontally at click point W Shift Only applicable for Line labels Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings Line labels are placed horizontally at click point W Shift drag Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator Type and MAPublisher settings and leader line created on drag Line labels are placed horizontally Leader line connects text to line feature Al Area labels are placed horizontally Leader line connects text to line feature Point labels are placed horizontally Leader line connects text to line feature gt drag Labels placed using current Adobe Illustrator T
264. jected coordinate systems in the database To define or edit Coordinate Systems you must select an Envelope defining the appropriate area of use If you are unsure of the appropriate envelope you can leave it set to the default World envelope The Point Style is how you will select the style of linear units for your system For most systems you will want to select Projected point in appropriate units Then select the Geodetic model that using the appropriate datum for your system When you select the appropriate Projection for your system the parameters needed to define the system will appear in the Folder Angular Units Coordinate Points Coordinate Systems All Recent Search 0 amp F ie Ee Europe Example Systems NOT FOR USE North America Oceania Other Outdated Deprecated South America UTM World Datum Shifts Ellipsoids Envelopes Horizontal Datums Linear Units Prime Meridians i i l I table below Enter the needed parameters and define the units each parameter is specified in NOTE Information on supported projections and their parameters can be found in the document MAPublisher Projections Guide pdf installed with MAPublisher Geodetic Coordinate System Editor _Identification Definition Identification Definition amp Projected Coordinate System Editor Envelope World by country Point Style
265. k or uncheck the Visible option to edit a column visibility Check or uncheck the Read only option to edit a column s read write status Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 73 Edit Schema Check the Derive value from expression option to assign an expression to the selected column Enter a valid expression in the Expression field or click the Browse button to enter and edit expressions via the Edit Expression dialog box The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes This function is useful for example to populate the column values based on the contents of other columns and or mathematical formulas NOTE Values derived from expression are dynamically linked to the attributes used in the expression Therefore they are read only Use the Apply Expression function to generate values that can be modified The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be assigned to columns in Edit Schema Ontario applied to column NAME Result All items are assigned the value Ontario in the NAME column MAP Area 01 applied to column Style Result All area items are assigned the value MAP Area 01 in the Style column and are assigned the Graphic Style MAP Area 01 on the page 45 applied to column Rotation Result All point items are assigned the value 45 in the Rotation column and are rotated to 45 on the p
266. k this option and each column will be assigned a default heading name Column1 Column2 etc Destination Table Choose the attribute table to be joined to the data table This can be achieved by choosing a MAP Layer from the Target Layer list When the destination layer has been selected select a common column by selecting an appropriate entry in the Matching Column drop down list This column must match the format and values as the column selected in the Source Table section Additional Option If the Case sensitive option is checked the column entries from the two matching columns will only be matched by case For example if you have a mixture of upper or lower case entries in the data table that is mirrored in the destination attribute table you should check this box If one of the matching columns contains values in lowercase and the other contains values in uppercase for example you should not check this box RESULTS When you click OK the data table will be added to the attribute table on the destination MAP Layer and may be viewed in the MAP Attributes panel Notice that the matching column in your data table has also been added but has been appended with a 1 if the column names were identical in the source and destination tables 82 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Join Table Export Attributes MAP Attributes panel options gt Export Attributes File name Click the Browse button to Export Attributes select the director
267. l drag it to the MAP View holding the features you wish to label Set the feature type to Text when prompted For best results set up a character style for type font size justification and color Adobe Illustrator menu Window gt Type gt Character Style Select the appropriate style in the Character Style panel while using MAP Tagger tool and MAPublisher will generate labels based on these settings Otherwise labels applied will appear in the current default colour font and font size The MAP Tagger Tool can be found towards the bottom of the Adobe Illustrator Toolbar Double click the tool to create new label settings or to edit settings MAP TAGGER TOOL SETTINGS Source Layer and Column You must first set the options for MAPublisher to determine the attributes that will be converted to text labels The Source Layer list shows all Area Point and or Text layers in the current document For each layer the Column drop down list is populated with the attribute structure of that layer You must choose a column that holds the attributes you wish to label the data with Target Text Layer In the Text layer drop down lists s you must specify a Text layer that the labels will be output to Note you can only output labels to text layers in the same MAP View as the Source Layer LABEL SETTINGS MAPublisher provides options to specify label preferences such as label position alignment to lines of latitude minimum font sizes and hor
268. l 0 Group Ctri G Open Recent Files gt Toe ih reir Browse in Bridge Alt Ctrl O lod gt Import Map Data gt Simple Shift Ctrl 1 kA Alt Ctrl 2 Share My Screen Advanced Alt Shift Ctri A Hide gt Device Central anc SERER E cl o p 7 Filters gt Save As Shift Ctrl S Expand Appearance Save a Copy Alt Ctrl s Flatten Transparency Save as Template Rasterize Check In Create Gradient Mes Save for Web amp Devices Alt Shift Ctrl S ee _ Slice gt Place zi Path gt Save for Microsoft Office Blend gt Export Envelope Distort gt gt Live Paint gt Scripts Live Trace gt Document Setup Alt Ctrl P Text Wrap gt Document Color Mode gt ioni gt File Info Alt Shift Ctrl 1 c J Path gt Print Ctrl P Convert to Artboards l Graph gt Exit Ctrl Q Edit Scale Bar Alt Ctrl D New Window Arrange gt Workspace gt E f The MAPublisher panels can be found pray under the Window menu Actions Align Shift F7 Appearance Shift F6 Attributes Ctrl F11 Brushes F5 Color F6 Color Guide Shift F3 MAF Attributes Document Info MAP GPS Panel Alt Shift Ctrl Flattener Preview MAP Stylesheets Gradient Ctrl F9 v MAP Views Alt Shift Ctrl F7 Graphic Styles Shift F5 MAP Point Plotter Alt Shift Ctrl P n vere MAP Selection Filters Alte ctrl4F v Layers F7 et MAP Selection Stats Alt Shift Ctrl 4 Magic Wand MAP Location Alt Shift Corl L MAPublisher gt MAP Web
269. l layer MM Index_Label v gre ne an ae m ta Advanced Click this button to j Sae fre ips ee ne 7 Feature layer City_Symbol Is open the Advanced dialog etermine w at features to index by box below enabling you to matching label text on the selected Label text matches attribute NAME a me nie specify additional options for Label layer to the indicated attribute your index on the Feature layer An index will be akrana will APEE mary E piers TES t indica yer indicated attribute x crea every created for every grid cell in which the e ar saqeary labelled feature can be found Advanced Options Sort index by You can choose to sort the Sort index by Feature label entries in the index file by either feature Index Delimiter label or grid cell address Tab Index Delimiter Select a delimiter for the index file Tab Comma or Custom If you choose Custom enter the desired delimiter into the adjacent entry field Comma Custom FUNCTIONALITY When a Grid or set of Graticules have been created the Make Index filter can be used to generate an index for your map based on the position of text elements in referenced grid cells Index files generated using this function are produced as a simple text file and sorted alphabetically A typical file would be formatted as follows Melrose Place B 4 Richview Avenue A 5 Sesame Street A 4 Wisteria Lane B 5 PREREQUISITES In order to facilitate the creation of
270. l occurrences matching the Find what variable Case sensitive If checked only values matching the case of the Find what variable will be found Match whole word only If checked only words matching the Find what variable will be found words containing the variable will be ignored The Find amp Replace tool allows for the searching and or replacing of attribute values and properties contained in the MAP Attributes panel Note that only values in visible columns can be found and or replaced USING FIND amp REPLACE Access the tool by clicking the Find amp Replace button or menu item in the MAP Attributes panel Find Only To use Find amp Replace to easily find values click the Find tab to enter the search criteria Find criteria can be typed directly into the Find what entry field previous criteria can be selected from the list A search may be performed on all attributes by default or only on specific columns contained within the MAP Attributes panel by enabling the Just option and choosing a column from the list Criteria may be further refined by enabling the Case sensitive and Match whole word only options Once the search string has been entered click the Find Next button in order to perform the search Search results can be seen in the MAP Attributes panel the column header and row number containing the first matching record will be displayed in bold text At this point search for individual records can be done by cli
271. lPro P MAP Selection Filters Show filters on two lines Enable this gt ete option to display the selection filter 5 MAP Stylesheets name and its expression on two EF Editor separate lines Panel MAP Views EE Editor Panel MAP Stylesheets Preferences The MAP Stylesheets preference category does not contain general settings but has sub categories for the MAP Stylesheets editor and panel see chapter 9 for a full description of the MAP Stylesheets editor and panel MAP Stylesheets gt Editor Preferences MAPublisher Preferences Ge General MAP Attributes Panel R MAP LabelPro P MAP Selection Filters Maximum values to load Maximum Panel number of attribute values that are amp MAP Stylesheets loaded in list of values of the Simple i Expression dialog box MAP Views E Editor Panel 28 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Preferences MAP Stylesheets gt Panel Preferences MAI a ay i Sort list using natural string comparison Enable this option to use the natural T General MAP Stylesheets gt Panel Lox sorting for layer and MAP Stylesheet MAP Attributes names using numbers e g 1 2 10 instead of 1 10 2 a anai mi y 5 panel Sort list using natural string comparison L e 5 P MAP Selection Filters MAP Stylesheet sort style Name then type MAP Stylesheet sort style By default p Panel the General sorting style is applied
272. layer to the destination layer MAP Selection Filters Panel Preferences MAP SELECTION FILTERS v Capital Cities CAPITAL true lt Interstate ADMN_CLASS Interstate CAPITAL true x Interstate ADMN_CLASS Interstate Toll TOLL_RD Y Toll TOLL_RD Y Show filters on two lines cleared Show filters on two lines selected FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher Selection Filters allow you to build edit and apply multiple selection criterias based on the attributes and properties contained in MAP Layers Selection criterias are created in an expression builder Selection filters can be applied to any MAP layer and are saved in the document so that they can be edited or applied later Expressions created in the MAP Selection Filters may be re used for MAP Attributes and MAP Stylesheets expression builders see chapter 5 CREATING A SELECTION FILTER To open the MAP Selection Filters panel choose Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Selection Filters or click the MAPublisher toolbar button P This panel will contain a list of all the selection filters in the current document Create a new MAP Selection Filter by clicking the Create New Selection Filter button or panel options menu This will open the New Selection Filter dialog box The Name text box can be edited to describe the selection filter or its intention For example a selection filter could be named Cities or Countries with 80 or higher litera
273. le while 20 indicates the corner to be rounded to a arc circle BubbleGradientEnabled True or False Apply or not a gradient effect on the callout bubble BubbleDropShadowEnabled True or False Display not a drop shadow behind the callout bubbles DropShadowAlpha Transparency level of the drop shadow 0 0 is full transparency 1 0 is opaque 160 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Web Export Advanced Settings DropShadowAngle 0 to 359 Direction of the drop shadow for callout bubbles DropShadowAngle here 45 hh DropShadowDistance DropshadowColor Color of the drop shadow for callout bubbles DropShadowDistance Distance between the edge of the callout bubble and the drop shadow in the direction specified by DropShadowAngle DropShadowStrength Fuzziness of the drop shadow for callout bubbles 0O is the most fuzzy looks as if there is no shadow 50 is the most sharp almost looks like opaque sharp black shadow BubbleArrowEnabled True or False Display or not an arrow pointing to the clicked point from the callout bubble Callout bubble body j aa Callout bubble arrow ArrowBaseDistanceFromEdge Distance from the arrow base to the edge of the callout bubble ArrowBaseWidth Width of the arrow base ArrowTipX Distance on a X axis from the clicked position to the edge of the callout bubble ArrowTipY Distance on a Y axis from the clicked position to the edge of the callou
274. lisher Add Area dialog box will appear into which you can enter specific dimensions for the area to be drawn If you wish to have the area centered over the click point simply check the Center area on click box If you do not check this box an area will be drawn from its upper left corner Click OK to plot the shape RESULTS Plotting a shape using either of these methods will initially select the features that fall inside the area in whole or part Therefore these tools can be also useful for selecting features that are within designated distances away from a central location 92 Chapter 7 Drawing Tools MAP Area Tools MAP Vector Crop Tool Tools gt MAP Vector Crop H FUNCTIONALITY By using the MAP Vector Crop Tool the entire map drawing vector data can be trimmed to a certain area of interest Typically the tool is meant to crop imported vector data that might be covering a larger area than the intended map extents Used on a copy of the full original MAP View MAP Vector Crop can also be utilized to create map insets smaller maps centered on specific areas see example below PREREQUISITES Before using the MAP Vector Crop tool ensure that the layers to be trimmed are visible and unlocked in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Similarly layers that are not supposed to be cropped should be locked or invisible The extent of the map that will remain after cropping must be visible on the screen so make sure to zoom out sufficient
275. long but rather in a coordinate system appropriate for the particular projection For most file formats the name of the projection datum and units will be recognized by MAPublisher However if the program cannot find this information in the data and you wish to subsequently reproject your data you will be required to specify the coordinate system Additionally please be aware that MAPublisher is a 2D mapping program Therefore if you attempt to import 3D data with MAPublisher it will be converted to two dimensional artwork by the importers NOTE Data provided in a generic latitude and longitude unprojected coordinate system will usually be recognized as a WGS 84 World Geodetic System 1984 EPSG 4326 coordinate system by the MAPublisher importers 38 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats Import and Export Supported Data Formats Importing Map Data The Import filters are the main starting point for most users wanting to work with GIS map data in Adobe Illustrator These filters are used to import GIS data files set the initial map scale and define your cartographic workspace to start making maps _e i a z PA Re Jag rf i p zt lt 2 MAPublisher 8 supports import of the following GIS data formats CAD dxf dwg ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI Arclnfo Generate gen ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 2 0 MapInfo Interchange mif mid MapInfo Table tab MicroStation Design
276. lpoly edu collections gis webresources html United State Geological Survey Department of the Interior USGS home page This is the primary source for Digital Line Graph DLG files A must have resource is the US Geological Survey Digital Format Standards manual published by the USGS http www usgs gov USGS Home page http www usgs gov ngpo National Geospatial Program http www usgs gov pubprod index html Products and Publications Listings A1 28 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Online Links http greenwood cr usgs gov The USGS Greenwood map server United States Fish and Wildlife Service The FWS carries a variety of map data in the USGS DLG format http www fws gov USACE IENC download The US Army Corps of Engineer distributes inland ENC files in S 57 format They can be freely downloaded on the web site http www tec army mil echarts inlandnav main html download OTHER VALUABLE MAPPING LINKS The following are some additional places on the Internet where you can find news reviews tips and general GIS cartographic and geographic information GIS Cafe http www giscafe com GIS Dictionary http www geo ed ac uk agidict welcome html GIS Lounge http www gislounge com GIS Development http www gisdevelopment net University of Edinburgh http www geo ed ac uk home gishome html University of Florida Geoplan Center http www geoplan ufl edu US C
277. ly editing the styles of artwork after MAP Stylesheets have been applied if any style rules have simple equalities Similarly as styles and symbols which exist in these Adobe Illustrator panels are linked to the related MAP Stylesheet entries using these styles and symbols to create new artwork will automatically assign the related attribute value to these objects when the same criteria are met Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets 109 MAP Stylesheet Editor Point Data Regarding the editing of Point Data you must use either MAP Stylesheets or the MAP Attributes panel to change symbology As point data is linked dynamically to the symbols which exist in the Symbols panel you cannot edit graphical properties manually Choosing Break Link to Symbol from the Symbols panel options will result in the loss of attributes for your point data NOTE MAP Stylesheet can be quickly created when using equality operators If the first rule created is Capital Y by clicking Add the next rule will be created using the next unique attribute value Capital N Creating rules like this will use the next graphic style in the Style column Symbols graphic styles and characters styles will be displayed alphabetically in the Style column Unique attribute values will be displayed alphabetically and numerically when creating expression rules Therefore when creating a map that requires a style for each unique attribute value create the first rule and click Add to auto pop
278. ly prior to starting the vector crop tool NOTE Invisible and locked layers will not be cropped Users should save a copy of the Adobe document prior to performing a crop Due to some Adobe Illlustrator limitations text typed on a path might not return to their prior state after an undo USING THE MAP VECTOR CROP Click the MAP Vector Crop button t in the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel then click and drag a rectangle over the art board Upon release of the mouse button the crop function is completed If the remaining map is too large the MAP Vector Crop can be run again on the remaining data If the remaining map is too small the MAP Vector Crop can be undone menu Edit gt Undo and run again RESULTS On all visible and unlocked layers e Text objects that have their anchor outside of the cropping rectangle are deleted Text objects with their anchor inside the cropping rectangle are retained completely e Points falling outside of the cropping rectangle are deleted the position of the center of the symbol is relevant Symbols that have their center inside the cropping rectangle are maintained as a whole e Lines are clipped at the boundary of the cropping rectangle e Areas polygons that are completely out of the cropping rectangle are deleted Areas intersecting with the cropping rectangle are clipped and closed following the edge of the rectangle The overall result is a map coverage reduced to the cropping rectangle outlin
279. ly used in imagery applications such as Avenza s Geographic Imager for Adobe Photoshop or in other Adobe Illustrator documents using MAPublisher NOTE Exporting linked images in CMYK color mode will create an incorrect result These images must either be set to a different mode or embedded prior to exporting In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Export Image is found in the Filter gt MAP Images menu 130 Chapter 12 Working With Images Export Image Grids and Indexes lt 3 NE E SHD diag n Ty MAR K MAPublisher contains tools to easily create map grids and map indexes Grids can be created for reference purposes or to follow designated lines such as latitude and longitude and ins can also be labelled for indexing When a labelled grid has Oph lt be K been established MAPublisher is able to generate index files E K containing the location of text objects in MAP Layers E A Topics covered in this section p Grid and Graticules ey m i Make Index i y y ti he ele a A ae Chapter 13 Grids and Indexes 131 Grids and Graticules Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend gt Grids and Graticules or MAP Toolbar FE Object gt Edit Grid Edit Graticules Grids and Graticules EE Sa Rag SRA EL fad OAT RTE ELIS OAS ASTD DIS NMS EM ON ATC MERION AIA LC Advanced Access the Advanced Grid Graticule Selection Click the BSG Le dialog box to specify additional appropriate button to select the Bres
280. m points are _Identification Definition Specify Extents Points Point Style Geodetic Point 2d in Degree m Minimum Point Longitude 28 64 Latitude 59 87 Maximum Point Longitude 10 32 Latitude 69 23 Envelope Editor Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems A2 9 The Geodetic Datasource Horizontal Datums For Horizontal datums you must select the Ellipsoid the datum is based on as well as the prime meridian used Ellipsoid Bessel 1841 Horizontal Datum Editor Linear Units For Linear units you must enter a conversion for the new unit in terms of the scientific standard metres The abbreviation is used to identify the unit within the application interface Example The Abbreviation for metres is m amp Linear Unit Editor X Abbreviation brealey Units Per Meter 0 0026666666666667 Linear Unit Editor A2 10 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource Prime Meridians For Prime Meridians you must enter the longitude value of the Prime Meridian and the angular unit that value is in Coe S amp Prime Meridian Editor Identification Definition Longitude Value 4 367975 Units Degree Prime Meridian Editor WORKING WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS A coordinate system within MAPublisher defines a mathematical model of the conversion between a specific location on the Earth and a set of coordinates This model is specified
281. m the labelling operation based on these settings Save Save the current settings in the LabelPro configuration dialog box without performing any labelling Setup Layers Open the Setup Layers dialog box to choose which layers are to be used for labelling and or obstacles Advanced Specify user defined extents for labelling operations oevvrr FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher LabelPro labelling engine offers advanced labelling capabilities beyond those available in MAPublisher Feature Text The MAP LabelPro engine contains sophisticated algorithms based on MapText s EZ Label technology that solves many of the most common map labelling problems such as complex conflict resolution across multiple layers the ability to specify data as obstacles and the ability to create complex labelling conventions via user defined rules The MAP LabelPro engine uses map data attributes for labelling and provides a much greater level of sophistication and control that can be configured through an intuitive user interface Data layers may be assigned an order of prioritization for labelling sequences and the ability to recognize existing type as obstacles for multiple labelling sessions if necessary Placement rules and properties once set can be saved to a file and imported into other files or shared over a network Only Point Line and Area layers can be labelled using MAP LabelPro however Text layers may be used as obstacles PREREQUISITES
282. mmon weeding algorithms include distance traversed algorithm Nth point selection algorithm angle selection algorithm William point relaxation algorithm and Douglas Peucker algorithm TIFF Tagged Image File Format a common raster graphic file format Tile A discrete part of the Earth s surface By splitting a study area into tiles considerable savings in access times and improvements in system performance can be achieved Topographic map A map showing natural and man made features as well as relief often in the form of contours Topography The study of the relief of a given area on the Earth s surface usually on a large scale including both natural and man made features Topology The way in which geographic features relate to each other Spatial relationships among features including adjacency and connectivity Relative position as opposed to absolute position specified by coordinates angles and distances Toponym The place names of a region or map feature Transform The process of changing the scale projection or orientation of a mapped image TRIM A GIS data file format from the Terrain Resource Information Management of British Columbia Canada U Ungenerate The file format created by the ArcInfo Ungenerate function UNIX A general purpose multi user computer operating system URL Universal Resource Locator or Internet address USGS United States Geological Survey UTM Universal Transverse Merc
283. movement of layers between MAP Views MAP Stylesheets Panel The MAP Stylesheets panel has been revamped for speed and stability The panel should also provide better feedback about the states of layers and MAP Stylesheets The popular Switch To button from the MAP Views panel has also made it into the MAP Stylesheets panel allowing you to facilitate the movement of layers from one stylesheet to another with just a couple of quick clicks What s New in MAPublisher 8 Xi Getting Started Before using MAPublisher please read this section to ensure that you have a suitable hardware environment are familiar with the installation and activation procedures and adequately prepare your system and workspace to make maps with Adobe Illustrator and MAPublisher 8 G Meshes ee A Hp Wh f lia ES NS gt eS sl eT E Topics covered in this section System Requirements Installation Instructions MAPublisher Compatibility Notes MAPublisher License Management The MAPublisher Tools The MAPublisher Toolbar MAPublisher Preferences Preparing the Workspace Chapter 1 Getting Started 13 System Requirements Before installing MAPublisher 8 please ensure that you have sufficient system resources as outlined below WINDOWS e Adobe Illustrator CS3 CS4 e Intel Pentium 4 processor or higher Dual core recommended e Windows XP Vista e 1 GB of RAM minimum 2 GB of RAM or higher recommended e 300 MB of available hard disk space
284. mported you may find that the import filter starts to run more slowly This is because scratch and memory allocations are being used up Try the following suggestions e Close the MAP Attributes panel prior to importing data e Periodically save your work then close and reopen the file This will free up the available scratch memory e Reduce the maximum number of undoes since they all reside in memory e See the Memory Considerations section for other suggestions in this appendix A1 16 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide Frequently Asked Questions DATA IMPORT ISSUES Why do my files appear squashed after import They are probably stored in geographic or lat long coordinates Data in lat long usually looks squashed You can project them into an alternate map projection using the MAP View Editor see chapter 4 What alternatives are there for importing a file format not supported by MAPublisher We provide a web page that has links to freeware shareware and commercial GIS data translators at http www avenza com support links html lf you cannot find the translator that you need give us a call as we may have other suggestions lam having trouble getting my layers to overlay correctly Both files import correctly when they are imported alone but when import the second file they do not line up as expected They should overlay correctly Probably they are in different coordinate systems It is very important that you ensure
285. n SS ne J Curent MXOR The M XOR button will select both the currently selected features and the Saved gt saved selection if these selections do not overlap However if the current sein selection includes any features that are part of the saved selection those will be deselected 124 Chapter 11 Making Selections MAP Selection Stats Clareville iong ag MUOGAMANRA NATURE RESER thee pu A 1a y Working With Images MAPublisher contains tools for working with georeferenced raster images such as aerial photography and satellite imagery The Register Image filter accurately registers raster images with georeferencing information to vector map data The Export Image filter exports raster images with various georeferenced formats Georeferencing information for raster images are usually stored in a separate text file except GeoTIFF where the image and its associated reference file have the same file name but a different file extension The reference file formats that can be read by Register Image or written to by Export Image are World tfw Image Report irp MapInfo TAB tab ListGeo lgo Geol IFF tif a single file containing both the image and its reference data Topics covered in this section Register Image Export Image Chapter 12 Working With Images 125 Tie Pointst Change the tie point of the image by clicking another corner of the graphic Image Sizet Specify the size of e
286. n Table Source Table Lists the selected external data table and its path Click the Browse button to select the sane data table to be joined p Filename q Settings david Desktop Data uscities CSV Cancel Source Matching Column Select a column Maiden E STATE_NAME from the source table to match toa column in the destination layer First line contains column names First line contains column names For Delimited Text type tables check Character encoding System re a cae nea H this box to use the first line to derive a Sate Sano Sees column names selected dataset uses a double byte Destination character set Target Layer usa_area Target Layer Select the layer containing the MAP Attribute table about to be a PEE S SR S STATE_NAME joined with the source table z Destination Matching Column Select a Option column from the destination layer to match to a column in the Source Table Case sensitive If checked values from C Case sensitive the two matching columns will be matched up case sensitively FUNCTIONALITY Join Table provides the ability to merge external data tables directly into an existing MAP Layer attribute schema in order to create a single extended attribute table Three of the most common table formats are supported e dBase dbf e USGS SDTS ddf e Delimited Text csv tsv txt Excel xls When exporting tables from spreadsheet applications for use with MAPublisher the
287. n an existing MAP View in your document by using the Same As feature For an overview of Projections and Datums see appendix A2 46 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Advanced Import Generally most users should ignore the Coordinate System section when choosing the Import files as the program will read the coordinate system automatically if the file format supports such information If you wish to view the parameters of a certain coordinate system click the Info button Format Specific Settings Certain file formats will offer additional configuration parameters which can be accessed by clicking the Settings button These file formats are ESRI Interchange File CAD DWG DXF MicroStation DGN MapInfo MIF MID MapInfo TAB KML and Delimited Text Data Select your file s first If the format accepts additional settings the Settings button will be enabled See the Import Settings at the beginning of this chapter for an overview of the meanings of these options MicroStation Design file import is not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta operating system t Additional Settings are mandatory only for importing Delimited Text Data Delimited Text Data Settings MAPublisher also allows for the import of delimited text files as point data provided they contain coordinate values Delimited text import allows the user to import many different formats including Decimal Degrees DMS Degrees Minutes Degrees MinutesSeconds Delimited DMS and Packed DMS MAP
288. n extensive geodetic parameter database The contents of the Geodetic Datasource can be browsed or searched by using a search frame Users can extend MAPublisher Geodetic Datasource to support an unlimited number of custom linear and angular units ellipsoids datums datum shifts and coordinate systems MAPublisher Geodetic Datasource Editor is accessed from the MAP Views panel options menu Edit Geodetic Datasource file Coordinate systems may also be edited created from the Specify Destination Coordinate System dialog box started from Specify button in MAP Views panel and import dialog boxes but the other geodetic objects are only accessible through Edit Geodetic Datasource Individual entries in the Geodetic Datasource are known as Objects There are different types of objects for different types of definition Objects contained in the Geodetic Datasource are Angular Units Type of units for measuring rotation e g degrees or radians e Coordinate Points Point Style A coordinate point is used to define the orientation of axes used and the type of units used in the system e Coordinate Systems Coordinate Reference Systems A coordinate system is a complete definition needed to express the context of a set of map data Datum Shifts Parameters to transform coordinates from one Datum to another e Ellipsoids An Ellipsoid gives a horizontal datum its size and shape An ellipsoid does not have an origin and cannot be used as a b
289. n multiple users are working on the same project Existing styles may be deleted by selecting it from the Style drop down list and then clicking on the Lui delete button Style files are saved to either a point line or area folder depending on the type of map layer it is associated with By default styles are saved in the following location Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Styles Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 LabelPro Styles Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In LabelPro Styles The default save path for the Styles can be modified in the MAP LabelPro section of the MAPublisher Preferences dialog box Choose Edit gt MAPublisher Preferences Windows or choose Illustrator gt MAPublisher Preferences Mac NOTE Windows XP and Vista users must install PostScript Type 1 fonts directly into the Windows system font folder so that it can be used in MAP LabelPro styles Please be aware that Adobe Illustrator includes Myriad which is such a font and will result in an error or incorrect results if used for labelling NOTE Attributes consisting of Unicode characters must be labelled with a Unicode font that contains the appropriate characters For example attempting to label Japanese characters with an Arial font will result in an error or incorrect results 180 Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro MAP LabelPro Styles LABELLING LINE DATA WITH SYMB
290. nchronized For example the second geometric entity in the mif file has the attributes held in the second row of the mid file The number and type of attributes associated with each entity is specified by the user There must be at least one attribute field in the mid file Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions mif mid Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute mif_type Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import e Import as Visible Attributes Enable this option to view the pen and brush pattern values in the imported attribute table The MAPublisher MID MIF importer supports the storage of point line polyline arc ellipse rectangle rounded rectangle region polygon and text geometric data in mif files Each geometric entity present in a mif file has display properties such as pen and brush width pattern and colour Supported MID MIF properties are as follows MAPublisher supports the import of line weights 0 7 colours 24 bit RGB strokes 1 71 It also supports fonts family style justification for
291. nctuation so that the results give a sense of how actual labels would be placed based on the rule settings Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro 175 Attribute Select the attribute column containing the data to be used as labels for selected features MAP LabelPro Object gt Filters gt MAP LabelPro or MAP Toolbar agi Destination Specify a destination from a list of available text layers The Priority If multiple layers are being simultaneously labelled assign a priority level to Style Create a new label style or choose from a list of established Rules Select a default set of rules or create custom rules that Source Displays MAP 7 Views and its associated MAP Layers specified in Setup Layers Obstacle layers Displays MAP Views and its associated MAP Layers specified as obstacles during the labelling session 4 San Francisco Downtown Highways _line B Lanc_area LAND labels E Ramp_line SCHOOL _labels Streets_line Label Case Options Label all art on source layers Label only selected art on source layers Exactly as found in source attribute C Convert to lower case Statistics type destination layer each labelling operation label styles dictate how labels holds the labels The same priority can be are placed set to multiple layers MAP LabelPro Source Attribute Destination Priority Style Rules Suppression Layer Save
292. nd Highlight Feature To zoom into a specific feature in the attribute table select a single attribute and click the Zoom to Feature button This will automatically fit this feature to the screen and highlight it allowing to examine it closer or to simply locate it on the map To highlight a specific feature on the page maintaining the current zoom level click one attribute of that feature Property Attributes The attribute table can also be configured to display property attributes for datasets These attributes describe the current assignment of graphical properties such as the stroke weight style rotation and scale These fields are editable and provide the ability to modify a map objects graphical properties directly within the context of the MAP Attributes panel To edit a property attribute for a particular map object either double click within the appropriate property cell and directly enter a value or choose from an available drop down list depending on the property type being edited Once these changes have been entered into the MAP Attributes panel the modified art elements are graphically updated within the map to reflect these changes 72 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes MAP Attributes Panel Edit Schema MAP Attributes panel gt Edit Schema Edit Column New Column Edit Schema Name Edit the name of the selected column here A 5 Name Name STATE_NAME x I AreaDirection f Up Down Click
293. nd provide the Machine ID displayed in the MAPublisher License Management dialog box We will then send you an email with a zipped license file attachment You must unzip this attachment and save the lic file to the appropriate folder The license file is located in the following directories Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Alternatively users may right click on a row in the License Management dialog box started from the menu Help gt MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management and click on the menu item Browse to license folder This opens a file browser at the dedicated MAPublisher license file directory for your operating system Keeping this browser opened users can past in the license file received directly at the appropriate location License Management Bi Cen terse Check license usage Ser a Feature Version Type Status MAPublisher 8 0 Oo Evaluate Retrieve licenses E3 Browse to license folder Chapter 1 Getting Started 19 MAPublisher License Management CHECKOUT A FLOATING LICENSE If you have purchased a floating license please refer to the floating license installation guide provided with your purchase Once the server license is fully operational follow these instructions to check out a license from the client
294. nded to test different coordinate systems and visualize the results For more information on the supported coordinate systems and projections in MAPublisher please refer to the MAPublisher Projections Guide pdf document installed with MAPublisher Examples of appearance of the USA depending of the chosen coordinate system Geodetic gt World gt WGS84 unprojected 120 114 108 A2 2 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems Overview The Geodetic Datasource MAPublisher includes an extensive geodetic parameter database called the Geodetic Datasource It contains all the latest updates from the widely used EPSG Geodetic Parameter Dataset maintained by the Geodesy Subcommittee of OGP International Association of Oil and Gas producers EPSG v6 18 as well as custom systems maintained by Avenza In addition the MAPublisher Geodetic Datasource supports user s custom definitions and allows for importing external WKT Well Know Text and PRJ ESRI projection file parameter files Over 3500 pre defined coordinates systems are readily available for use in most cartographic projects Even though the current list of systems is comprehensive there may be instances where the end users may wish to add a brand new coordinate system to meet their particular needs or perhaps to duplicate and modify an existing definition to change the units for example A complementary Projections Guide is installed with MAPublisher It describes all the projectio
295. nel or on the MAP Toolbar or open the panel through Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Location With the cursor scroll around your map document and note how the map units update with the location of the mouse With the MAP Location Panel open the values will be constantly updated regardless of the tool that is selected When the MAP Location Tool button is enabled in the Adobe Illustrator Tools panel users are able to copy the coordi nates of a specific location The appropriate layer must be selected in the MAP Views panel the MAP View con taining the layer will determine the MAP Units and coordinate system used to display the positions To copy the positions e Position the cursor at the desired location e Click the document while holding the Shift key The X and Y position in map units are copied to the clipboard and can be paste into any text editor Only one set of coordinates can be copied at once When shift click is used again the values copied previously will be overwritten NOTE When the cursor is placed outside of the MAP View extent of the selected layer positions values are indicated as Unavailable 66 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Location Tool weve 1 Of x 6012 MAP BESAN 528 i f F x j teu Ath Atti ibutes i 4922X A Granites Salt Creek Rapids Rapids Za AN BAA MAPublisher can import GIS files into Adobe Illustrator while retaining both geograph
296. nel will export as CMYK 3 Linked images in CMYK mode regardless of the color mode of the document will export with an incorrect result and should therefore be avoided see chapter 12 If the image is EMBEDDED consider the following 1 The image will be exported in the colour mode of document i e an embedded grayscale image in a CMYK document will be exported as a CMYK image whereas an embedded CMYK image in an RGB document will be exported as an RGB image 2 Embedded grayscales do NOT pick up the document colour model i e an embedded grayscale image will be exported as grayscale 3 The export of embedded Bitmap images is not supported KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS This version of MAPublisher supports the use of keyboard shortcuts in order to increase the efficiency of the user and to make it easier to access commonly used dialog boxes and menus By default the Simple and Advanced Import dialog boxes can be accessed by pressing Shift Ctrl l and Alt Shift Ctrl A respectively All other MAPublisher tools can have keyboard shortcuts manually set by accessing the Adobe Illustrator Keyboard Shortcut dialog box which is located under Edit gt Keyboard Shortcuts Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 37 General Tips and Hints Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems Overview In the MAPublisher application the coordinate system option must be entered at two levels coordinate system of the source data when importing GIS data and coordinate
297. nes A Proximity value should be entered and proximity Units assigned Units can be specified in map units or page units Entering a proximity value of zero will only join line segments that are touching If the distance between the end of a segment and the start of another is greater than the set proximity value these lines will not be joined If two line segments in the selection are separated by a distance less than the set proximity value check the Close Segment Gaps option to create a line segment that connects the two lines When not selected a compound path will be created When you have entered your preferences for the join click OK On the newly created Line layer view the layer s attributes in the MAP Attributes panel Note that the only attribute columns present are the default Property columns and the attribute column you specified for your join In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Join Lines is found in the Filter gt MAP Lines menu 98 Chapter 8 Line Functions Join Lines Join Points Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines gt Join Points or MAP Toolbar _ F Join Points Input Layer Use this drop down list to Jiii select the Point layer containing the laye aad pak al symbols you wish to join i Allpoints Selected points All Points Selected Points risen Paes Output Layer Enter the name of the You can choose to join only those output layer This new layer will contain points that have been selecte
298. ng on a given object s attribute value MAPublisher offers many functions and tools to manage GIS data from within Adobe Illustrator They are described in detail in this manual e Plot a symbol by typing in its world coordinates MAP Point Plotter e Draw objects with geographic dimensions MAP Area Tools e Trim the geographic extents of the map MAP Vector Crop e Join lines or points that share a same attribute value simplify lines create a buffer area around a line MAPublisher line functions e Automatically label features based on attribute data MAP LabelPro Feature Text Label and MAP Tagger Tool e Select features based on attributes MAP Selection Filters e Import and export geographically referenced images e Create grids and indexes e Create scale bars and north arrows e Export your map to Flash with populated Web tags MAP Web Author e Export layers to major GIS and CAD formats e Connect to a GPS device for real time symbol or line tracing MAP GPS e And more viii Introduction What s New in MAPublisher 8 MAP Web Author Use the new MAP Web Author tool to create interactive Flash maps for Web based content complete with rollovers pop ups and layer control A number of options are available to design your Web tags e Include Images and set their size Use MAP Attributes to automatically populate the text field Type and style custom text Insert hyper links Users can design templates
299. nge Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 69 Attributes Foreword IMPORTANT ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR COMPATIBILITY NOTES Some Adobe Illustrator functions may cause the link between artwork objects and their attributes to be broken resulting in possible data loss These functions are e Compound path Make e Pathfinder Live Paint e Gradient mesh e Blob brush Adobe Illustrator CS4 If required users should first duplicate their working layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel before using these functions The original layer can be kept for labelling see chapter 10 or for information purposes 70 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Attributes Foreword MAP Attributes Panel Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Attributes and MAP Toolbar E Click header to sort column Click and drag separator Edit Column Edit the properties values alpha numerically to resize the columns New Column of the selected column Edit STATE_NAME Delete STATE_NAME Delete Column To delete the currently selected column MAP ATTRIBUTES Edit Schema f Find amp Replace Layer Selection If data is e Lower48 49 Erare s lected onra numberof See Lower 6_area 9 areas Apply Export attributes export all layers select the map layer See eae SISTATE_NAME POPULATION BiDraw _ 70 Table selected attribute information containing the attributes to 1 Aids1 51715 786000 Alabama 444
300. ngitude format Click the Select button to open the Select Coordinate System dialog box and choose any coordinate system Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing the layer names to Find what Type in the variable contained in the current layer names on which you wish to search 53 MAP Views Panel OVERVIEW The MAP Views panel displays a list of all the Adobe Illustrator layers in the current document and each defined configuration for geospatial parameters coordinate system anchors map scale and rotation Every MAP Layer will be shown in this panel as belonging to a particular MAP View Adobe Illustrator layers that do not have georeferencing information e g layers existing in the document prior to import are placed in the Non MAP layers category Categories are symbolized in the following manner MAP View Contains layers with georeferencing and attribute information s Non MAP layers Contains layers with no georeferencing or attribute information Each layer that belongs to a MAP View is symbolized in MAPublisher panels and dialog boxes with an icon identify ing its feature type A Area layer e g county boundaries urban areas country outlines etc Line layer e g rivers roads railways etc Pointlayer e g town and city symbols railway stations etc Text layer e g text labels Legend layer for MAPublisher Legend items North Arrows Scale Bars Grids Layers are sorted alphabe
301. not available for editing Check to make sure that the desired layer is available for editing the features in question are not locked and you have a Text layer in your document to use to output the text to In addition if there is no fill to an area or polygon object the label tool much like the Adobe Illustrator selection tool can only find the paths defining the unfilled area Therefore in such cases it cannot find the unfilled area and thus cannot label the unfilled area PROJECTION ISSUES How do I know what coordinate system my files are in In MAPublisher the importers will automatically determine the coordinate system of the chosen files if this information is included in the file header or is located in an associated file e g prj If MAPublisher returns a message of lt No Coordinate System Specified gt for the Projection you should first ask your data provider to provide you with this information Also there are a couple of strong hints that may indicate that a file is in lat long Both ArcView and Maplnfo tend to store files in lat long for rapid reprojection This is why most files derived from such sources are stored in lat long A good test to see if a file is in lat long is to look at the Map Anchor values in the MAP View Editor or in the MAP Location Tool Typical Lat Long values will be X between 180 and 180 and Y between 90 and 90 OTHER ISSUES How accurate is MAPublisher georeferencing At this point in time we are
302. ns Buffer Lines Flip Lines Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines gt Flip Lines or MAP Toolbar FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Flip Lines filter reverses the endpoints of a line or an area open or closed path Adobe Illustrator Brushes and Type on a Path tools are designed to position patterns and text depending on the direction of the endpoints Two consequences of this are e Cases occur when labels are placed upside down and backward when using the MAPublisher labelling tools MAP Tagger tool and Feature Text Label see chapter 10 Labelling Functions e When applying graphic styles with a brush pattern to paths manually or using MAPublisher MAP Stylesheets sometimes patterns are not applied at the right side of the line or in the expected orientation In order for the labels or patterns to be consistent for a group of lines flipping some of the lines may be necessary Lines can be flipped on L Line layers and A Area layers In order to use this filter select the lines to be flipped and then go to Filter gt MAP Lines gt Flip Lines or use the MAPublisher toolbar button NOTES e When exporting Area layers to GIS formats polygon outlines must have a positive Area value in the MAP Attributes panel If some values in the Area column are negative and AreaDirection is equal to Counter Clockwise Flip Lines can then be used to reverse the AreaDirection and convert the Area to a positive value For compound paths t
303. ns a unique identifier RCID for each map element that is used to join it with the other data tables For example a particular vector file containing the geography of rivers would contain a data column called RCID Various data tables containing information such as vegetation fish counts or flow rates might be available each also with an RCID column The desired tables are then joined to the initial map attribute table by RCID value using the techniques described in the previous pages To find the SDTS tables to join with the vector map file look for the files which have names that start with the same character string as the name of the vector file MAPublisher imports SDTS files that have the characters CATD at the end of the file name A typical table to import and join with this file might be called HY01CATD ddf Use the MAPublisher table importer with SDTS file type chosen to import these files When you join layer and table you do the join based on the column from the layer matched to the RCID column of the table Several SDTS sample files can be found on your MAPublisher CD in the SDTS_samples folder Note that the CATD catalog file found amongst the SDTS files explains what each table is ROTATING OBJECTS INDIVIDUALLY IN ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR On some occasions you may wish to rotate selected objects about their own centres rather than as a group about a common origin This can be accomplished using the native Adobe Illustrator Transform Each
304. ns and datum shifts methods supported by MAPublisher to assist users in the process of creating or editing a coordinate system The default parameters installed with MAPublisher are stored within read only XML database files referred to as the Geodetic Datasource files named geodata xml and avenza xsp The base datasource files shipped with MAPublisher are installed in the Data Source Files folder at the following location Windows XP C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files Windows Vista C Program Files Avenza MAPublisher 8 Data Source Files Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Data Source Files Custom definitions and parameters are saved or loaded from separate XML files that must always accompanied with a file named geocalc xsd when not present this file can be copied from the Data Source Files folder NOTE When MAPublisher is un installed or a newer release is installed an option will be given to backup the custom coordinates systems The backup files can be found Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 file_backups mm_dd_yy date of the udpate LOADING A GEODETIC DATASOURCE A geodetic datasource or coordinate system database can be loaded into MAPublisher thus greatly extending the coordinate systems available for use You can load a geodetic databas
305. ny labelling requirements Click the Save As button to save the label configuration The rule will be saved with a user assigned name Click OK to apply the current settings Placement Place labels using an offset or ona centerline Offset labels Above or Belowa line Vertical Split places multiple word labels above and below the line and relative to the center of the line If the generated label only has one word it will be placed on the suppression layer The Centerline option places labels directly on top of the line Label joined feature Places e Label joined feature one label on a line that is 5 Label each feature joined together Label each feature Labels Divided highways each and every line segment Divided highways Label multiple road segments with a common symbol such as a Shield Lines must be within 0 25 inch and 75 of the lines must be parallel to be considered a divided highway The divided highway symbol will be placed on the line with the longest geometry Starting Point Specify where the start of the label will be placed with options including Start Center and End Start will have the start of the label placed at the starting point of the line Center will place the label in the center of the line and End will place the label at the end of the line The starting point of a line depends on the direction of the vertices Line Rules Starting Point Pl
306. o Ag d KA e e e e A TA Ra i A Simplify Lines oe aay ea BE MS oO a NO af A A t J SA t 3 A as Co gt r A S ae Chapter 8 Line Functions 95 Static Value If you want to enter a specific value to buffer the selected lines by click this option and enter the value in the adjacent entry field Attribute Value If your line data has a column in its attribute table that contains buffering values click this option and select the column containing the value Buffer Lines Object gt Filters gt MAP Lines gt Buffer Lines or MAP Toolbar e Buffer Lines Width Source Static value 3 53 s Attribute value M Id Output Layer territory Page units Millimeter Page units Millimeter v v Units Select a unit to use for the buffer values The default is the current map unit Output Layer Select the Area layer which will hold the buffered objects FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Buffer Lines filter creates buffer Area objects around the line work This can be useful if you are attempting to calculate distances on each side of a line An example where you would use this tool could be in the planning of new roads where the actual width of the highway is a major consideration PREREQUISITES Your MAP Layer must be a L Line layer to use Buffer Lines Before using this filter you must create an A Area layer in your Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Creat
307. o purchase the software you can open the MAPublisher License Management dialog box from Adobe Illustrator Help menu at MAPublisher Licensing gt License Management click Register button and follow the instructions in the next paragraph REGISTER A PURCHASED COPY OF MAPUBLISHER 1 To activate MAPublisher 8 you must enter the Serial Number which was provided when you purchased the product 2 After installation of MAPublisher 8 click the Register button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box You will be prompted to enter the serial number then fill out the form If you cannot register your purchased license directly from the application due to Firewall limitations then go to www avenza com register or email activation avenza com or phone and provide the Machine ID displayed in the Finish screen We will then send you an email with a zipped license file attachment You must unzip this attachment and save the lic file to the appropriate folder RETRIEVE YOUR MAPUBLISHER LICENSE If you have inadvertently deleted your license file from your hard drive you can click the Retrieve button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box This will download the license file from our server If you cannot retrieve your MAPublisher license directly from the application due to Firewall limitations then go to www avenza com register or email activation avenza com or phone a
308. obe Illustrator requires a significant amount of RAM itself in order to run smoothly Secondly map data sets are often large which increases the need for RAM even further Map data sets contain both vector and attribute data which must be stored in memory Since we are adding a database to Adobe Illustrator this increases the file size which increases the RAM requirements MAPublisher builds a mini GIS application inside Adobe Illustrator so that it can geo code information and attach data to objects This also has some overhead GIS users also often ask why so much more memory is needed with MAPublisher than is with GIS software The graphics environment software of Adobe Illustrator loads the entire file into memory rather than just reading it from disk thus more RAM memory is required When you are importing a large number of files into Adobe Illustrator using MAPublisher you ll notice that the amount of available memory will decrease rapidly and your computer loses speed This is due to the memory management MAPublisher reserves a fairly large amount of memory for each import action which is not properly returned when the import is done or even when it is cancelled The solution is simple save your file close it and open it again It s not even necessary to close Adobe Illustrator itself By closing the file the reserved memory is properly returned RAM SAVINGTIPS Since a percentage of the memory is taken for attribute storage drop any
309. ocations can later be lili ie ough a similar process __ Browse for files Browse for folder Confirm Cancel NOTE You must be connected to the Internet in order to set these permissions If the option Export for Off line Viewing is enabled it is not necessary to set folder permissions Files exported with this option on will not work on line from a Web site To be used on line the Flash map has to be exported again with the option checked off To finally view the exported map browse to the Flash export folder as specified in the Web Export Dialog and open the file index html or name specified as export location in your favorite Web browser Users should be reminded to check that the latest Flash Player version has been installed download from Adobe Web site An outdated viewer might cause images not to be displayed gif format in particular NOTE Depending on the security settings of the Web browser used some warnings may appear when opening files exported with the off line viewing option enabled These can be ignored 158 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Export to Web Web Export Advanced Settings This section describes the different options available in the MAP Web Author Export To Web dialog box advanced options VIEWER STYLE StageQuality Low Medium High Quality of the exported Flash map StageQualityDuringPanZoom Low Medium High Quality of the Flash map while the map is
310. ocument artboard The relationship between Page Anchor and Map Anchor is defined below 3 A Scale is necessary to translate measurements on the ground to measurements on the artboard During the import process the software reads the coordinate system settings from the input file and calculates a scale to best fit the map data on the page The software treats the point at 0 0 in the document Page Anchor as being coincident to the lower left corner of the data in real world coordinates Map Anchor From this point on these two points are dynamically linked MAPublisher uses this anchor point in subsequent data transformations such as rescaling and transforming but also in the creation of grids and to maintain georeferencing on export If a coordinate system has not been defined in the source data the Source Coordinate System has to be manually set in MAPublisher as well as the Scale One should not estimate this information it is usually provided as metadata by data vendors or indicated as text on the original map Also anchors have to be specified manually Map Anchor information can be entered in any coordinate system unit for example latitude and longitude in degree Page Anchor are entered in the document units The most common way to set up an Adobe Illustrator page is to set the page origin 0 0 to coincide with the lower left corner of the map extents If this information is not known any point on the map can be used as long as its
311. of and relationships among geographic features This includes remotely sensed data as well as map data Sphere coordinates X Y locations on the ellipsoidal Earth usually expressed in degrees and minutes Spheroid An ellipsoid of rotation that is flattened at the poles like the Earth Spline A function in MAPublisher that improves the smoothness of curved lines drops redundant points from paths and changes the anchor points on paths to direction points for further manual modifications SPOT An Earth resource satellite with high resolution sensors launched by France in January 1986 Static graphic files Unchanging and uneditable graphic files 7 Thematic Map A map displaying selected kinds of information relating to specific themes such as soil land use etc Theme A user defined perspective on a geographic dataset specified if applicable by a name and feature class or dataset name attributes of interest or data classification scheme Appendix 5 Glossary AD 11 S T Thiessen Polygon A polygon bounding the region closer to a point than to any adjacent point The polygons are drawn so that the lines are of equal distance between two adjacent points Thiessen polygons also known as Voronoi diagrams and Dirichlet tessellations are sometimes used as a crude form of interpolation particularly within the geosciences Thinning Reducing the number of points defining a line while preserving the essential shape of the line Co
312. of Natural Resources offers many links to GIS data and other informational resources http www cgdi gc ca Geography Network The Geography Network is an online resource for finding and sharing world wide geographic content including maps and data from many of the world s leading providers http www geographynetwork com Geogratis Geogratis is a Natural Resources Canada site offering maps satellite imagery and tabular data http geogratis cgdi gc ca GlSuser GlSuser com was launched in February 2004 Their goal is to provide the geospatial technology user with the latest news resources and tools affecting the GIS industry http www gisuser com National Atlas of the United States This site is a great source of a wide variety of data files for the United States http www nationalatlas gov atlasftp htm NOAA ENC Download NOAA distributes its Electronic Navigational Charts in S57 format free of charge on this site http www nauticalcharts noaa gov mcd enc download_agreement htm Doug Price s list of Free Digital GIS Data This site based at the Tennessee Geographic Information Council and the University of Tennessee offers an extensive list of data download links from around the world http www lib utk edu tngic price html Robert E Kennedy Library California Polytechnic State University California Polytechnic State University has various links to US based map inventories http lib ca
313. of five times prior to expiration in order to ensure that you have ample opportunity to renew or not at your discretion You will have the option of renewing your MMP for an additional year at the then prevailing price or canceling without penalty Of course if you cancel or let your MMP lapse you will no longer be entitled to the benefits of the program as outlined above and will thus have to purchase future upgrades at the upgrade price There is a grace period of approximately 30 days from the time of the MMP expiry during which you may still renew without penalty All post expiration renewals will be backdated to the actual expiry date Lapsed Subscriptions Failure to renew your MMP within 30 days from the expiry date will result in a lapsed MMP subscription Lapsed subscriptions may not be renewed and the licensee will be required to purchase support and upgrades accordingly Please direct all MMP questions and purchase inquiries to info avenza com WISHLIST As either a new or experienced MAPublisher user we value your opinions on how we can improve our product Please let us know what functions you would like to see incorporated into future upgrades of MAPublisher e email us at support avenza com Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 31 Technical Support Options General Tips and Hints CREATING ASCII DELIMITED POINT FILES There may be times when you wish to add a point or a series of points to your map but you do not have
314. of the published document Parameters Variable options or choices boundaries of operations or of an object Path A line vector defined by a series of points a string of X Y coordinates PDF Portable Document Format Developed by Adobe a PDF is a file type which can be used to cross Macintosh Windows DOS and UNIX platforms Pixel The smallest unit of information in a grid cell map or raster image Pixel scale The real world distance as represented by a single pixel in a georeferenced image Plug in filter A module supplied separately from the Adobe Illustrator program usually for creating special effects in artwork The MAPublisher application plug in filter is a module that enables the incorporation of GIS and mapping capabilities within the Adobe Illustrator graphics environment PMS Pantone Matching System Point A discrete location represented by a symbol or label usually too small to be displayed as an area or line Polygon Any area bounded by a straight or irregular closed line representing a map component or any other graphic feature Polyline A line made up of a sequence of line segments Positional accuracy The degree to which a position is measured or depicted relative to its correct position as established by either other features or by other accurate processes Postscript A page description language built into many desktop printers and virtually all high end printing systems See the Adobe Illustra
315. oint each time a change in heading is detected as specified by the threshold set in the Point Plot Settings Change in heading points are plotted in addition to the points plotted while completing one of the standard plot options Plot by Time Plot By Distance or Route To use this setting a user must first enable it by selecting the Enable this Auxillary GPS Plot Type from the bottom of the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel The optional settings for Scale Every and Plot Symbol must then also be specified When plotting begins a new layer will automatically be created specifically for the change in heading points This layer will be automatically named based on the name of the current layer upon which the main plotting operation is being conducted with the phrase change_in_heading_ prefixed to it For example if the main plotting is in progress ona layer called ABCD the layer created for the change in heading plots will be named change_in_heading_ ABCD 170 Chapter 16 MAP GPS MAP GPS Point Plot Settings MAP GPS Autosave Settings Accessed from the MAP GPS menu Automatic Save Enable the check box E Automatically Save Document every 5 and set the setting to the desired time for Automatic saving to occur FUNCTIONALITY The MAP GPS Autosave Settings provide the option to have a document automatically saved each time a specified time interval has elapsed This feature allows for users to limit data loss in the instance that hardware
316. oint layers and can be used on both currently selected point symbols or all the point symbols on a specified layer There must be at least two attribute columns on the specified point layer in order to use Join Points To open the dialog box choose Filter gt MAP Lines gt Join Points or click the MAPublisher toolbar button ai USING JOIN POINTS From the Input Layer drop down list select the Point layer containing the points you wish to join Then specify if you wish to join All Points or just the Selected Points on this layer by selecting the appropriate option Specify a name for the Output Layer that this function will generate By default the program will generate a Line layer To generate an Area layer by linking the line end to the start check the Close paths option In the Group By Column drop down list select the attribute column containing the common attributes you wish to join together For example to join points based on a unique ID you should select the column containing the common ID names This will result in point symbols containing the same name being joined together In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Join Points is found in the Filter gt MAP Lines menu Chapter 8 Line Functions 99 Join Points As each point that is joined will be represented by a node in a line string you must now specify a logical order by which the points will be joined For example it is logical that the point which was captured by a GPS
317. older does not contain a prj file you will be required to specify the coordinate system in order to fully utilize MAPublisher The important things to remember when importing Shapefiles are that the shp file must be the one that is selected through the MAPublisher import filter and that all its component files must be in the same folder You may also find that your Shapefile directory comes with two extra files a sbn and a sbx which hold the spatial index for the geometric data These two files will not exist unless the Shapefile was created with an ESRI product and are not necessary for successful import with MAPublisher 34 Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats Import and Export Supported Data Formats GML Simple Features 2 0 Import and Export The Geographic Markup Language GML was designed as a geographic interface language for the Geo Web It is currently in draft as an ISO standard ISO 19136 The goal of the format is to provide users with a set of abstract base objects that can be built into working real world dataset It uses as XML base to store geometry and feature information that can easily be transported across the Internet The GML Simple Feature Profile was created by the Open Geospatial Consortium OGC as a restricted but useful subset of the GML specification It provides a reduced geometry and metadata profile that can be shared across many GIS tasks This simple feature model can be used as a base to generate local applic
318. ond s Every Sets the intervals at which points will be plotted T Plot Symbol Plot Symbol Choose a symbol to use The symbols displayed here will be the same as those in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel Enable this Auxiliary GPS Plot Type This setting becomes enabled only for the Plot by Change in Speed or Plot By Change in Heading options If the check i box is selected then when Plot by Time Plot by Enable this Auxiliary Distance or Start Route are being used the settings will be applied GPS Piot Type FUNCTIONALITY The MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel is used for controlling all of the settings related to points to be plotted by the GPS In this dialog box users define parameters such as scale interval and point symbol The Point Plot Settings panel also controls the additional auxiliary settings such as change in speed and change in heading Point symbols reflect the symbols found in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel New symbols created or loaded in the Adobe Illustrator Symbols panel will be appended to the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel Use the Type drop down list to enter the settings for Manual Plot Plot By Time Plot by Distance Plot by Change in Speed or Plot by Change in Heading USING THE POINT PLOT SETTINGS PANEL Manual Plot The Manual Plot setting option controls how points will be plotted and styled when using the Manual Plot option from the main MAP GPS panel There are two settings
319. one file per selected toggable layer when the option is selected The Web Export Log information on the file size is meant to warn the users when files get very large Large files should be avoided as they may be very slow to open on a Web site Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 157 Export to Web Visualize Results When exporting Flash map intended for Web distribution do not check the option Export for Off line Viewing In this case some permissions Global Security Settings must be set to allow the browser to open the file to view the produced Flash map on a regular Web browser without posting the file on a server Clicking the Set Permissions button in the Web Export Log dialog box opens the Web page http www macromedia com support documentation en flashplayer help settings_manager04 html containing the Adobe Flash Player Settings N rar Flash Player Settings Manager CEAP 1 Click Edit Locations Global Security Settings 7 F Some webeen may eccone iowa tom other ne wing on oir 2 Click Add Location sites could obtain unauthorized information using the older system When a 4 website attempts to use the older system to access information 3 Click Browse For Folder or copy the full path as written in the Web Export Log Always ask O Always allow gt Always deny dialog box and click Close Always trust files in these locations Edit locations The folder is added in the list of trusted locations L
320. ons regarding the use of MAPublisher If the answer to your question is not included here please consult the online FAQs at http www avenza com products faqg html or the online MAPublisher Forum at http www avenza com forum In addition there is a US Census Bureau GIS FAQ database at http www census gov geo www tiger faq index html INSTALLATION ACTIVATION ISSUES The MAPublisher plug in is in the Plug ins folder but the filters do not all show up in Adobe Illustrator Try exiting out of Adobe Illustrator deleting the Adobe Illustrator preferences and plug in cache files and then restarting Adobe Illustrator They are named AlPrefs Windows or Adobe Illustrator Prefs Mac OS X and Plug in Cache They are generally found in the directories Illustrator CS2 and CS3 Windows XP Documents and Settings user name Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings Windows Vista Users user name AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings Mac OS X Users user name Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings Illustrator CS4 Windows XP Documents and Settings user name Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US Windows Vista Users user name AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US Mac OS X Users user name Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US Also check under Preferences gt Plug ins amp Scratch Disks and ensure that the correct location of yo
321. oordinate system whether this be in one of the files in the list a coordinate system in the current document or a new user specified coordinate system Adding Files In order to select a file or files for import first click the Add button In the Add dialog box the same dialog box as Simple Import you can either leave the Format drop down list as lt Auto detect format gt or set the drop down list to the file type you wish to import If this drop down list is left as lt Auto detect format gt when you search for your GIS file all files will be displayed It is often easier therefore to set the Format drop down list at the required format to ease navigation When you have chosen the format click the Browse button to select your file s and then click Open only one file format can be opened from this Open dialog box Alternatively you can enter the path of the file s in the Dataset text box NOTE The import of multiple of delimited text files is not supported Character Encoding In MAPublisher 8 double byte characters are supported in attributes on import allowing such attributes to be used for labelling and export To assign a codec suitable for your selected dataset choose a value in the list box Source Coordinate System If you are aware that your selected files do not contain Coordinate System information you can either specify it within the Advanced Import Data Source dialog box or you can assign a coordinate system based o
322. option If no rules are enabled MAPublisher will not perform any label scaling If none of the rules specified in the panel can be satisfied MAPublisher will default to placing the label centered over the line Also note that text generated for Line labels will be automatically orientated above the lines irrespective of the direction of line digitization A Area Label MAPublisher will place Area labels intelligently depending on the shape and size of the area polygon Click the Area Labels button to assign MAPublisher Area Label Settings Decide how to place area labels with a high degree of precision or lower degree of precision by choosing the appropriate Placement Accuracy option If the Labels curve with lines of latitude option is selected MAPublisher creates a path that conforms to local line of latitude and place the text along it If this option is not selected the labels are placed horizontally This option is enabled only for MAP Views set with a projected coordinate system Labels can be modified if they exceed the size of the area in the current default font size First select the Adjust label if larger than area option to activate the label rules Rules are executed by MAPublisher in a hierarchical order and can be reordered by clicking the rule and then the Up or Down button 114 Chapter 10 Labelling Functions Feature Text Label Checking the Reduce font size option will allow you to reduce the size of the font
323. or power problems occur while collecting data PREREQUISITES The current document must have already been saved at least once to a local location on the computer If the Autosave setting is activated and the current document has not been saved then a warning will appear upon leaving the Autosave dialog box stating that this feature will not function until the document is saved and will offer the option to manually save the document at that time USING THE AUTOSAVE SETTINGS The Autosave settings may be activated by selecting the associated check box and specifying the number of minutes between autosave instances Once this has been activated and the current document has been saved automatic saves will occur each time the specified interval is reached Chapter 16 MAP GPS 171 MAP GPS Autosave Settings Edit User Attribute for Current Layer Accessed from the MAP GPS menu TT Current Layer Displays the Edit Curent GPs User Atinbute currently selected layer in the ho Oiana Adobe Illustrator Layers panel Create New Opens a dialog box which allows the user to create a new string attribute column on the layer Current Attribute Displays a list of string attribute columns for the current layer Clear Value Will clear the current value Current Value Allows for input of a P entered in the Current Value text field value to be added as an attribute to the current column FUNCTIONALITY The Edit Attribute for C
324. or precise placement of v Line Smoothing Offset Line Check to smooth text along a line Z Reduce horizontal scaling to a minimum of 50 the generated text path Then specify an offset distance for the text path from the Adjust label if larger than line Specify rules for original the scaling of text if the text will not fit onto Label Position Choose how the text will be the text path in its entirety placed on the generated text path Click the Up or Down buttons to adjust Set all labels to same minimum size If at least the order in which the rules will be ee aren eee one label has been reduced in font size implemented in the labelling process due to the implementation of rules then ALL text items will be reduced to that font size in Feature Text Label only Area Label Settings a Placement Accuracy Low faster High slower Area Labels AP C Labels curve with lines of latitude Adjust label if larger than area Labels curve with lines of latitude For projected layers choose this option to E Reduce font size to a minimum of Spt Placement Accuracy If you require area labels generate curved text on latitude lines Y to be placed with high precision in the C Reduce horizontal scaling to a minimum of 50 centre of area objects choose High To Adjust label if larger than line Specify rules ee ee quickly generate labels choose Low for the scaling of text if the text will not fit inside the
325. orted in MAPublisher A1 6 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats MICROSTATION DESIGN DGN DGN are the native files created for Bentley Systems Inc MicroStation product These files consist of a header followed by a series of elements The header contains global information including the transformation equation from design units to user coordinates as well as the dimension of the elements in the file Each element contains standard display information such as its colour level class and style as well as a number of attributes specific to its element type For example a text element has fields for font size and the text string in addition to the standard display attributes Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions dgn Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support No Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute igds_type Point Yes 3D Support Yes Line Yes Text Yes Supported Versions Windows V7 V8 Mac OS X V7 V8 Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import Note versions V7 and V8 are supported for import attached raster files are ignored Group Elements Choose how
326. ose a file containing the georeference information for the selected raster image The information from the file will be inserted into the appropriate fields Coordinate System Indicates the coordinate system of the loaded file for GeoTIFF images Set to unknown by default Units Select a unit to use for the specification of georeferencing information The default selection is the current map unit Feature Type Select the type of feature that exists on the image layer The feature type is indifferent if the layer contains only the image Base Attribute Schema Check this option to copy the attribute schema from an existing MAP Layer The Register Image filter applies geospatial properties to images imported to the document with the Adobe Illustrator Place command i e image placement and pixel or image size entered manually or loaded from a reference file If an image s coordinate system matches one of existing vector data the image can be scaled and rotated to fit the vector data If no matching vector data is found in the document a new MAP view can be created to store the cartographic information of the image to allow for data digitization with accurate positioning Register Image does not have the capability to transform images from one coordinate system to another In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Register Image is found in the Filter gt MAP Images menu 126 Register Image Chapter 12 Working With Images PR
327. ould be placed successfully on the map based on the defined rules Suppression layers are repositories for labels that could not be placed successfully according to the rules and have not met all placement conditions For best viewing results after labelling hide the suppression type text layers Alternately the suppression layer can be set to Ignored and unsuccessfully placed labels will not output to any layer NOTE Rows that have incomplete configuration settings locked destination or suppression layers unspecified destination layers will be displayed in red under the Source list in the configuration dialog box It is normal for a certain percentage of labels to not succeed in being placed due to rule or data conflicts Information regarding the success rate of placement can be reviewed by enabling one of the Statistic type options located in the Options frame PRIORITY The Priority setting allows for complex hierarchical labelling a aT Priority sye Rules Suppress SEQUENCES The priority is the order of preference in which labels are placed Layers with a priority of 1 will be placed first or have a high TREETNAME T HIGHWAY_INTERST 1 Default Default Ignon ANDID i PARK labels 1 Defaut Default Z flgnor Priority Layers with a priority of 12 will be placed last or have a low ACIUTY T SCHOOL abes 1 Default Default Z igor Priority Consequently layers with a low priority might have more suppression labels generated fo
328. outlines etc Line layer e g rivers roads railways etc P Point layer e g town and city symbols railway stations etc T Text layer e g text labels MAPUBLISHER PROPERTY ATTRIBUTES In addition to the attribute values that were created upon data import or within a work session Area Line Point and Text layers are also assigned a number of additional MAPublisher attribute columns These property columns prefixed with a are designed to indicate the physical properties of map art on the Adobe Illustrator canvas Art can be modified directly from the attribute table by making edits to values in these columns The following property columns are attached to valid map layers in this version of MAPublisher A Area layers ID describes the internal unique ID to refer to Adobe Illustrator artwork within the document There will never be two pieces of artwork with the same ID value at the same time This property cannot be set Name describes the name of the polygon Editing this property will change the name in the Layers panel AreaDirection describes the direction as clockwise or counter clockwise Editing this value will reverse the direction accordingly VertexCount describes the number of points in the art This property cannot be set Style describes the Graphic Style in use Editing this property will apply the selected style to the art StrokeWeight describes the stroke weight of the path Editing this property
329. ox is accessed by clicking the menu Filter gt MAP Legend gt Scale Bar or MAPublisher toolbar button Hiii In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Scale Bar is found in the Filter gt MAP Legend menu 140 Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows Scale Bar ADDING A SCALE BAR Standard Options Use the Previous and Next buttons to select the scale bar design you require Note that certain scale bar designs contain two bars and when such a design is selected the Second Bar column of options will be enabled In the Units drop down list specify the units that you wish the scale bar interval s to be based on The default units are that of the current MAP View In the Interval text box s specify a real world distance that each interval of the scale bar will represent This figure will be in the unit you specified in the Units list NOTE A scale bar cannot be created on a MAP View that contains a coordinate system using custom user defined point styles or units Advanced Options Click the Advanced button to show or hide additional scale bar parameters Specify the number of cells in the bar s by entering a figure in the Number of labeled intervals entry field Depending on the style of scale bar you have chosen you can also specify the Number of horizontal lines that will compose the scale bar If you wish some of the intervals or cells in the bar s to be additionally subdivided choose a figure from the Number of intervals to subdivide l
330. page anchors After you have created a new MAP View you must use the Specify Anchors option from the MAP Views panel to define the tie in point between Map Anchors and Page Anchors Specify Anchors The Specify Anchors function should only be accessed when referencing a new MAP View for example in the process of georeferencing an Adobe Illustrator file see appendix A1 or to correct an inaccurate referencing The MAP Anchors are entered in the unit of the selected coordinate system MAP Anchors coordinates must be known from information written on the map e g graticules crossing or from external source metadata survey points or other When the Use Current MAP View s coordinate system option is toggled MAP Anchors coordinate values are entered in the current MAP units of the coordinate system of the MAP View When the Use XXXX option is toggled the Select button will become enabled Clicking the Select button will open the Select Coordinate System dialog box Choose any coordinate system the coordinates values entered will be in the unit Point Style for this coordinate system When the selected or default coordinate system is projected X and Y coordinates are entered in the unit Point Style of the coordinate system e g metre kilometre feet When the selected or default coordinate system is Geodetic Lat and Long coordinates are entered in degrees NOTE When the current MAP View coordinate system is a projected system the default s
331. page to map units Check this option to show the ratio and choose its location scale as page unit to map unit Display units to right of last interval label Display the units used in each ratio Page units is selectable bar if required from cm mm or inch t Ifthe Text style list does not contain a recently created character style Display units Check this option simply return to the Character Style panel double click this style and click to display the interval unit on OK in the Character Style Options dialog box This forces Adobe Illustrator the scale bar to re load the list of character styles FUNCTIONALITY MAPublisher contains ten different scale bar designs that you may incorporate into your map After creation MAPublisher scale bars can be subsequently resized via a bounding box for example to add or remove component intervals Scale bars can also be edited by selecting the Object gt Edit Scale Bar menu item PREREQUISITES To accurately create a scale bar your MAP View must contain accurate georeferencing information and the coordinate system must be projected i e not in degrees The MAP Layer on which you intend to create your scale bar must be a selected active and unlocked _ j Legend layer If you require a custom character style to be used for the labels of the Scale Bar it is also advisable to establish this style Window gt Type gt Character Styles before opening this dialog box The Scale Bar dialog b
332. parameters of the bar will be available for editing NOTE Manually editing the type position font colour etc is not possible on scale bars in their default grouped state However manual editing is still possible if the object is expanded first Object gt Expand Please note however that his will remove all opportunity to subsequently edit the art via the Scale Bar filter Please see Appendix A3 for more information on working with scale bars in MAPublisher 8 142 Chapter 14 Scale Bars and North Arrows Scale Bar Create North Arrow Object gt Filters gt MAP Legend gt Create North Arrow or MAP Toolbar l FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublisher Create North Arrow filter provides the functionality to convert selected symbology into a geographically correct north arrow Once the north arrow is created it will be rotated to true north and this property will be maintained through subsequent reprojection or rotation PREREQUISITES Fan The MAP Layer on which the art to be converted to a north arrow resides must be a Legend layer and be selected This Legend layer must be hosted by the MAP View that you wish to base the alignment of the north arrow on CREATING A NORTH ARROW Select the piece of art that you want to convert to a north arrow The art can be any form of artwork which can normally be converted to an Adobe Illustrator symbol Then select Filter gt MAP Legend gt Create North Arrow or MAPublisher toolbar button
333. patial X Y coordinates that occur along a line between the nodes and help define the shape of the arc VPF Vector Product Format A binary format used by the US Defense Mapping Agency It is well documented and can be sued as an internal format and as a transfer format It carries geographic and attribute information but no display data VPF files are sometimes referred to as VMAP products MAPublisher does not support VPF files W World file A file associated with an image that contains georeferencing information for the image File extensions may be TFW or JPW tiff jpeg World Files IRP Image Report Files or TAB Table files WWW World Wide Web Zone Any well defined region of more or less belt like form Zoom To magnify or reduce the current view of a document Appendix 5 Glossary A5 13 T
334. played in the Simple expression builder see page 76 Note the default maximum number of values which can be listed is set to 250 To increase the number of values listed in the MAP Stylesheet Editor value drop down lists please complete the following e Quit Adobe Illustrator e Open your Adobe Illustrator preferences file in a text editor The default location and name of the preferences file is Illustrator CS2 and CS3 Windows XP Documents and Settings user name Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings AlPrefs Windows Vista Users user name AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings AlPrefs Mac OS X Users user name Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CSXX Settings Adobe Illustrator Prefs Illustrator CS4 Windows XP Documents and Settings user name Application Data Adobe Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US AIPrefs Windows Vista Users user name AppData Roaming Adobe Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US AIPrefs Mac OS X Users user name Library Preferences Adobe Illustrator CS4 Settings en_US Adobe Illustrator Prefs Search for the text MaxValuesPref e Edit the listed value from 250 to the required value e Save the Adobe Illustrator preferences file e Re open Adobe Illustrator A3 2_ Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Grid and Scalebar Operations EDITING CUSTOM ART Manually editing type position font colour etc is not possible on Grids and Scale Bars in their d
335. port lt MMAP View name gt in the panel options menu Export a MAP Layer To export a single layer select the MAP Layer you wish to export in the MAP Views panel then click button ggg a Alternatively click Export lt Layer name gt in the panel options menu NOTE You cannot export multiple MAP Views or multiple layers that have been selected individually Only a single MAP View or a single layer can be exported at one time Within the dialog box select the export Format you require and then click the Settings button Keep Format Extension The MAP Layer or MAP View you are exporting will be the default name of the exported file However the feature type text i e _area line point or _text appended to Adobe Illustrator layers by MAPublisher in the Import process will be removed during the export process unless you specify that you wish to keep this If you wish to keep the feature type text check the Keep format extension option 64 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing Import MAP View Export Visible Attributes Check this option to export only the attributes that are currently visible in the MAP Attributes panel If this option is not checked all attribute columns including MAPublisher Property attributes will be exported Format Specific Settings Depending on the select export format additional specific settings may be available This is the case for the following formats AutoCAD Delimited XY Text Dat
336. pply Expression New Edit Selection Filter MAP Stylesheet Editor Attribute Expression Builder Expression Builder LLJ Lie GIGI J bs POPULATION AREA f The expression is valid 4 Expression Components Description STATE_NAME Type String Size 25 Default Value Refresh unique values Alabama Arizona Arkansas California Colorado Recent Expressions This dialog box appears when the Recent Recent Expressions button is clicked Select one or more expressions Capital Cities CAPITAL true Interstate ADMN_CLASS Interstate Toll TOLL_RD Recent Select expressions from the MAP Selection Filters see chapter 11 Expression Entry Where all composition of the expression occurs Use the keyboard operator buttons and or the Objects list to compose the expression Cursor Position Position of the current text entry point Description Displays information on the currently selected item in the Objects panel i e a description and example of the function or constant or information regarding the format of the MAP layer along with it s attribute values When selecting an attribute click the link display unique values to display the attribute values of the selected attribute column Display unique values only list up toa maximum of 1000 attribute values Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 75 Edit Expression FUNCTIONALITY The MAPublis
337. preferred format to use is Delimited Text csv NOTE dBase tables created or edited in Microsoft Excel must have a proper data type assigned to each column through cell formatting before being saved as dbf For example numerical values specified in a cell set with a format General will import as an Integer type by default therefore loosing all decimal values PREREQUISITES In order to successfully join a table into an existing attribute schema both MAP Layer and data table must share at least one common attribute column with matching values The column must be of a matching type i e String Real Integer Boolean in both the Source and the Destination table Access the Join Table tool by clicking the Join Table button Ee or options menu item in the MAP Attributes panel USING JOIN TABLE Source Table Click the Browse button to select the data table for import When the file has been selected select a common column by selecting an appropriate entry in the Matching Column drop down list Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 81 Join Table In MAPublisher double byte characters are supported in attributes on import allowing such attributes to be used for labelling and export To assign a codec suitable for your selected dataset choose an appropriate entry from the Character Encoding drop down list If the table contains column names as headers check the First line contains column names option If it does not contain headers do not chec
338. pter 4 RESULTS When you have your file s selected and if necessary specified the coordinate system and or extra settings you can click OK to import The data will be imported into Adobe Illustrator as individual Adobe Illustrator layers one for each feature type in the import The name of these layers will be the same as the name s of the original imported data files with the appropriate feature type extension appended For instance importing a polygon file named county mif and a line file named roads shp would produce two Adobe Illustrator layers named county_area and roads_line which contain the imported files Additionally these layers will be seen as part of a MAP View where the Adobe Illustrator layers will be automatically placed as sub features of a single coordinate system that being the singular coordinate system specified in the Destination MAP View section of the Advanced Import dialog box 48 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Advanced Import F 5 re A Sa Im ip r MAP Views and Georeferencing The MAP Views panel is the hub from which many additional MAPublisher features may be accessed The panel itself will display the Adobe Illustrator layers that exist in the current document as sub layers of distinct coordinate systems or MAP Views With this tool you can specify coordinate systems for map layers transform coordinate systems edit scale and data placement merge layers and export to GIS formats During
339. r GML Know Errors National Hydro GM Schema folder in MAPublisher Network nhn_01A4A001_1_0 gmI Datatype error Type InvalidDatatypeValueException installation fo avoid having to keep them Message Value does not match regular expression facet 0 9 with your GML files You can try disabling GML validation in the Settings dialog and reloading the file again SIMPLE IMPORT FUNCTIONALITY The Simple Import function provides a fast uncomplicated method of importing map data into Adobe Illustrator Its purpose is for the map maker who has a single piece of map data or several smaller files comprising one dataset of the same format and coordinate system that they wish to import quickly PREREQUISITES In order to import data via Simple Import you must first set up your Adobe Illustrator document Plan for the data that you will subsequently bring in and set up your Adobe Illustrator document accordingly For instance a map of the world would fit well into a page with a Landscape orientation whereas a map of South America would fit best into a page with a Portrait orientation Also plan for the output of the map document if necessary to ensure that your page dimensions are close to the required size that the document will be printed It is far easier to set up the page before the map data has been imported as MAPublisher will interpret these dimensions in the Importer and calculate a map scale for your document accordin
340. r buttons or double clicking an item from the Objects list inserts that item into the expression It is recommended to use the interface rather than the keyboard to build expressions because functions are formatted correctly e g with brackets and for attribute values of type strings quotations marks are added automatically Besides expressions are case sensitive For string comparison all strings values can be converted to a same case using the appropriate function LOWER string or UPPER string However the keyboard is best used for deletions Validity The validity of the expression will be displayed below the Expression Entry field and will be updated as the expression is built The Expression Validity icon will report if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes Operator Buttons Click to insert an operator at the current cursor position Available operators are as follows Open clause operator lt Logical less than comparator Close clause operator gt Logical greater than comparator AND Logical AND operator Mathematical addition operator OR Logical OR operator Mathematical subtraction operator Logical equal to comparator Mathematical division operator l Logical not equal to comparator Mathematical multiplication operator 76 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Edit Expression Expression Components Items in the Objects list fall into thre
341. r file will save all the symbols graphic styles and character styles created Create a master file with all your symbols graphic styles and character styles for easy reference when adding these elements for MAP Stylesheet creation Creating a New Stylesheet To create new MAP Stylesheets you must first select New MAP Stylesheet under the Options menu or click the New button at the base of the panel This will open the New Stylesheet function where you are required to specify the name and feature type for the new MAP Stylesheet Clicking OK will place the new stylesheet in the panel and assign it with the appropriate icon It is possible to now drag single or multiple MAP Layers with a matching feature type into this stylesheet If your data is held across a number of layers all of these layers can be placed inside the same stylesheet Note that they do not need to contain the same attribute structures As long as they are all of a matching feature type they can be placed inside one MAP Stylesheet Deleting and Duplicating Stylesheets You can create as many MAP Stylesheets as you wish within a document Note that in the MAP Stylesheets panel options menu there are functions to delete and duplicate stylesheets Selected MAP Stylesheets may be deleted by clicking the Delete button at the base of the panel or by selecting Delete Stylesheet in the panel options menu Only empty stylesheets can be deleted Associated MAP Layers must be moved to No
342. r reference for other quantities DEM Digital Elevation Model A digital elevation model is a digital file consisting of terrain elevations for ground positions at regularly spaced horizontal intervals Digital elevation models are typically used to represent terrain relief A DEM can be represented as a raster a grid of squares or as a triangular irregular network Demographics Any information relative to people in an area of interest statistics of birth death population etc Developable surface A developable surface is a simple geometric form capable of being flattened without stretching Many map projections can then be grouped by a particular developable surface cylinder cone or plane DGN Native file format of MicroStation from Bentley Systems Inc Digital The ability to represent data in discrete units or digits Digital Line Graph USGS standard output file format These files can be in either Optional opt do or SDTS ddf form Appendix 5 Glossary A5 3 C D Douglas Peucker Line Simplification Algorithm A method of simplifying line data by removing unnecessary vertices Drag To hold down the mouse button while you move the mouse cursor on the screen Drag and drop The action of clicking on objects such as icons or files and dragging them to a different location or space DTP Desktop Publishing DWG AutoCAD Drawing file DXF AutoCAD Drawing Exchange Format E Element A fundamental geograp
343. r them Priorities are set by selecting a number in the Priority drop down list for a respective layer NOTE A maximum of twelve priorities may be assigned at any given time however the same priority number can be assigned to multiple layers Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro 179 MAP LabelPro Settings MAP LabelPro Styles POINT AND AREA STYLES The Style dialog box allows users to set label style properties for each map layer To access the dialog box click the Style edit button la Set the text properties for font family style size and colour A sample preview of the stylized text is shown in the large text box Once the desired settings have been made they can be collectively saved into a style file by clicking Save As MAP LabelPro offers a pre configured default style of 12 point Arial as a base labelling option Family Specify the font for Style the labels Preview text sample result Style Indicate the desired Family Arial may not be exact for some font font style ili y Style Regular families Size Specify the font size Size 12 00pt Save As Save the current settings into a style file Colour fi Colour Choose a colour Name street text style Once saved Styles are added to the Styles drop down list in the MAP LabelPro Configuration dialog box This is very helpful in maintaining labelling consistency among similar mapping projects or whe
344. rally prepare your Adobe Illustrator workspace Establish the desired page size and orientation before importing map data as MAPublisher will establish georeferencing based on the current page However editing page dimensions after import will maintain correct georeferencing based on the new page dimensions SETTING UP YOUR DOCUMENT 1 Create a new Adobe Illustrator document by selecting File gt New or Select File gt Document Setup if you already have a blank document open The Adobe Illustrator Document Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the size to use for your page Letter 8 5 x 11 is the default size You may wish to change the orientation to landscape for some files For example a map of Chile may be best displayed in portrait but a map of Indonesia may be best displayed in landscape 3 Select your desired page units The default unit type is Points 4 Ensure the page origin is at 0 0 To do this select View gt Show Rulers Double click the top left corner of the rulers where the vertical and horizontal rulers intersect For more information and details regarding these operations please refer to your Adobe Illustrator User Guide In step 2 the default page size of 8 5 x 11 is for North American versions of Adobe Illustrator Other language versions of Adobe Illustrator may have different default page sizes Consult your Adobe Illustrator User Guide for more information NOTE Due to an Adobe Illustrator limi
345. re LANDSAT The generic name for a series of Earth resource scanning satellites launched by the United States of America Latitude Angular distance expressed in degrees and minutes along a meridian north or south of the equator A5 6 Appendix 5 Glossary H L Lat Long Latitude Longitude Unprojected Layer A designated level in artwork used for storing organizing and editing graphic or mapping data Legend The section of the map that explains the meaning of the symbols used to depict graphic or geographic elements Legend element A legend key combined with its associated text Legend key The graphic symbol used to illustrate attributes in a legend Longitude The angular distance east or west from a standard meridian to another meridian on the Earth s surface expressed in degrees and minutes Line One of the basic geographical elements defined by at least two pairs of X Y coordinates usually too narrow to be an area See also arc path and vector Listgeo A free utility for examining GeoTIFF header information It can be used to dump the contents of the GeoTIFF header in human readable form Linear scale The relation between a distance on a map and the corresponding distance on the Earth Scale varies from place to place on every map The degree of variation depends on the projection used in making the map Lossless Lossy Lossless techniques compress image data without removing detail lossy techniques compress
346. restricted to 32 bit storage for numbers which allows for seven digits of precision The 32 bit storage restriction is controlled by the graphics environment software and not the MAPublisher software We have asked for this storage restriction to be increased to 64 bit without success We can and do all our internal calculations in 64 bit for accuracy but the results still must be stored as 32 bit MAPublisher values are roughly 4 3 billion times more precise than Adobe Illustrator Adobe Illustrator is fundamentally an art program The numbers used for its vertex data are more than sufficient to provide precision enough such that the human eye cannot tell the difference even at its highest zoom level Unfortunately MAPublisher must translate its coordinates into Adobe Illustrator when placing them on the artboard We do this using mathematical calculations based upon the parameters you provide e g map and page anchors scale etc When MAPublisher does this it is in a sense compressing its more precise numbers into Adobe Illustrator less precise numbers and this is where the truncation may occur An easier way to visualize this is to think of a pad of grid paper If this paper was the artboard Adobe Illustrator would only be able to place points where two grid lines meet but MAPublisher could put points anywhere on the page However since Adobe Illustrator is ultimately where the information is plotted when a MAPublisher point is plotted on t
347. result in a fewer number of nodes being removed USING SIMPLIFY LINES To access the function choose Filter gt MAP Lines gt Simplify Lines or the MAPublisher toolbar button ae Enter a proximity value in Page Units or Map Units by making a selection from the Units drop down list Page Units will be simply the units of the current document Enter a proximity value in the unit specified by typing a value or by using the arrows Click the Preview button to see the simplification result Once the result is correct click OK to perform the actual simplification It is always a good idea to experiment with different proximity values in order to achieve the desired results particular to your scale and coverage area In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Simplify Lines is found in the Filter gt MAP Lines menu Chapter 8 Line Functions 101 Simplify Lines RESULTS All selected lines or areas are simplified according to the settings Simplified lines or areas will not be simplified again unless the tolerance value is increased For example if a line has been simplified with a proximity of 1 5 km then it will not be simplified again until the tolerance is set to a value larger than 1 5 km In practice it means that simplified lines can be selected again with non simplified lines to run the function again when the Simplify Lines function is run only the new lines will be simplified unless the proximity value is increased NOTES e Itis a good
348. rface of the Earth Grid A set of regularly spaced sample points or an exact set of reference lines over the Earth s surface Appendix 5 Glossary A5D 5 F G H Header File A file associated with an image that contains georeferencing information for the image File extensions may be TFW or JPW TIFF JPG World Files IRP Image Report Files or TAB Table files Hydrography The science of hydrography is the measurement and description of the waters on the surface of the Earth in the form of a chart and related publications Hypsography Lines or points which depict the relief of the land or contours or spot elevations Icon An image representing a software function or tool Image A graphic representation or description of a scene typically produced by an optical or electronic device Examples include remotely sensed or satellite data scanned data and photographs Import sequence The order of steps required to import data Integer A number without a decimal Integer values can be less than equal to or greater than zero Isoline A line on a surface connecting points of equal value for any of the characteristics used in the representation of the surface J Join Lines A function in MAPublisher for joining a set of linear features based on a common value such as street name JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group is a lossy compression technique for raster file formats L Label Text used to identify a map featu
349. rmats will offer additional configuration parameters which can be accessed by clicking the Settings button These file formats are ESRI Interchange File CAD DWG DXF MicroStation DGN MapInfo MIF MID MapInfo TAB KML Delimited Text Datat and GML Select your file s first If the format accepts additional settings the Settings button will be enabled See the import settings at the beginning of this chapter for an overview of the meanings of these options MicroStation Design file import is not supported under PPC Rosetta operating system t Additional Settings are mandatory only for importing Delimited Text Data Delimited Text Data Settings MAPublisher also allows for the import of delimited text files as point data provided they contain coordinate values Delimited text import allows the user to import many different formats including Decimal Degrees Delimited Degrees Minutes Seconds Degrees Minutes Degrees MinutesSeconds Packed DMS with decimals and Packed DMS see chapter 6 for more details MAPublisher supports the import of delimited text files that contain any of the following delimiters between data values comma return end of line and tab Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 43 Simple Import To import delimited text data you must choose the Columns to use for your latitude longitude or X and Y coordinates from the two drop down lists Note that only numerical columns will be listed to ease the process of determining the columns to
350. roduce dgn levels as distinct Adobe Illustrator layers Therefore a typical single import will produce one layer for each Level that exists in the MicroStation Design File MAPublisher supports the import of MicroStation J version 7 and V8 files however attached raster file will not be imported they are ignored Files are exported to DGN from MAPublisher as MicroStation J files Prior to import set the colour mode of the Adobe Illustrator document to the same scheme used in the colour table of the original file i e RGB or CMYK to ensure that the colours are interpreted correctly upon import The hierarchy of layers in multi feature imports is by feature type in the following order text layers then point layers then line layers then area layers Raster files attached to DGN files are ignored during the import process MicroStation Design file import is not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta operating system Please contact Avenza support if you require more assistance regarding this issue Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv Import and Export MAPublisher also supports the import of Delimited Text Data held in a variety of tabular file formats as long as the data contains coordinate values File types supported are Text txt Tab Separated tsv and Comma Separated csv files Import Settings dialog box In order to import point data with MAPublisher you must set parameters by clicking the Settings button This operation is
351. s are clicked will sort information alphabetically numerically When using the Save button changes are saved in the custom parameter file and when no custom file has previously been loaded to customsystems xml located in the following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In Data Source Files And the default xvw file saved is customview xvw located in the following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In The Save As button saves a copy of all the systems default and custom This creates xml and xvw files as well as a copy of geocalc xsd saved in a directory chosen by the user These files can then be exchanged between computers Custom xml and xvw files are loaded into MAPublisher through the MAP Views panel options menu Load Geodetic Datasource NOTE Please ensure that where the custom xml is saved there is a copy of the geocalc xsd in the same folder as this will be needed to load the file geocalc xsd is located in the Data Source Files folder A2 6 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource WORKING WITH GEODETIC DATASOURCE OBJECTS Creating or editing objects will prompt
352. s publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical recording or otherwise without prior written approval of Avenza Systems Inc Avenza Systems Inc Tel 1 416 487 5116 124 Merton Street Suite 400 Toll Free North America 1 800 884 2555 Toronto Ontario M4S 222 Fax 1 416 487 7213 Canada Email info avenza com Web http www avenza com Support Tel 1 416 487 6442 Support email support avenza com Data import export and co ordinate conversion powered by GeoTranslate and GeoCalc c 2009 Blue Marble Geographics Inc All Rights Reserved MAPublisher LabelPro powered by text placement engine from MaptText Inc Copyright c 2009 MapText Inc All Rights Reserved Cover and Chapter Intro maps courtesy of Carta Topografica Del Monte Calisio e Altipiano Argentario Nature Dynamics snc Rovereto Italy e Geologic Map of Washington State Washington State Dept of Natural Resources Olympia WA USA Hawkesbury River Australian Geographic Terreay Hills NSW Australia e Fostering Transit Oriented Development in Boston Boston Redevelopment Authority Boston MA USA Official Map of Louisiana 2000 Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development Baton Rouge LA USA Wandkaart Apeldoorn City of Apeldoorn Apeldoorn The Netherlands Grand Canyon Sky Terrain Boulder CO USA The World Physical XYZ Digital Map Co L
353. s will be output to Note you can only output labels to text layers in the same MAP View as the Source Layer LABEL SETTINGS MAPublisher provides options to specify label preferences such as label position alignment to lines of latitude minimum font sizes and horizontal scaling to best place labels within polygons and paths These label settings are common to Feature Text Label and the MAP Tagger Tool Line Labels MAPublisher will place Line labels intelligently depending on the curvature and length of the line string Click the Line Labels button to assign MAPublisher Line Label Settings In Adobe Illustrator CS3 Feature Text Label is found in the Filter gt MAP Legend menu Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 113 Feature Text Label MAPublisher controls where text is placed along lines by using the Distance from start option Selecting Auto will place text at the midpoint for straight lines and for curved lines this will find the smoothest portion of the curved line closest to the midpoint Selecting Fixed the distance from start is set as a percentage of the length of the line Flip upside down labels is enabled by default and will automatically orient labels correctly if your lines are flipped Disabling this feature will not flip labels If the Line Smoothing option is used MAPublisher creates a smoothed path for each text object in the selected Text layer and places the text along this path at the specified Offset value The lab
354. s with a matching feature type and original map layer into a single stylesheet Note this option will be disabled if it is not applicable Tables Table information held on table layers i e MPTables layers will be removed on document open Therefore ensure that all tables have been joined to the vector art prior to opening the document in MAPublisher 8 16 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher Compatibility Notes ALL MAPUBLISHER DOCUMENTS IN ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR 10 OR EARLIER FORMAT Legacy Text Conversion Adobe introduced new methods on dealing with text art in Adobe Illustrator CS Therefore files containing MAPublisher text objects must be converted using Adobe Illustrator and MAPublisher text conversion utilities If the Illustrator Legacy Text Conversion message appears when opening a legacy document you should click OK if the text contains attributes that need to be retained This will allow MAPublisher to use its own conversion utility to update text items maintaining the text attributes If you click Update the document will be opened however all attributes associated with this text will be lost When receiving the MAPublisher Legacy Text message choose one of the following Y Alltext art to convert both MAPublisher text and regular Adobe Illustrator text to the new Adobe Illustrator text format V MAPublisher text art only to convert only MAPublisher text to the new Adobe Illustrator text format X Nothing to open th
355. se this option if the exported file are intended for Web distribution Metadata File map xml The Metadata File map xml or map xml zip is used by the Flash viewer to get the information on the initial Zoom level Web tags contents text and image paths aspect of the callout bubble and tagged object geographic coordinates 156 Chapter 15 MAP Web Author Export to Web It is recommended to use a compressed version of this file map xml zip to allow for a fast loading of the Flash map on your Web site However advanced users may use the uncompressed version map xm For example an advanced user could create programs that automatically update the Web Tag contents If the option Compress Metadata File map xml is on a file map xml zip is created during the export Once compressed this file cannot be uncompressed to map xmil If this file is required the export must be run again with this option turned off NOTE In MAPublisher 8 0 the metadata file was named map afm or map afm compressed The decision was made to change the file extensions because these file formats were not recognized by all Web server Execute Web Export Once all the settings are entered the user launches the actual export to Flash by clicking the OK button The export summary is displayed in the Web Export Log Web Export Log Web Export Log Export Folder C FlashCanada Set Folder Permissions In order to view Layer List List of the export
356. son Cancel options for the grids or graticules grid type required and to assign settings see below ae Graticules Measured Grid Note Measured Grids can only be created on MAP Views in projected coordinate systems si i i ni a a ell Axis Labels Solid graphic denote an enabled labelling option Click an axis label to toggle all labels on that axis ON or OFF Labeling Line Labels Solid graphic shows labels will be generated Click the line label to toggle it ON or OFF Center style Normal Character Style a Axes style Normal Character Style a es Place labels off cell by 6 a Label Direction Click to reverse the _ N sa direction that labels increment eee Normal Character Style m Place labels off line by 6pt Cell Labels Solid graphic shows labels will be generated Click a cell label to toggle all center labels ON or OFF Number of decimals C Append units to labels Label values Show coordinates in MAP units J Tip Edit an existing grid by selecting it and clicking on the menu Object gt Edit Grid Center Stylet Select the Character Style to use for the Center Labels Axes Style Place off grid cell Select the Character Style to use for the Axis Labels Select a distance off the grid to place the labels Line Style Place off line Select the Character Style to use for the Line Labels Select a distance off th
357. st to specify which attribute column the expression will be applied to The columns listed here are representative of the attribute structure unique to the data layer currently displayed in the attribute table as well as the standard MAPublisher property attributes To assign an expression to a column enter a valid expression in the Expression text box The Expression Validity icon will report Y if the expression entered is valid Otherwise it will report and include additional warning notes Alternatively click the Browse button to enter and edit expressions via the Edit Expression tool page 46 The following are some examples of basic expressions which can be assigned to selected data with Apply Expression Ontario applied to column NAME Result All selected items are assigned the value Ontario in the NAME column MAP Area 01 applied to column Style Result All selected area items are assigned the value MAP Area 01 in the Style column Same items are assigned the Graphic Style MAP Area 01 on the page 45 applied to Rotation Result All selected point items are assigned the value 45 in the Rotation column Items are rotated to 45 on the page Click OK to apply the expression to the selected data updating the values in the selected attribute column and transforming data as appropriate 80 Chapter 5 MAP Attributes Apply Expression Join Table MAP Attributes panel gt Join Table Joi
358. stacles NOTE These settings are applied in conjunction to the settings from the Source Art section in the main MAP LabelPro configuration dialog box Units for margins are determined by Document Setup in Adobe Illustrator 178 Chapter 17 MAP LabelPro MAP LabelPro Settings SOURCE AND ATTRIBUTE COLUMNS MAP LabelPro These settings determine which attribute information is converted into text labels for a respective layer The Source column shows the Source Attribute Destination a eieaieaaiaaaamaaiaiai Area Point and Line layers in the document that have been enabled i ngeaEeiaaas S STREETNAME M HIGHWAYINTERST for labelling through the Setup Layers option For each layer listed B Parks_area 5 LAND_ID PARK_labels Public Schools point FACILITY M SCHOOL labels in Source column the Attribute column holds a drop down list populated with the attribute structure of that MAP layer Specify the appropriate attribute to be used for generating that layer s labels NOTE By default label case is left exactly as it is found in the attribute table To modify a label s case see the options in the Label Case frame located on the main MAP LabelPro configurations dialog box DESTINATION AND SUPPRESSION TEXT LAYERS The layers on which generated labels should be placed are specified in the Destination and Suppression Layer column drop down lists Destination layers will contain only the labels that c
359. stive and meant to assist users with limited knowledge of the S 57 format to interpret the data contents more easily The created map must not be used for navigation unless further processing is supervised by a trained hydrographer Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt Graphic Styles This folder contains five graphic style libraries with various useful styles for areas and lines MAP_AreaStyles ai MAP_LineStyles ai DGN_LineStyles ai MIF_AreaStyles ai MIF_LineStyles ai A custom library of styles for use in Area Stylesheets A custom library of style for use in Line Stylesheets A library of MicroStation DGN line styles 1 7 for use in Line Stylesheets A library of MapInfo MIF MID area styles 1 71 for use in Area Stylesheets A library of MapInfo MIF MID line styles 1 77 for use in Line Stylesheets Helpful Styles amp Symbols gt Symbols This folder contains eight symbols libraries categorized per topics Aeronautical symbols ai Bank Symbols ai MAP Symbols ai NorthArrows ai Parks Symbols ai Subway Symbols ai Transit Symbols ai Weather Symbols ai A library of aeronautical point symbols A library of symbols for major world banks for use in Point Stylesheets A library of useful map symbols A library of north arrow symbols for use in the Create North Arrow filter A library of symbols composed from the US National Parks Service font library A library of symbols from the major subway lines in the world A library o
360. string and specify a category specific parameter to search from e g Name EPSG Code in the In drop down list To find the containing sub folder of an object found by a search query right click the object and click the menu Open Containing Folder To clear this list right click on the Search Result folder name and choose Clear Search History Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems A2 5 The Geodetic Datasource The right hand pane lists the objects contained in the sub folder selected in the Folder list on the left For all objects users Can copy query or use drag and drop to move or create a short cut Only custom objects written in blue can be edited or deleted default objects installed with MAPublisher in black and indicated with a lock icon are read only Incomplete objects are indicated in red with an exclamation mark warning icon Particularly some of the default datum shifts are pointing to external grid files gsb that are missing These files cannot be distributed by Avenza due to copyright or government regulations and have be acquired separately To find the required file refer to the value column in the Definition tab of the Datum Shift Viewer For example the file nb7783v2 gsb from the datum shift NAD83 CSRS 1 Canada New Brunswick is provided by Natural Resources Canada can provide the grid NTv2 http www geod nrcan gc ca tools outils ntv2_e php Like other databases the columns are re sizable and when column heading
361. system of the final map SOURCE DATA COORDINATE SYSTEM The Source coordinate system is usually detected when the coordinate system information is available with the GIS data being imported and when supported in the native GIS format such as Shapefile e00 However in some cases this information is not imported because it is not supported in the original GIS format e g DWG DXF or when using a non referenced Adobe Illustrator files In that case the coordinate system must be specified by the user It generally can be found from an attached metadata document by contacting the data provider or in textual information on the original data itself e g title of a scanned map In all cases the source coordinate system must be known with certainty Then only can the proper parameter be specified in the MAPublisher interface A wrongly specified source coordinate system would make the map data unusable for transformations and merging with other datasets FINAL MAP COORDINATE SYSTEM Most of cartographic projects are restricted in the choice of coordinate system for the final map This parameter is usually part of the project requirement It is the task of the professional cartographer to analyze carefully the situation to make the wise decision For general purpose mapping projects interpretive or marketing maps for example a more approximative selection of the coordinate systems might be acceptable Following the request from some of our us
362. t Loads the linked document into the immediate parent of the document the link is in frame containing the Flash map _top Loads the linked document into the entire window clearing the frames To use the Trigger External URL options enter the URL address of the HTML document to open in the Hover URL or Click URL fields The specified URL can be any page available locally or any external Web page for example http www avenza com In the Target drop down list enter the name of the destination frame type in the name given by Web designers or use one of the four available reserved names Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 153 Web Tag Dialog Export Location Points to the destination folder of the exported Flash Documents Layer List Lists all the layers in the active artboard Layers are preceded with a check box when the option Enable Layer Visibility Toggle is on All layers will be visible but only checked layer will be toggable in the Flash map Quick Selection Buttons Visible when the option Enable Layer Visibily Toggle is on Select All or Deselect All layers Enable Layer Visibility Toggle Check this option to add a Layer Control box on the Flash map Flash Viewer Settings Width and Height Size of the Flash map in the browser Cannot be larger than the Adobe Illustrator document Pan Xand PanY Initial pan shift applied when the Flash map is opened Initial Zoom Zoom level when the Flash map is ini
363. t be of a matching feature type as the source layer e Pasted data will always maintain its attributes If you paste into a non map layer drag this layer into a MAP View then recreate the schema attributes will be populated appropriately Legacy Text Conversion Opening legacy files you may be prompted to update text legacy text conversion Only text objects that are associated to attributes are required to be updated For other text with no attributes you do not necessarily need to update Legacy Text Conversion MaAPublisher has detected that this document contains legacy Illustrator text art Illustrator will not recognize such text as true text art until that artis converted and MAPublisher will not display attributes for legacy text art Update If you decide not to convert the text at this time and instead opt to convert it manually at a later time be aware that Illustrator s legacy text conversion process does NOT preserve attributes for converted text art All text art Choose this option to convert all text Update to the Adobe Illustrator current version Al text art MAPublisher text art only Choose this option to MaAPublisher text art only convert only the MAPublisher text on MAP lt i layers Nothing Nothing Choose this option if no conversion is necessary A3 4 Appendix 3 MAPublisher 8 How To s For Legacy Users Appendix 4 Helpful Styles and Symbols Files The following files may be
364. t bubble ArrowBaseDistanceFromEdge ArrowBaseWidth Arrow TipX ArrowTipY INS Mouse pointer StaticPopupDrawBubbleEnabled True or False Display or not the callout bubble at a fixed location specified with the StaticPopupX and StaticPopupY options StaticPopupHeight Height of the static popup StaticPopupWidth Width of the static popup StaticPopupX X position of the static popup on the Flash map StaticPopupY Y position of the static popup on the Flash map Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 161 Web Export Advanced Settings LINE STYLE ClickLineEnabled True or False Display a line or not when a Web art is clicked ClickLineAlpha Transparency level of the line when a Web art is clicked ClickLineColor Line color of clicked Web art ClickLineThickness Thickness of the line of clicked Web art HoverLineEnabled True or False Display a line or not when a Web art is hovered HoverLineAlpha Transparency level of the line when a Web art is hovered HoverLineColor Color of the line when a web art is hovered HoverLineThickness Thickness of the line when a web art is hovered a SEARCH BOX STYLE SearchBoxEnabled True or False Display or not a search box in the Flash map SearchBoxOffsetX Distance between the top right corner of the Flash map and the top right corner of the search box along the X axis SerachBoxOffsetY Dstance between the top right
365. t points on separate layers when either a change in speed or a change in heading is observed when concurrently using one of the previously mentioned plotting options MAP GPS also provides the ability to automatically apply user defined attributes for specific layers while plotting and to record a log file of information received from the GPS device which may then be played back into an Adobe Illustrator document at a later time PREREQUISITES Prior to being able to use MAP GPS it is required to have a compatible GPS receiver Supported devices include any NMEA compliant device which has a serial COM port or Bluetooth connection option using a COM Port To use devices with USB connection the USB port must be converted to virtual serial COM port using software provided by the GPS vendor or a third party application Prior to interacting with the GPS device the proper COM port settings have to be specified in the Device Settings dialog box so that the GPS can communicate and interact with the MAP GPS function Either a new document or an existing document may be used to begin a GPS session If the appropriate type of layer is selected in the layers panel e g a point layer then points will be plotted on that layer If no layer or an improper layer for the type of plotting action is selected then a new layer will automatically be created of the proper type 166 Chapter 16 MAP GPS MAP GPS Panel USING THE MAP GPS PANEL Start Scannin
366. t the label to be positioned relative to the point The nine options in the list allow you to select where the text anchor will be placed FEATURE TEXT LABEL RESULTS When all the Layer Label Options have been set and the Label Settings have been specified click OK to label the selected features Labels applied using Feature Text Label will appear in the current default colour font and font size as set by the selected character style Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 115 Feature Text Label MAP Tagger Tool Tools gt MAP Tagger Tool FUNCTIONALITY The MAP Tagger Tool allows labels to be added to your map based on the attribute data of the features Line Point or Area MAP Layers containing attribute information can be labelled using this filter This tool functions similarly to the Feature Text Label filter However labels are created by clicking the feature with the MAP Tagger Tool You also have greater control over the initial placement of the label because the label is placed where you click and the tool provides the ability to create leader lines for labelling congested areas of the map In addition you may specify options such as alignment to lines of latitude minimum font size horizontal scaling and label position to place labels intelligently PREREQUISITES Before using this filter you must create a T Text layer in your MAP Views panel Create a new layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel and in the MAP Views pane
367. tation the document size should not exceed a limit of 200 inches by 200 inches 200 equals 5080 mm 508 cm 14400 points 1200 picas 14400 pixels Passed this limit some MAPublisher tools may not operate properly shift in positioning Note that the maximum length and width dimension for an Adobe Illustrator document is 227 5416 inches Chapter 1 Getting Started 31 Preparing the Workspace Map Data File Formats MAPublisher 8 imports and exports most of the GIS industry leading vector file formats Import Formats CAD dxf dwg ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI ArcInfo Generate gen ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 2 0 MapInfo Interchange mif mid MapInfo Table tab MicroStation Design dgn Not supported under Mac PPC Rosetta Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv KML kml S 57 000 TIGER Line rt1 bw1 USGS Digital Line Graph dlg opt USGS Spatial Data Transfer Standard SDTS ddf Export Formats CAD dxf dwg ESRI Interchange File e00 ESRI ArcInfo Generate gen ESRI Shapefile shp GML Simple Features 3 1 1 MapInfo Interchange mif mid MapInfo Table tab MicroStation Design dgn Delimited Text Data txt csv tsv KML kml This section provides an overview of the formats outlined above as well as additional considerations when using GIS data with MAPublisher For an in depth analysis o
368. td Glasgow and Edinburgh Scotland The Long Path South Central Catskills New York New Jersey Trail Conference Mahwah NJ USA Birmingham CityMap Paperback Atlas XYZ Digital Map Co Ltd Glasgow and Edinburgh Scotland Riga Address Atlas Jana Seta Map Publishers Ltd Riga Latvia e Southeast Zeeland Bike Map ANWB The Netherlands Chugach State Park Imus Geographics Eugene OR USA e Greater Philadelphia Regional Bicycle Map Steve Spindler Cartography Jenkintown PA USA Tasman Map Tasmanian Government Dept Primary Industries Water and Environment Hobart Tasmania Australia e Recreation and Historical Sites on Public Lands of Arizona Arizona Office of Tourism Phoenix AZ USA A Mosaic of Space Time and Order The Portland Oregon Super Region Metro Regional Services Portland OR USA MAPublisher 8 User Guide for Adobe Illustrator V 8 1 May 2009 Printed in Canada Avenza Systems Inc for Adobe Illustrator When Map Quality Matters User Guide Avenza SYSTEMS INC Welcome Avenza welcomes you to map making in the 21st century Combined with Adobe Illustrator MAPublisher has revolutionized the art of map making by allowing spatial data files to be used to create maps inside a vector graphics program MAPublisher allows all cartographic tasks to be performed where they should be done in a powerful graphics environment This manual assumes that the user is familiar with Adobe Ill
369. te System to File layers Specify Anchors For manually establishing the tie in point between Map and Page Anchors should only be Export Lower 48 used for new MAP Views or for the correction of georeferencing errors i Import Coordinate System From File Imports a coordinate system from different file types including WKT Layer Name Search amp Replace salami aaa definitions wkt MAP files map ESRI projection files prj MapInfo TAB files tab Load Geodetic Datasource ee Export Coordinate System to File Exports the selected MAP View coordinate system to a WKT definition wkt Preferences Import MAP View Import MAP Views and associated MAP Layers from other open documents Export Enable the export of the selected MAP View or MAP Layer to various GIS formats Merge Layers Combine two or more MAP Layers as long as their attribute structures match Ctrl key Windows or the Command key Mac to select the layers in the MAP Views panel Layer Name Search and Replace Search for text within layer names and specify an alternative Useful for multi layer imports Load Geodetic Datasource Load an external data source in xml format Edit Geodetic Datasource Open the Geodetic Datasource Editor to create new coordinate systems and edit the parameters of existing ones in the data source see appendix A2 Preferences Opens MAPublisher Preferences on the MAP Views Panel property sheet see chap
370. ted Labels are placed on iets S A a the center of the point say srt ks to shrink the A Allow use of leader lines e Allow use of leader lines Incorporate the use of Allowed Line Crosses 3 E Allow overlapping labels leader lines Allowed A Leader Width 1 00 pt Line Crosses permits the number of lines Arrow Style Style 1 the leader line will be allowed to cross Leader Width and Arrow Style adjusts the thickness and style of the leader line respectively Allow overlapping labels Check this option to allow point labels to overlap with other labels in the same labelling session SAVING AND LABELLING Once the layers main configuration style and rule based options have been completed proceed to label the map data by clicking the Save amp Label button Clicking the Save amp Label button will save the current settings close the main MAP LabelPro configuration dialog box and begin the labelling process r Progress Due to the complexity of the calculations involved in rule based text placement it is likely that a progress meter will be displayed for most labelling processes except those that are sufficiently simple or small Cancel the labelling process at any time by clicking on the IB button in the progress dialog box Alternatively save the current settings without labelling by clicking the Save button This will close the main MAP LabelPro configuration dialog
371. tem Save in Q Califomia referenced file v QO Pf 4 New Folder My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents w My Computer Exporting a coordinate system A2 14 Appendix 2 Coordinate Systems The Geodetic Datasource IMPORTING ADDITIONAL COORDINATE SYSTEM DEFINITIONS By using the Import Coordinate System from File menu item in the MAPublisher MAP Views panel options menu additional coordinate system definitions can be imported and merged with the existing datasource information MAPublisher imports the following coordinate system file formats WKT definitions wkt MAP files map ESRI PRJ files prj and Maplnfo TAB files tab Import coordinate system Look in SHP ESRI Shape 7 Of rem 30 San Diego map data 3 36005 Shape polylined Simcoe My Recent aggregate Simplify Tests Documents ArcView Import tests Swedish_characters Bad World Pacific Centered B Bart O worldmif Desktop CANADA Zenon cyprus ESRI Data FederalElection Geomedia Cagridtests Hiway Pr holes import table My Computer Many Attributes B merton shp INTS Data D nutz My Network PROJECTED Places Richmond Hill My Documents File name i L Importing an Additional Datasource NOTES e The Geodetic Datasource must be saved Save or Save As button after the import in order to be able to reuse it e New coordinate systems may also be ad
372. ter 1 52 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Views Panel RELATED TOOLS Feature Type Select the type of feature that exists on the layer being dragged This drop down list presents a choice of Area Line Point Text or Legend layer types Base Attribute Schema on Check this option to copy the attribute schema from an existing MAP Layer Select the MAP Layer name in the drop down list to copy it s attribute schema Select custom coordinate system Choose this option and then click the Select button to specify the coordinate system of the named MAP View via the Select Coordinate System dialog box see Appendix 2 Once selected the coordinate system will be displayed below it Specify Anchors Should only be accessed if you are creating a new MAP View or you are correcting inaccurate georeferencing information Caution editing anchors can damage the accuracy of your data _ Specify Anchors Map Anchors The location e Map Anchor of the Map Anchors in ee Define Layer Automatically opens when dragging a Non MAP layer into a specified MAP View Feature type Al Area a Apply to all If you are dragging a number of layers of the same feature type to a specified MAP View you should check this box _ Base attribute schema on P uscities_point Apply to all Specify Coordinate System Automatically opens when dragging a MAP Layer to an alternate MAP View and either the
373. tes only or the Template as set up in the MAP Web Author panel Template Loads the template as set up in the MAP Web Author panel _ __________ MAP Attributes Pick an attribute name in the list so that it gets inserted in the callout bubble contents NOTE MAP Attributes column names are case sensitive Chapter 15 MAP Web Author 151 Web Tag Dialog ah fe ferme ee Ope pew lt ul gt lt li gt list 1 lt li gt List lt li gt list 2 lt 11 gt lt li gt list 3 lt li gt lt ul gt Insertimage cino src ImageF1i le Canada png gt i we hi lt chart type pie showLegend true ay Pie chart values key1 attrib1 key2 attrib2 colors 0xff0000 Ox00FFOO width 180 height 180 gt lt chart type horizontalbar showLegend true showAxisValues true values keyl1 Horizontal bar chart attrib1 key2 attrib2 colors 0xff0000 Ox00fFF00 width 180 J height 180 gt Horizontal Vertical lt chart type verticalbar showLegend true sShowAx1sValues true values keyl Vertical bar chart attrib1 key2 attrib2 colors 0xff0000 Ox00fFF00 width 180 height 180 gt More advanced HTML tags combinations are possible to create more effects For more information and a complete list of HTML tags supported by Adobe Flash click the link on the Web Tag dialog box or go to http livedocs adobe com flash 9 0 m
374. text In order to use line patterns and fill patterns you must have opened or accessed the style library equivalents Two library files have been created M F_LineStyles ai and MIF_AreaStyles ai which provide support for many of the standard MapInfo pen styles stroke patterns and brush styles fill patterns These files can be found in the Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder on your MAPublisher CD Please refer to your Adobe Illustrator User Guide for details about how to add these libraries to your Adobe Illustrator Graphic Style panel Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 5 MAPublisher Import Formats MAPINFO TABLE TAB TAB is a proprietary geospatial vector data format for geographic information systems software used by MapInfo mapping products A minimum of two files are required for the tab format The DAT file which stores the attribute data and the TAB ASCII file which is the link between all other files and holds information about the type of data file The MapInfo TAB importer is closely patterned after the MapInfo MIF MID reader and writer This commonality makes it easy to support both MIF and MapInfo native formats in the same mapping file A single logical TAB file consists of a number of physical files having the following file name extensions tab The main file for a Maplnfo table it is associated with the appropriate dat map id and ind files dat Tabular data for a table in Maplnfo native format id An inde
375. th are depicted with their feature type Duplicate MAP Stylesheet Will create a duplicate of the selected MAP Stylesheet 7 P us Cities Create MAP Stylesheet legend Lock button Click this button to lock or Preferences unlock the layer Edit MAP Stylesheet Will open the MAP Stylesheet Editor dialog box to edit the selected MAP Stylesheet alaska_ares A Lower48_area v Ae stylesheet case 2 haweii_area e No MAP Stylesheet Capitals US Image waterbackground World_area No MAP Stylesheet Lists the MAP Layers which are not associated to any MAP Stylesheet Delete MAP Stylesheet Delete the selected MAP Stylesheet Create MAP Stylesheet legend Allows you to create a legend using the selected MAP Stylesheet rules Preferences Opens MAPublisher Preferences on the MAP Stylesheet Panel property Switch MAP View Click this button to sheet see chapter 1 switch the selected layer from one MAP e Se O a Stylesheet to another Remove from _ Remove from Stylesheet Case T Stylesheet moves the selected layer to ere eee No MAP Stylesheet section Delete MAP Stylesheet Deletes the selected MAP Stylesheet New MAP Stylesheet Opens the New Stylesheet dialog box to specify a name and feature type for the new MAP New MAP Stylesheet Stylesheet Name Specify a name for the new L_ a MAP Stylesheet Hama sl ae Feature Type Specify a feature type for the
376. the new styles can be added to the Graphic Styles panel and be used in the MAP Stylesheets OT oe aN ASSIGNING INCREMENTAL VALUES TO STYLES It is very straightforward to assign styles to values for stylesheets based on Equal to expressions The following examples can be used as a basis for new stylesheets providing the functionality which was previously available in the Unique Occurrences option in Auto Assign Legend Info Example 1 Rule 1 assigned first listed value and first style 1 Create the first Equal to rule using the first listed style and an expression based on the first listed value in a specified attribute column i e Style A assigned to Column X Value 1 2 Click the Add button The second rule will be automatically assigned an incremental expression i e Style B assigned to Column X Value 2 3 Keep clicking the Add button until all the values or styles have been used Example 2 Rule 1 assigned first listed value and third style 1 Create the first Equal to rule using the first listed style and an expression based on the third listed value in a specified attribute column i e Style C assigned to Column X Value 1 2 Click the Add button The second rule will be automatically assigned the first unused style i e Style A assigned to Column X Value 2 3 Keep clicking the Add button Assignments will be incremental but will not include the third style again i e Style B assigned to Column X
377. the object s editor dialog box each editor contains two tabs Identification and Definition tabs The Identification tab of the editor is used to name the object and associate identifying codes with it if applicable The Name text box contains the definition name to be used to select the object in the main list The Remarks text box is used to add notes and is optional In the dentifiers list identifying codes may be added for the object e g reference to other databases The GC code is a unique identifier assigned by MAPublisher and must not be altered To enter additional codes use the spaces below This tab is identical for all object types eooeoereeeeee n n T amp Projected Coordinate System Viewer Identification Definition Name ED50 France EuroLambert temarks Issuer Code cs ED50 EuroLambert EPSG 2192 GC 2192 Geodetic Datasource object Identification tab The Definition tab is used to define the object s parameters Parameters are specific to each object type Specific definition tabs per object are described here after Angular Units For angular units the new unit must be defined as a division of the scientific standard Degrees The abbreviation is used to identify the unit within the application interface Example The abbreviation for Degrees is deg amp Angular Unit Editor Identification Definition Abbreviation
378. tially opened Enable Navigation Check this option to display navigations button on the Flash map pan up down left right and zoom in zoom out Compress Metadata File Check this option to compress the file map xml recommended Viewer Style Expand to set the Flash viewer style actions allowed pan and zoom factors style of the callout bubbles bubble rounding settings drop shadow options 154 Export to Web Export to Web Basic Settings Web Export Dialog EEE Basic Settings Advanced Settings Export Location C FlashCanada index html Browse Layer List Major cities Provinces E background Major city names of Web Tags 0 0 13 0 Export Attributes No No Yes The built in layer Width 500 px Height 500 px Select the layers whose visibility can be toggled in the viewer Enable Layer Visibility Toggle Layer Control Built in Flash datagrid x control is simple to use whereas the external javascript file with checkbones allows more control over formatting Flash Viewer Settings a ical Pan X 0 px a E Pan Y 0 px Enable Navigation Compress Metadata File map xml recommended JPEG Image Quality Low Use Preserve Appearance Setting For Flash Export C Export For Off ine Viewing Initial Zoom 100 Export For Off line Viewing Check this option if the exported Flash
379. tically or per data type as specified in the MAP Views panel MAPublisher Preferences see chapter 1 FUNCTIONALITY MAP Views are designed to provide an easy method of accessing settings for specifying and changing coordinate systems for editing scale and data placement on the page and for exporting to GIS formats Within the MAP Views panel allows for merging Adobe Illustrator layers georeferencing existing Adobe Illustrator artwork changing multiple layer names and reprojecting data on the fly USING THE MAP VIEWS PANEL Using the MAP View Editor will be discussed in detail later in this section Reprojecting MAP Layers via MAP Views Panel The MAP Views panel can be used to move Adobe Illustrator layers from one MAP View to another enabling you to reproject vector art quickly Layers can be moved via drag and drop or with the new Switch MAP View button seri Raster imagery cannot be reprojected with MAPublisher For example if you have two imported data layers one in UTM projection and the other in latitude longitude MAPublisher will produce two distinct MAP Views each holding the associated MAP Layer If you wish to reproject the layer which is in UTM into Lat Long drag it from the UTM MAP View and drop it into the Lat Long MAP View MAPublisher will automatically reproject and scale artwork on the layer to match the destination MAP View 54 Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing MAP Views Panel When reprojecting in this m
380. ting Object Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel Select the object and choose the Copy Object button Press the 0K button to commit your changes Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file ne ale eae Renaming Moving An Existing Object Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel Select the object and choose the Edit Object button 7 Enter the modified parameters for the identification name Press the OK button to commit your changes In order to move the coordinate system object select the record and drag it to another category if necessary Press the Save button to commit your update to the Geodetic Datasource file APRN ee Saving Coordinate Systems xml file 1 Select Edit Geodetic Datasource from the options menu from the MAPublisher MAP Views panel 2 Customized the coordinate systems actions above 3 Click the Save As button type the file name This file can be exchanged with another computer using MAPublisher using Load Geodetic Datasource EXPORTING A REFERENCE FILE The defined coordinate system for a Map View can be exported as a reference wkt file via MAPublisher Export Coordinate System to File option Select Export Coordinate System to File from the MAP Views panel options menu to access the export dialog box where you can save the wkt definition Export coordinate sys
381. tion where the log is located Playback GPS Sentence Log Log File Allows the user to specify the location where the log file is located Log File Ricca Build Route A route will be created from the Playback Action __ Cancel cel information in the log file using the selected Ae Graphic style in the Adobe Illustrator panel Build Route Auto Plot by Time Settings from the Point Plot Deine moe Tee settings panel will be used to interpret the log Auto Plot by Distance file and plot points at specified times z Auto Plot by Distance Settings from the Point Plot settings panel will be used to interpret the log file and plot points at specified distances FUNCTIONALITY The Playback Sentence Log feature allows for information contained in a log file to be re imported into an Adobe Illustrator document The Playback Sentence Log feature is used in conjunction with the MAP GPS Point Plot Settings panel to create a series of points or a route in the document based upon data previously collected using MAP GPS Depending on the applied settings GPS sessions which have been previously recorded can be recreated in a new or existing document This feature may also be used to import raw NMEA files collected from other devices USING THE PLAYBACK SENTENCE LOG DIALOG BOX The Playback Sentence Log feature is used by selecting a previously recorded log file and then selecting one of the plot options Build Route Auto Plot by
382. to export in another delimited text format type another file extension csv or tsv n the file name e g file csv Users have the following options to set e Export all attributes or visible attributes only Set field delimiter in the exported text file to Comma Semi colon Space or Tab Export or not the column names on the first line RESULTS A delimited text file is created according to the specified settings Text attributes type String are exported in double quotes in the text file Style AREA STATE_NAME POPULATION Draw a Aids1 121757 343000 New Mexico 1819046 true Aids3 264435 873000 Texas 20851820 true Aids1 70003 325000 Oklahoma 3450654 true Chapter 5 MAP Attributes 83 Export Attributes North Sea DEN Jyllanda weya e Edinburgh zy IAEN D Er K S Irish Sea e Ses f 3 en gham 5 Rr NG AND gt rale Londo Oa es al 4 pont Channel x Eng E in ng at aaa NF an hester l f rod ar han Bay of X ERA 6 i y Abas ile a sN i pubs ionian ea Palo an T n r du bo oe Tatassasset ioie Plotting Points The ability to place points onto a map is a fundamental part of cartography Points can represent the locations of towns and cities shops and malls airports and train stations and more MAPublisher provides the functionality to create or plot points in vector format T
383. to place labels intelligently PREREQUISITES Before using this filter you must create a Text layer in the MAP Views panel Create a new Adobe Illustrator layer in the Adobe Illustrator Layers panel and in the MAP Views panel drag it to the MAP View holding the features you wish to label Set the feature type to Text when prompted For best results set up a character style for type font size justification and color Adobe Illustrator menu Window gt Type gt Character Style Select the appropriate style in the Character Style panel before starting the Feature Text Label tool and MAPublisher will generate labels based on these settings Otherwise labels applied will appear in the current default colour font and font size Then select the features that you want to label and go to Filter gt MAP Legend gt Feature Text Label or the MAPublisher toolbar button to access the function FEATURE TEXT LABEL SETTINGS Source Layer and Column You must first set the options for MAPublisher to determine the attributes that will be converted to text labels The Source Layer list will show the Area Point and or Text layers currently containing selected data For each layer the Column drop down list s is populated with the attribute structure of that layer You must choose a column that holds the attributes you wish to label the map with Target Text Layer In the Text layer drop down list s you must specify a Text layer that the label
384. tor EPS The Encapsulated Post Script EPS file is used to transfer PostScript language artwork between applications also see PostScript in the glossary section of the User Guide EPS files are easily opened by Adobe Illustrator because the format is widely supported by most graphics programs It is the preferred format for export to most illustration and page layout programs EPS files are by their nature vector based but can contain embedded raster graphics and fonts GIF Graphic Interchange Format GIF is a colour indexed graphics format commonly used for web pages and image file transfer Adobe Illustrator can export 8 bit indexed colour or grayscale gifs JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG or JPG is a compression technique for raster file formats The Digital Orthophoto Quadrangle geographic images from the USGS are stored in this format which can be imported by Adobe Illustrator and registered by the MAPublisher Register Image filter DOQ are usually very large files 30 40 MB or more and will require extremely large amounts of RAM PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a standardized format developed by Adobe for use across Macintosh Windows DOS and UNIX platforms Based on the PostScript Level 2 language PDF supports both raster and vector graphics TIF TIFF GEOTIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF or TIF is a common raster graphic file format that can be imported by Adobe Illustrator Many raster geographic images
385. tor User Guide for more details PPC Power PC e g Macintosh PowerPC computer Precision The number of digits used to express the fractional part of a number The more digits the more precision Projection The representation on a plane surface of any part of the surface of the Earth Also see Map Projection Appendix 5 Glossary A5 9 P P R Raster A method for the storage processing and display of spatial data Each given area is divided into rows and columns which form a regular grid structure Each cell must be rectangular in shape although not necessarily square Each cell within this matrix contains an attribute value as well as location coordinates The spatial location of each cell is implicitly contained within the ordering of the matrix unlike a vector structure which stores topology explicitly Areas containing the same attribute value are recognized as such however raster structures cannot identify the boundaries of such areas as polygons Also raster structures may lead to increased storage in certain situations since they store each cell in the matrix regardless of whether it is a feature or simply empty space Record A set of attributes relating to any entity a set of related contiguous data Redundancy The duplication of data in a database Remote sensing The technique of obtaining data about the environment and the surface of the Earth from a distance for example from aircraft or satellite Render T
386. tracts census block groups and census block The database contains information about these features such as their location in latitude and longitude the name the type of feature address ranges for most streets the geographic relationship to other features and other related information More information on the TIGER Line file format and data product can be found on the U S Census web page at http www census gov geo www tiger Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide A1 7 MAPublisher Import Formats This web site contains a detailed description of the current TIGER Line format with an explanation of field meaning for each feature type A detailed description of the TIGER Line 1998 format with an explanation of field meaning for each feature type is available at http www census gov geo www tiger tiger98 pdf Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions rt1 bw1 Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Circles No User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc No Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc No Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses No Spatial Index Never Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Transaction Support No Point Yes Geometry Type Attribute tiger_type Line Yes Text No Supported Versions 1992 1995 1997 1998 1999 2000 2002 USGS DIGITAL LINE GRAPH DLG OPT DLG is a fixed field record that may or may not have end of line markers The DLG file structure was designed to accommo
387. tting points by a specified distance Start Route Begins plotting a route MAP GPS DEVICE SETTINGS Accessed from the MAP GPS menu The MAP GPS Device Settings dialog box provides for the input of the specific settings for the connected GPS Device Users are required to manually select the appropriate settings prior to using MAP GPS Appropriate settings for specific devices can usually be obtained by consulting the device s user manual or by contacting the manufacturer Port Name Select the proper serial port for your GPS device Baud Rate Select the baud rate for your GPS device Data Bits Select the data bits for your GPS device Parity Select the proper parity for your GPS device Stop Bits Select the proper Stop Bits for your GPS device Flow Control Select the proper flow control for your GPS device Test this Configuration Select button to ensure all the specified features are inputted correctly before continuing 168 Chapter 16 MAP GPS MAP GPS Panel Menu MAP GPS Point Plot Settings Accessed from the MAP GPS menu Type Select the type of Plot you would like to apply the setting to Either Manual Plot Plot By Time Plot MAP GPS Point Plot Settings x ERE by Distance Plot by Change in Speed or Plot By Change in Heading may be used Type Plot by Time E Scale Sets the size of the chosen symbol prior to or ___ Sgae during plotting if required f Every bel i sec
388. ttings C Allow random colour mode C Expand network links C Import KML properties as visible attributes Expand Network Links Checking this box will enable the use of network linked KML files Import KML as Visible Attributes When this check box is selected the KML specific attributes will be imported into the attribute table as a visible entities The KML attributes that will be imported are Description and Address which will display in the MAP Attributes panel as km Description and kmlAddress The description column will show the description of each object and the address column will show the corresponding address for that object When this check box is not selected the attributes will still be imported however they will not be immediately visible in the MAP Attributes table Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 41 Simple Import GML Simple Features 2 0 Settings Settings GML validation C Disable no attribute types You may select this option if the file fails vatdstion however the attributes wil be read as strings GML validation GML validation must be disabled to import GML files with a missing xsd file or with an invalid attribute structure MAPublisher If not disabled a GML validation error will be i i i Hint GML validation error displayed during the import of these files EAX Parser Wida Dar nt ine 90942 cohen SA Copy your frequenily used XSD files to Slash data MAPublishe
389. tude the name the type of feature address ranges for most streets the geographic relationship to other features and other related information TIGER Line files are the public product created from the Census Bureau TIGER database of geographic formation TIGER was developed in order to support the mapping and related geographic activities required by the census and sample survey programs More information on the TIGER Line file format and data product can be found on the US Census web page at http www census gov geo www tiger MAPublisher considers the rt1 or bw1 file as the TIGER dataset Even though each county will consist of a series of files with a common base name there may be a number of different extensions Remember to select the rt1 or bw1 file when importing TIGER data Chapter 2 Map Data File Formats 37 Import and Export Supported Data Formats USGS Digital Line Graph dlg opt Import only The United States Geological Survey DLG file structure is designed to accommodate categories of spatial data represented on a conventional line map Node point line and area data types are accepted The attribute coding scheme is designed to accommodate basic cartographic data categories such as hypsography hydrography or political and cultural features as well as additional thematic data categories USGS Spatial Data Transfer Standard SDTS catd ddf Import only Digital cartographic products of the USGS are available
390. ublisher supports the import of delimited text files that contain any of the following delimiters between data values comma return end of line and tab To import delimited text data you must choose the Columns to use for your X and Y coordinates from the two drop down lists Note that only numerical columns will be listed to ease the process of determining the columns to use If the first line of the text file you are importing contains column headings check the Use first line as a header check box though MAPublisher will generally automatically detect if this is the case If the file does not appear to contain column headers MAPublisher will assign the default headers Column Column2 to the attribute columns on import Advanced Import File List Once the Dataset text box has been populated with a valid path and you have clicked OK the program will close the Advanced Import Data Source dialog box and either read the selected file s to determine the coordinate system or attach your specified coordinate system to the files The file s will now be listed in the Advanced Import dialog box You can now add more files to this list for instance adding the next file format by re clicking the Add button and proceeding in the same manner as specified above There are two columns present in the Advanced Import list The first will display the full path of each file and the second will display the coordinate system that has either been automaticall
391. ude and longitude and select a graphic style for the grid lines Use the slider to increase or decrease the number of vertices used in the graticules if required use a higher number if the graticules will be highly curved due to the current projection The graticule may have a section in one of the corners that you do not wish to label perhaps there is no data in this graticule or there is only a small portion of that graticule showing and it does not need to be labelled The don t label feature allows you to not label a specific column or row MEASURED GRIDS The Measured Grid option allows for cells to be plotted at specific sizes and position when there is a projected coordinate system in the current MAP View The extents of the grid can be modified using this option within the geographical extents of the current MAP View The width and height of each cell composing the grid should be specified in the Width and Height text boxes you can modify the map units used for these dimensions if required by making an alternate selection in the Units list A fixed number of cells for columns and rows can be enforced if required Additionally you can specify a preset X and Y origin for the grid or choose specific coordinates for a pass through point LABELLING OPTIONS A number of labelling options are available for use in grids and graticules Axis labels and cell labels for indexing can be included the direction of axis and cell labels can be modifie
392. ues Then start the Flip Lines function e AreaDirection property value chapter 5 for convert areas one by one e Select the area to edit and then choose the alternate value for AreaDirection in the MAP Attributes panel TEXT Property Text Exports It is not possible to export values in the Text property column An alternative is to create a new string attribute column and assign it an expression of Text See Edit Schema in chapter 5 on MAP Attributes Add Edit Geodetic Datasource Please see appendix A2 for further information on how to edit the geodetic datasource Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 65 Import MAP View MAP Location Tool MAP Toolbar or Tools gt MAP Location Tool and Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Location Displays the parameters of the currently selected layer WX WY The X and Y coordinates of the MAP Location x a Latitude Longitude The latitude and longitude cursor in current map units e_ wx 6735373 081201 WY 4713611 801668 coordinates of the cursor in degrees based on Longitude 79 242434 Latitude 44 190616 the geodetic datum of the coordinate system Scale 1 Scale of the current layer eScale 1 18453568 00000 Angle 0 00000 ___ _ Angle Angle of Rotation Map X 10817148 54308 Page X Opt Map X Y i Map Anchors Map Y 2666214 06202 Page Y Opt Projection Robinson in METER e
393. ulate the next rule 110 Chapter 9 MAP Stylesheets MAP Stylesheet Editor Labelling Functions One of the most useful features of MAPublisher is the ability to create labels for map objects using values from the MAP Attributes panel Manually entering and placing labels is not necessary provided that the labelling information is included in the map attributes of the MAP Layer being labelled MAPublisher provides two methods of adding labels to your map both of which contain options to place labels intelligently using defined label settings One way to create feature labels is to first select all the features you want to be labelled and use Feature Text Label to label all of them by specified attribute values An alternate method involves using the MAP Tagger Tool to apply labels individually also by specified attribute values Topics covered in this section are Feature Text Label MAP Tagger Tool For more advanced labelling capabilities refer to chapter 17 on MAPublisher LabelPro additional license required Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 111 Labelling Tools For Feature Text Label and MAP Tagger Tool Feature Text Label Source Layer Lists the Point Line and Area i solirce Laver Cohurnn Text Layer layers which can be labelled For Feature 1 IB city_symbal ji PEET Text Label only layers containing selected 2 IE Rivers_generaiised_line River_Name xi
394. umber yee MAPublisher 8 1 Floating Unlicensed N Jason Anderson David Andrec Tara Dennis Dimo Dinev MAPublisher Label Pro 1 0 Floating Unlicensed Garvan Keeley Michael Law V ronique Lutes J gat Avenza Michael Marsella Stephen Maxwell Andrew Patterson SYSTEMS INE liya Varaev Kimiko Watanabe Michael Yakubovsky amp Peter Zhang www avenzacom Avenza Support 1 416 487 6442 Avenza Sales 1 416 487 5116 U Evauate Pregster Checkout_ Automatically checkout license Machine ID abcdefghijkl License status Unlicensed Use roaming license Don t show again O Duration of borrow 1 day s The borrowing period begins when you disconnect from the server MAPublisher welcome screen MAPublisher License Management ACTIVATING AN EVALUATION VERSION OF MAPUBLISHER 1 After installation of MAPublisher 8 click the Evaluate button of the MAPublisher Welcome Screen or MAPublisher License Management dialog box Fill the form If you cannot activate the evaluation license directly from the application due to Firewall limitations then go to www avenza com register or email activation avenza com or phone and provide the Machine ID displayed in the MAPublisher License Management dialog box An email with a zipped license file attachment will be sent to you You must unzip this attachment and save the lic file to the appropriate folder 18 Chapter 1 Getting Started MAPublisher License Management 2 When you are ready t
395. update the other accordingly NOTE The MAPublisher Register Image supports the registration of images having non square pixels RESULTS When registering GeoTIFF images a warning message will be displayed if the coordinate system of the image does not match the selected MAP View s coordinate system When registering images not in GeoTIFF format while creating a new MAP View the coordinate system of the MAP View has to be specified in the MAP View Editor to finalize the georeferencing Provided that the coordinate system placement and size of the raster image are correct the image will be scaled and registered When matching vector data is available the image will fit to the artwork The MAP Location Tool can be used to check the positions see chapter 4 NOTES e Raster images cannot be transformed into another coordinate system If the vector data is transformed through the MAP View Editor Perform Coordinate System Transformation function after the image has been register the image will have to be transformed externally with Avenza s Geographic Imager for example and registered again in MAPublisher Registered images can be re scaled and rotated together with the vector data but not automatically After the vector data has been re scaled or rotated using the MAP View Editor Register Image must be used to re apply the image referencing information In the case of a manual registration it is recommended to use the Export Image function b
396. ur plug ins folder is indicated I try to access the MAPublisher filters but always receive a message saying MAPublisher cannot obtain a license What should I do 1 Check you have registered your copy of MAPublisher and received a license file MAPublisher will fail to operate until you have received a license file for activation For further details please see chapter 1 2 If you have purchased a machine specific or fixed license you must ensure the License file is located in the following directory Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Avenza MAPublisher 8 Windows Vista C ProgramData Avenza MAPublisher 8 Mac OS X Applications Avenza MAPublisher 8 MAPublisher Plug In 3 If you have a try out version of MAPublisher check that your copy has not expired To do this locate the lic file in the directory listed above Open this file in a simple text editor On the second line will be details of the expiration date of your try out version Note that this file has been automatically generated by Avenza and therefore manually editing will not re activate MAPublisher 4 If you have moved your license to a new computer you must notify Avenza and request a rehosting To organize a rehosting email activation avenza com and provide your MAPublisher 8 serial number along with the new machine ID The new machine ID can be found by selecting the Telephone Email option in the MAPublisher Activation Wizard on the new computer
397. urrent Layer dialog box provides the ability to create a new attribute column for the current layer or use an existing string text attribute column and have custom attribute values automatically entered in that column for plotted features Attribute values will be added each time a new point is plotted For example if points are being plotted along a street a Street column could be created and the street name could be added as an automatic attribute value each time a new point is plotted PREREQUISITES Prior to using this feature the current document requires a MAP View and at least one MAP layer If the MAP layer is selected then the Edit User Attribute for Current Layer is accessible and can be set up for use when plotting begins If the above criteria are not met the Edit User Attribute for Current Layer menu item will be greyed out and unavailable USING THE EDIT USER ATTRIBUTE FOR CURRENT LAYER The Edit User Attribute For Current Layer function can be accessed whenever a valid MAP layer is selected Upon opening the dialog box the current layer name will be displayed in the dialog box along with any string attribute column names associated with that layer To add attribute values to an existing attribute column select the desired column name from the Current Attribute combo box and enter the desired attribute value into the Current Value text field To create a new column select the Create New button and enter a column name into the open dialog
398. us versions of MAPublisher 6 x and earlier will need to be recreated with the new tool if the generation of an index is required Legend to Stylesheet Conversion Legend functionality Assign Legend Info Draw Legend etc was ported into MAP Stylesheets in MAPublisher 7 Legend information held in legacy MAPublisher documents 6 x and earlier will be converted into stylesheets on document open Subsequently Graphic Styles for line and area legends Character Styles for text legends and Symbols for point legends will automatically be generated and added to the respective Adobe Illustrator panels To qualify for legend conversion legend art in legacy documents must contain the following properties 1 Be ofa valid art type i e polygon path symbol or text 2 Have a legend expression assigned via Assign Legend Info or Auto Assign Legend Info 3 Have a target MAP Layer During the conversion process you will be asked to set additional conversion preferences 1 Determine if target MAP Layers should be immediately assigned to the applicable stylesheet Checking this option will immediately apply the new stylesheets to map art on target layers whereas unchecking this option means the new stylesheets will not be applied on document open allowing you to manually drag target layers into the applicable stylesheet later Note auto assignment conversions are slower 2 Determine if you wish to merge similar converted stylesheets i e stylesheet
399. ustrator and has at least a basic understanding of geographic information systems GIS terminology and concepts Please refer to the Adobe Illustrator user guide for more information on using Adobe Illustrator A glossary of GIS terms is included at the back of this manual The User Guide explains the installation process and the many features of MAPublisher All MAPublisher panels filters and tools are thoroughly detailed together with the related concepts necessary to build map and perform fundamental cartographic and GIS tasks As a complement to this guide the MAPublisher software installer includes tutorial documents MAPublisher 8 Tutorial Guide pdf MAPublisher 8 Quick Start Guide pdf and MAPublisher 8 MAP LabelPro Tutorial Guide and associated GIS datasets We encourage all users to go through these guides to gain additional experience with MAPublisher tools and functions MAPublisher and Adobe Illustrator together constitute an integrated cartographic design software system with state of the art graphics tools and geographic functions Contents Welcome Contents Introduction Vill What s New in MAPublisher 8 ix Chapter 1 Getting Started 13 System NECUINGINGINES tetera ne nau anet anes eeutese een doatecureasenances 14 Installation INSMUCTIONS s lt 0 ceectandeeceeeursusaarcastareredulcekerserturess 15 MAPublisher Compatibility Notes sc4c0ceivals pe eeendetweeewndeatecteeweseetane 16 MAPublisher License Management
400. ustrator as individual Adobe Illustrator layers one for each feature type in the import The name of these layers will be the same as the name s of the original imported data file with the appropriate feature type extension appended For instance importing a single polygon file named world mif would produce a single Adobe Illustrator layer called world_area which contains the imported file Additionally this layer can be seen as part of a MAP View where Adobe Illustrator layers are automatically placed as sub features of MAP Views in relation to specific coordinate systems NOTE You may receive a MAPublisher warning upon importing data exceeding the allowable 32 000 points per path in Adobe Illustrator In this case MAPublisher automatically simplifies the imported object and shows the following message MAPublisher Your map file contains elements that exceeds Illustrator s point per path limitation MAPublisher has imported the file however certain objects were simplified 44 Chapter 3 Importing Map Data Simple Import Coordinate System Indicate the coordinate system of the file to be imported File Numbers Allows the selection of individual files in order to activate the Edit and Remove buttons Add Allows the selection of files for import by opening the Advanced Import Data Source function see below New based on Imports all of the files to one of the coordinate systems in the File List Use existin
401. ustrator document Initial position of the Flash map of the display initial Zoom pan X and pan Y if Zoomed in e Display of the navigation buttons or not Users can also make some more advanced changes to the default display settings such as e Viewer style enable only some of the navigation buttons change the zoom and pan factors change the button positions e Popup style change the rounding of the callout bubble arrow style change the drop shadow settings and position e Line style change the color and thickness of line marking clicked and hovered objects e Search box style enable or display of the search box change the default position change the color and thickness of the line marking the objects found by the search Additional Settings Images in Adobe Illustrator are exported as JPEG the JPEG Image Quality slider allows to set the compression level exported images This setting does not apply to images included in Web tags The option Use Preserve Appearance Settings For Flash Export flattens the artwork to a single layer before exporting It is recommended to maintain the artwork quality However some known issues with Adobe Illustrator Flash export cause some documents to fail to export with this option on The option to Export for Off line Viewing allows to produce SWF files that will work off line without having to update Flash security settings In this case the exported SWF will not work on line do not u
402. vide faster access to some existing functionality the column button makes setting attribute visibility much more accessible and the Zoom to Feature button zeroes in on the current row s artwork in one click The look and feel of the panels has also been improved with new icons for existing buttons as well as new attribute type icons in the column headers Additionally the list of layers now only displays MAP layers that have selected MAP features selected The MAP Attributes panel has a new function Export Attributes to export all selected attribute information to a delimited text file comma space tab or semi colon separated Simplify Line Functionality With MAPublisher 8 Simplify Lines now preserves topology when simplifying no more gaps between simplified polygons In addition a new preview option lets you see the results without leaving the dialog box it even displays simplification statistics like points removed Import Optimization The import process has been optimized improving the loading speed by up to 80 MAP Views Panel The MAP Views panel has been revamped for speed and stability The panel should also provide better feedback about the states of layers and MAP Views One immediate effect is that large files or files with large number of layers and MAP Views open much faster Additionally the MAP Views panel has a new Export button for easy access as well as a new Switch to MAP View button which should facilitate the
403. vigational Charts to ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and Information System The format is public developed and maintained by the IHO International Hydrographic Office CHRIS working committee Committee on Hydrographic Requirements for Information Systems The objects spatial geometry can be of Point Line or Area geometry while object descriptions are categorized in object classes organized in specific attributes schemas For a full format description please visit http www iho shom fr PUBLICATIONS IHO_Download htm S 57 Appendix A in particular An online object catalog is also available on www s 57 com An S57 base file has the extension 000 while the update files have extensions like 001 002 and so on It can also be accompanied by other files 000 main file 001 update file 1 002 update file 2 00n update file n files TXT and files JPG ancillary text and picture files indicated in attribute definition Update files contains only the changed new deleted modified objects and are only used as a complement of a 000 file Only the 000 file is required for the import into MAPublisher The update files will be applied at conversion when present However text and image files linked to attributes will be ignored A1 10 Appendix 1 Technical Reference Guide MAPublisher Import Formats Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions 000 001 002 Aggregate No Automated Translation Yes Cir
404. x to a Maplnfo graphical objects MAP file map Contains geographic information describing map objects ind An index to a Maplnfo tabular DAT file These extensions are added to the base name of the TAB file creating separate physical files that must all reside in the same directory You must select the tab file for import Supported Elements Supported Geometry Typical File Extensions tab dat id map ind Aggregate Yes Automated Translation Yes Circles Yes User Defined Attributes Yes Circular Arc Yes Coordinate System Support Yes Elliptical Arc Yes Generic Colour Support Yes Ellipses Yes Spatial Index Always Polygon Yes Schema Required Yes Donut Polygon Yes Geometry Type Attribute mapinfo_type Point Yes Line Yes Text Yes Prior to the import process additional Settings can be made which will affect how the selected file will import The following parameters can be applied to the import e Import as Visible Attributes Enable this option to view the pen and brush pattern values in the imported attribute table The MAPublisher TAB importer supports the storage of point line polyline arc ellipse rectangle rounded rectangle region polygon and text geometric data in tab files Each geometric entity present in a tab file has display properties such as pen and brush width pattern and colour Supported TAB properties match those described for MID MIF files on the previous page Raster TAB files cannot be imp
405. xist e What has changed since FEATURES OF AGIS Analytical Tool GIS systems are used by all levels of governments academia and business for such diverse purposes as monitoring environmental changes sales planning census reporting municipal zoning land records mineral resource management and mapping telecommunications and cable television utilities In short a GIS serves many needs and can be thought of as an analytical tool since it can be used to determine spatial relationships between geographic areas A GIS contains a database linking spatial data with geographic information and lets you associate information with map features and to create new relationships based on those associations Areas An area is a closed bounded object which encompasses a homogeneous area e g a park Attributes Attributes store descriptive information and are stored as sets of characters including numbers Attributes are usually considered tabular data Geographic Data Since a GIS is a digital map database storing both spatial graphic and descriptive tabular information the integration of this information provides an opportunity for analysis and communication Data is stored using the Cartesian system X Y coordinates as follows e Points are stored as a single X Y location e Lines are stored as a series of ordered X Y coordinates e Areas are stored as a string of X Y coordinates defining the lines that bound the area Labels
406. xt box NOTES e The import of multiple of Delimited Text files is not supported Data provided in a generic latitude and longitude unprojected coordinate system will usually be recognized as a WGS 84 World Geodetic System 1984 EPSG 4326 coordinate system by the MAPublisher importers Source Coordinate System Once the Dataset text box has been populated with a valid path the program will read the file s to determine the coordinate system and display this in the Source Coordinate System section see chapter 4 on MAP Views If the program returns the message No Coordinate System Specified for the coordinate system you may click the Specify button to specify it MAPublisher will read the coordinate system automatically if the file format supports projection information In the Specify Source Coordinate System dialog box coordinate systems are separated into categories to ease the process of choosing a coordinate system Under the Coordinate System category All will list all the coordinate systems in the database For an overview of Geodetic and Projected systems and Datums see appendix A2 If you wish to view the parameters of a certain coordinate system click the Info button Character Encoding Extended and international character sets are supported as attributes on import To assign a character codec suitable for your selected dataset choose the appropriate value from the list box Format Specific Settings Certain file fo
407. y and type the file name where to save the exported Filename D Temp Export csv attributes Options Scope Choose to export all the Scope Export all attributes attributes or only the visible attributes Export visible attributes only Delimiter Specify the field delimiter Delimiter Comma ha Include column names on first line Click Select Comma Semi colon Space or T this option to export the column names on the first line of the exported text file Tab from the drop down list C Indude column names on first line FUNCTIONALITY The Export attributes function exports all selected attribute information from the current MAP Layer to a delimited text file comma space tab or semi colon separated PREREQUISITES Attributes will be exported as they are in the MAP Attributes panel For example users can change the number of decimals for attributes of type Real prior to exporting see Edit Schema in this chapter to limit the size of the exported file or to turn on off the visibility of some attributes with Edit Schema or the MAP Attributes panel Show Hide function see previous section in this chapter USING EXPORT ATTRIBUTES Export attributes is accessed from the MAP Attributes panel options menu In the Export Attributes dialog box click the Browse button to navigate to the directory where the exported file will be saved and type a file name By default the exported file will be appended a txt extension
408. y read by the program or assigned manually Each file added to the Import list will have a row number that can be clicked in order to select it This function will allow you to remove a selected file from the Import list or edit a selected file Therefore to remove a selected file or number of selected files from the Import list click the Remove button NOTE The file list cannot contain a mix of known and unknown coordinate systems Chapter 3 Importing Map Data 47 Advanced Import Changing Coordinate Systems Prior to Import If the program displays Unknown for the Coordinate System of a file you may select the row and click the Edit button to specify it by returning you to the Advanced Import Data Source dialog box It is not possible to import multiple files with a mix of unknown and known coordinate systems therefore the unknown coordinate systems will need to be specified Note that you can only import the listed files in a single coordinate system even though they may comprise of several coordinate systems Therefore the Destination MAP View section holds the details of which coordinate system the listed files will be imported in The destination coordinate system the file s will be imported into will be displayed in the panel in this section and will show the Name of the coordinate system its Map and Page Anchors Scale and Angle for the selected file These settings will be discussed more in chapter 5 MAP Attributes Destination MA
409. ype and MAPublisher settings Line labels are assigned angle of line at click point Al Area labels are placed horizontally Point labels are placed horizontally NOTE To create custom leader lines use a graphic style Create or load a graphic style and select it in the Graphic Styles panel while using the MAP Tagger Tool function Chapter 10 Labelling Functions 117 MAP Tagger Tool w l regs i AY efi me Shy aking Selections MAPublisher contains tools for selecting data graphically and by attribute values The MAP Selection Filters tool provides functionality to create edit and save multiple selection criteria These selections can be applied to any MAP Layer and are saved in the document The MAP Selection Stats tool can be used for quickly selecting all features contained in a MAP Layer for viewing how many objects are selected at a given time to save a selection and to reverse selections The topics covered in this section are as follows MAP Selection Filters MAP Selection Stats Chapter 11 Making Selections 119 MAP Selection Filters Window gt MAPublisher gt MAP Selection Filters or MAP Toolbar F Filters List Lists the Selection criteria in the current document Not Valid Filter Icon If the expression is not valid for that particular data layer a red exclamation mark will be displayed Valid Filter Icon When a selection filter contains an expression that is valid for
410. ystem The objects spatial geometry can be of Point Line or Area geometry while object descriptions are categorized in object classes organized in specific attributes schemas To make full use of this format refer to the online object catalog available on www s 57 com MAPublisher imports non encrypted S 57 data into MAP layers named per S 57 object acronym of type Area Line or Points All S 57 Attributes are converted into MAP Attributes An Adobe Illustrator template is supplied to automatically style the map after import The template contains a series of MAPublisher stylesheets linking S 57 imported features to nautical symbols and graphic styles libraries provided by Avenza This representation is non exhaustive and meant to assist users with limited knowledge of the S 57 format to interpret the data contents more easily The S 57 template and the symbols and graphic styles libraries can be found in the MAPublisher Helpful Styles amp Symbols folder see Appendix 4 TIGER Line rt1 bw1 Import only TIGER is an abbreviation of Topologically Integrated Geographic Encoding and Reference System and was developed by the U S Census Bureau TIGER Line files are a digital database of geographic features such as roads railroads rivers lakes political boundaries census statistical boundaries etc that cover the entire United States The database contains information about these features such as their location in latitude and longi
411. ystem specified in Use XXXX is set to the geodetic system base for the projection For example if the MAP View s system is the US State Plane NAD83 Colorado North ftUS the default alternative system is set to NAD83 to enter the latitude longitude coordinates in degrees The Page Anchors are entered in the current unit of the document This unit can be changed through the Adobe Illustrator menu File gt Document Setup Positions of points on the document in page coordinates are determined using the Adobe Illustrator Info panel menu Window gt Info Chapter 4 MAP Views and Georeferencing 55 MAP Views Panel Layer Name Search and Replace The MAP Views options list also provides a Search and Replace function enabling the quick change of names of multiple Adobe Illustrator layers For example MicroStation Design or CAD imports may contain a large number of similar named layers This option will allow you to quickly change the names of all layers that contain a specified character string Merge Layers This panel also provides a fast way of merging Adobe Illustrator layers If you have more than one layer in a MAP View that contain the same attribute structure and data type this option will allow them to be merged into a single layer For example your data may have been received in pieces and you therefore find it occupying multiple layers in Adobe Illustrator Press the Ctrl or Shift keys Windows or the Command or Shift keys Mac an

MAPublisher 8.0 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents